Toyota 2008 Rav4 Owners Manual

2015-09-07

: Toyota Toyota-2008-Rav4-Owners-Manual-763138 toyota-2008-rav4-owners-manual-763138 toyota pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 484 [warning: Documents this large are best viewed by clicking the View PDF Link!]

Quick Reference Guide
foreword
gas
01_01
01_02
01_03
01_04
01_05
01_06
01_07
01_08
01_09
01_10
02
03
04
05
06
07_01
07_02
07_03
08
09
impman
imptoy
rm
seatbelt

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Overview of instruments and controls

Instrument panel overview 2. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Steering switches overview 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Overhead console overview 7. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument cluster overview 8. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel 9. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 1

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Side defroster outlets

2. Side vents

3. Instrument cluster

4. Center vents

5. Auxiliary box

6. Power door lock switches

7. Power window switches

8. Glove box

9. Automatic transmission selector lever

10. Rear console box

11. A/V input adapter

12. Power outlet (115 VAC)

13. Power outlet (12 VDC)

14. AUX adapter

15. Power rear view mirror control switches

16. Parking brake lever

17. Cup holders

18. Hood lock release lever

19. Window lock switch

Instrument panel overview

"View A

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Instrument panel light control dial

2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog

light switches

3. Wiper and washer switches

4. Four−wheel drive lock switch

(four−wheel drive models) or “AUTO

LSD” switch (two−wheel drive models)

5. Audio system

6. Emergency flasher switch

7. Front passenger occupant classification

indicator light

8. Air conditioning controls

9. Clock display

10. Rear window and outside rear view

mirror defogger switch

11. Power outlet

12. Windshield wiper de−icer switch

13. Seat heater switch

14. Downhill assist control switch

15. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light

16. Engine immobilizer system indicator

light

"View B (with manual air conditioning system)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

17. Engine switch

18. Tilt and telescopic steering lock release

lever

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Instrument panel light control dial

2. Headlight, turn signal and front fog

light switches

3. Wiper and washer switches

4. Four−wheel drive lock switch

(four−wheel drive models) or “AUTO

LSD” switch (two−wheel drive models)

5. Audio system

6. Emergency flasher switch

7. Front passenger occupant classification

indicator light

8. Air conditioning controls

9. Rear window and outside rear view

mirror defogger switch

10. Clock and air conditioning display

11. Power outlet

12. Windshield wiper de−icer switch

13. Seat heater switch

14. Downhill assist control switch

15. Front passenger’s seat belt reminder

light

16. Engine immobilizer system indicator

light

"View B (with automatic air conditioning system)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

17. Engine switch

18. Tilt and telescopic steering lock release

lever

19. Power outlet main switch

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Audio remote control switches

2. Telephone switch

3. Speech command switch

4. Cruise control switch

Without electric moon roof

With electric moon roof

1. Front personal lights

2. Microphone

3. Auxiliary box

4. Electric moon roof switch

Steering switches overview Overhead console overview

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Tachometer

2. Service reminder indicators and

indicator lights

3. Speedometer

4. Engine coolant temperature gauge

5. Fuel gauge

6. Odometer, two trip meters and outside

temperature display

7. Trip meter reset knob

Instrument cluster overview

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Brake system warning light∗1

Charging system warning light∗1

Low engine oil pressure warning light∗1

Malfunction indicator lamp∗1

Automatic transmission fluid temperature

warning light∗1

Driver’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Open door warning light∗1

Low fuel level warning light∗1

SRS warning light∗1

Anti−lock brake system warning light∗1

Front passenger’s seat belt reminder light∗1

Tire pressure warning light∗1

Enhanced vehicle stability control

system/traction control system warning light∗1

“4WD” warning light∗1

Indicator symbols on the instrument panel

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

∗1: For details, see “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers” on page 129 in Section 1−6.

∗2: If this light flashes, see “Cruise control” on page 168 in

Section 1−7.

Cruise control indicator light∗2

Four−wheel drive lock indicator light

Headlight high beam indicator light

Turn signal indicator lights

Automatic transmission indicator lights

(4−speed)

Engine oil replacement reminder light∗1

Slip indicator light

Front fog light indicator light

Headlight indicator light

Tail light indicator light

“AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF” indicator

lights

Downhill assist control system indicator light

“AUTO LSD” indicator light

Low windshield washer fluid level warning

light∗1

Electric power steering system warning light∗1

Automatic transmission indicator lights

(5−speed)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Keys and Doors

Keys 12. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine immobilizer system 15. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Wireless remote control 16. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side doors 22. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power windows 24. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Back door 26. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hood 27. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel tank cap 28. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric moon roof 30. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 2

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds

of keys.

1. Master keys—These keys work in ev-

ery lock.

2. Sub key—This key will not work in the

glove box.

To protect items locked in the glove box

when using valet parking, leave the sub

key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-

out a key, you should always carry a

spare key in case you accidentally lock

your keys inside the vehicle.

KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such as

your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you

need additional keys, duplicates can be

made by a Toyota dealer using the key

number.

We recommend writing down the key num-

ber and storing it in a safe place.

Your vehicle is supplied with two kinds

of keys.

1. Master keys—These keys work in ev-

ery lock. Your Toyota dealer will need

one of them to make a new key with

a built−in transponder chip.

2. Sub key—This key will not work in the

glove box.

A transponder chip for engine immobilizer

system has been placed in the head of

the master and sub keys. These chips are

needed to enable the system to function

correctly, so be careful not to lose these

keys. If you make your own duplicate key,

you will not be able to cancel the system

or start the engine.

Keys (without engine

immobilizer system)

Keys (with engine immobilizer

system)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To protect items locked in the glove box

when using valet parking, leave the sub

key with the attendant.

Since the side doors can be locked with-

out a key, you should always carry a

spare key in case you accidentally lock

your keys inside the vehicle.

NOTICE

When using a key containing a trans-

ponder chip, observe the following

precautions:

zWhen starting the engine, do not

use the key with a key ring resting

on the key grip and do not press

the key ring against the key grip.

Otherwise the engine may not start,

or may stop soon after it starts.

zWhen starting the engine, do not

use the key with other transponder

keys around (including keys of oth-

er vehicles) and do not press other

key plates against the key grip.

Otherwise the engine may not start,

or may stop soon after it starts. If

this happens, remove the key once

and then insert it again after remov-

ing other transponder keys (includ-

ing keys of other vehicles) from the

ring or while gripping or covering

them with your hand to start the

engine.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

zDo not bend the key grip.

zDo not cover the key grip with any

material that cuts off electromagnet-

ic waves.

zDo not knock the key hard against

other objects.

zDo not leave the key exposed to

high temperatures for a long period,

such as on the dashboard and hood

under direct sunlight.

zDo not put the key in water or

wash it in an ultrasonic washer.

zDo not use the key with electromag-

netic materials. KEY NUMBER PLATE

Your key number is shown on the plate.

Keep the plate in a safe place such as

your wallet, not in the vehicle.

If you should lose your keys or if you

need additional keys, duplicates can be

made by a Toyota dealer using the key

number.

We recommend writing down the key num-

ber and storing it in a safe place.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The engine immobilizer system is a

theft prevention system. When you in-

sert the key in the engine switch, the

transponder chip in the key’s head

transmits an electronic code to the ve-

hicle. The engine will start only when

the electronic code in the chip corre-

sponds to the registered ID code for

the vehicle.

Never leave the keys inside the vehicle

when you leave the vehicle.

The system is automatically set when the

key is removed from the engine switch.

The indicator light will start flashing to

show the system is set.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer.

DThe indicator light stays on.

DThe indicator light does not start flash-

ing when the key is removed from the

engine switch.

DThe indicator light flashes inconsistent-

ly.

Inserting the registered key in the engine

switch automatically cancels the system,

which enables the engine to start. The

indicator light will go off.

The system is maintenance−free.

For your Toyota dealer to make you a

new key with built−in transponder chip,

your dealer will need your key number

and master key. However, there is a limit

to the number of additional keys your

Toyota dealer can make for you.

If you make your own duplicate key,

you will not be able to cancel the sys-

tem or start the engine.

NOTICE

Do not modify, remove or disas-

semble the engine immobilizer sys-

tem. If any unauthorized changes or

modifications are made, proper opera-

tion of the system cannot be guaran-

teed.

Engine immobilizer system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

FCC ID: MOZRI−20BTY

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

This device complies with RSS−210 of

industry Canada. Operation is subject to

the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

1. Indicator light

2. Lock switch

3. Alarm switch

4. Unlock switch

The wireless remote control system is

designed to lock or unlock all the side

doors and back door or activate the

alarm from a distance within

approximately 1 m (3 ft.) of the vehicle.

When you operate any switch, push it

slowly and securely. At this time, the indi-

cator light flashes once.

The wireless remote control key is an

electronic component. Observe the follow-

ing instructions in order not to cause dam-

age to the key.

Wireless remote control—

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DDo not leave the key in places where

the temperature becomes high such as

on the dashboard.

DDo not disassemble it.

DAvoid knocking it hard against other

objects or dropping it.

DAvoid putting it in water.

You can use up to 3 wireless remote con-

trol keys for the same vehicle. Contact

your Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If the wireless remote control key does

not actuate the side doors and back door

or alarm, or operate from a normal dis-

tance or the indicator on the key is

dimmed or does not come on:

DCheck for closeness to a radio trans-

mitter such as a radio station or an

airport which can interfere with normal

operation of the key.

DThe battery may have been consumed.

Check the battery in the key. To re-

place the battery, see “—Replacing bat-

tery” on page 20.

If you lose your wireless remote control

key, contact your Toyota dealer as soon

as possible to avoid the possibility of

theft, or an accident. (See “If you lose

your keys” on page 379 in Section 4.)

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there

is no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following

measures:

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DReorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

DIncrease the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

DConnect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

DConsult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

NOTE

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

Locking operation

Unlocking operation

To lock and unlock all the doors, push

the switches of the key slowly and se-

curely. At this time, the indicator light

on the key grip flashes once.

To lock: Push the lock switch. All the side

doors and back door are locked simulta-

neously. At this time one beep will be

heard, and the turn signal lights flash

once.

Check to see that all the side doors and

back door are securely locked.

The beep and flashing turn signal lights

can be disabled. For details, contact your

Toyota dealer.

If any of the side doors or the back door

is not securely closed, locking cannot be

performed by the lock switch and a beep

will sound continuously for 10 seconds.

However, if the key is in the engine

switch, a beep will not sound.

To stop the beep, close all the side doors

and back door securely or push the un-

lock switch.

The beep can be disabled. For details,

contact your Toyota dealer.

—Locking and unlocking

doors

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To unlock: Push the unlock switch once to

unlock the driver’s door alone. Pushing

the switch twice within 3 seconds unlocks

all the side doors and back door simulta-

neously. Each time the unlock switch is

pushed, two beeps will be heard, and the

turn signal lights flash twice.

This double switch operation to unlock all

the side doors and back door can be

changed to a single switch operation. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

When you unlock all the doors using the

wireless remote control, the illuminated

entry function will be activated. (For fur-

ther information, see “Illuminated entry

system” on page 119 in Section 1−5.)

You have 30 seconds to open a door after

using the wireless remote unlock feature.

If a door is not opened by then, all the

side doors and back door will be automati-

cally locked again.

The time before automatic door lock func-

tion can be changed. For details, contact

your Toyota dealer.

If the lock or unlock switch is kept

pressed in, the locking or unlocking opera-

tion is not repeated. Release the switch

and then push again.

Pushing the alarm switch blows the

horn intermittently and flashes the

headlights, tail lights and turn signal

lights and turns on the interior and per-

sonal lights.

The alarm switch is used to deter vehicle

theft when you witness anyone attempting

to break into or damage your vehicle.

The alarm will last for one minute. To stop

alarm midway, push any of the switch on

the key. You can also stop the alarm by

turning the engine switch from the “LOCK”

to the “ON” position.

The alarm function does not work when

the engine switch is in the “ON” position.

This alarm function can be disabled. For

details, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Activating alarm

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

For replacement, use a CR2016 lithium

battery or equivalent.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-

vent small children from swallowing

the removed battery or components.

NOTICE

zWhen replacing the battery, be care-

ful not to lose the components.

zReplace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by a

Toyota dealer.

zDispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

Replace the battery by following these

procedures:

1. Open the cover using a flathead screw-

driver wrapped with plastic tape.

2. Remove the module from the key

frame.

—Replacing battery

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

3. Open and remove the battery case

cover using a coin.

4. Take out the discharged battery and

put in a new battery with the positive

(+) side up.

5. Install the battery case cover and then

install the module into the key frame.

Close the cover.

6. When pushing either switch on the

wireless key, make sure the indicator

light comes on.

NOTICE

zDo not bend the terminals.

zMake sure the positive side and

negative side of the battery are

faced correctly.

zDo not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause unexpected

rust.

zDo not touch or move any compo-

nents inside the transmitter, or it

may interfere with proper operation.

zBe careful not to bend the electrode

when inserting the battery and that

dust or oils do not adhere to the

battery case.

zClose the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

key operates properly. If the key still does

not operate properly, contact your Toyota

dealer.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH KEY

Insert the key into the keyhole and turn

it.

To lock: Turn the key forward.

To unlock: Turn the key backward.

All the side doors and back door lock and

unlock simultaneously with driver’s door.

In the driver’s door lock, turning the key

once will unlock the driver’s door and

twice in succession will unlock all the side

doors and back door simultaneously.

When the driver’s door is unlocked using

the key, the illuminated entry system will

be activated. (For further information, see

“Illuminated entry system” on page 119 in

Section 1−5.)

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

INSIDE LOCK KNOB

Move the lock knob.

To lock: Push the knob forward.

To unlock: Pull the knob backward.

The front doors can be opened by pulling

the inside handle even if the lock knobs

are in the locked position.

CAUTION

Do not pull the inside handle of the

doors while driving. The doors will

open and an accident may occur.

Toyota strongly recommends that all

children be placed in the rear seat of

the vehicle.

Closing the door with the lock knob in the

lock position will also lock the door. Be

careful not to lock your keys in the ve-

hicle.

Doors cannot be locked if you leave the

key in the engine switch.

Side doors

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Driver’s side

Front passenger’s side

LOCKING AND UNLOCKING WITH

POWER DOOR LOCK SWITCH

Push the switch.

To lock: Push the switch down on the

right side.

To unlock: Push the switch down on the

left side.

Operating the switch simultaneously locks

or unlocks all the side doors and back

door.

If you do either of the following, no door

can be unlocked with the power door lock

switch.

DLock all the doors with the key or wire-

less remote control when all the doors

are closed.

DOpen the driver’s door and move the

inside lock knobs to the lock position,

then close the door.

The power door lock switch can be reset

in the following ways.

DTurn the engine switch to the “ON”

position.

DUnlock all the doors with the key or

wireless remote control.

DUnlock the driver’s door with the inside

lock knob, and then unlock all the

doors with the power door lock switch.

REAR DOOR CHILD−PROTECTORS

Move the lock lever to the “LOCK”

position as shown on the label.

When the child−protector is locked, you

cannot open the rear door by the inside

door handle. We recommend using this

feature whenever small children are in the

vehicle.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the doors

are closed and locked, especially

when small children are in the ve-

hicle. Along with the proper use of

seat belts, locking the doors helps

prevent the driver and passengers

from being thrown out from the ve-

hicle in an accident. It also helps pre-

vent the doors from being opened

unintentionally.

The windows can be operated with the

switch on each door. The passengers’

windows can also be controlled by the

switches on the driver’s door.

The power windows work when the engine

switch is in the “ON” position.

Key off operation: If the either front door

is closed, they work for 45 seconds even

after the engine switch is turned off. They

stop working when the either front door is

opened.

OPERATING THE DRIVER’S WINDOW

Use the switch on the driver’s door.

Normal operation: The window moves as

long as you hold the switch.

To open: Lightly push down the switch.

To close: Lightly pull up the switch.

Automatic operation: Push the switch

completely down or pull it completely up,

and then release it. The window will fully

open or close. To stop the window part-

way, lightly move the switch in the oppo-

site direction and then release it.

Jam protection function: During automat-

ic closing operation, the window stops and

opens half way if something gets caught

between the window and window frame.

If the window receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

Power windows

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If the power window does not operate

automatically or the jam protection

function does not operate correctly, you

should normalize the power window.

To normalize the power window:

1. Push down the power window switch

and lower the windows fully.

2. Pull up the switch until the windows

close and hold the switch for a second.

Make sure that the window open and

close automatically. If the power windows

cannot be operated properly, have it

checked by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

DNever try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally, as it could re-

sult in a death or serious injury.

DThe jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the window is fully

closed.

Window

lock

switch

OPERATING THE PASSENGERS’

WINDOWS

Use the switch on each passenger’s

door or the switches on the driver’s

door that control each passenger’s win-

dow.

The window moves as long as you hold

the switch.

To open: Push down the switch.

To close: Pull up the switch.

If you push in the window lock switch on

the driver’s door, the passengers’ windows

cannot be operated.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personal

injury, you must do the following.

DBefore you close the power win-

dows, always make sure there is

nobody around the power windows.

You must also make sure the

heads, hands and other parts of the

bodies of all occupants are kept

completely inside the vehicle. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in a closing window, it

could result in death or serious in-

jury. When anyone closes the power

windows, make sure he or she op-

erates the windows safely.

DWhen small children are in the ve-

hicle, never let them use the power

window switches without supervi-

sion. Use the window lock switch to

prevent them from making unex-

pected use of the switches.

DBe sure to remove the key when

you leave your vehicle.

DNever leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the key still in-

serted. Otherwise, he/she could use

the power window switches and get

trapped in a window. Unattended

person (particularly a small child)

can be involved in a serious acci-

dent.

To open the back door, pull the handle.

All the side doors and back door lock and

unlock simultaneously with the driver’s

door.

Operating the power door lock switch or

wireless remote control key simultaneously

locks or unlocks the back door. (See

“—Locking and unlocking doors” on page

18 and “Side doors” on page 22 in this

Section.)

When closing the back door, make sure

it is fully closed.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 336

in Section 2 for precautions when loading

luggage.

Back door

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DKeep the back door closed while

driving. This not only keeps the

luggage from being thrown out but

also prevents exhaust gases from

entering the vehicle.

DIf the open back door hides the

stop, tail or rear turn signal lights

while you are parked, other road

users must be warned of the pres-

ence of your vehicle by a warning

triangle or other device.

To open the hood:

1. Pull the hood lock release lever. The

hood will spring up slightly.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure that the hood

is closed and securely locked. Other-

wise, the hood may open unexpected-

ly while driving and an accident may

occur.

2. In front of the vehicle, pull up the

auxiliary catch lever and lift the

hood.

Hood

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

3. Hold the hood open by inserting the

support rod into the slot.

To insert the support rod into the slot,

move it straight up. If it is moved to the

side or toward the inside of the vehicle,

it may become detached.

Before closing the hood, check to see that

you have not forgotten any tools, rags,

etc. and return the support rod to its

clip—this prevents rattles. Then lower the

hood and make sure it locks into place.

If necessary, press down gently on the

front edge to lock it.

CAUTION

After inserting the support rod into

the slot, make sure the rod supports

the hood securely from falling down

on to your head or body.

NOTICE

Be sure to return the support rod to

its clip before closing the hood. Clos-

ing the hood with the support rod up

could cause the hood to bend. This indicates that the fuel filler door

is on the left side of your vehicle.

Fuel tank cap

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. To open the fuel filler door, pull the

lever up.

When refueling, turn off the engine.

CAUTION

DDo not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames when refueling.

The fumes are flammable.

DWhen opening the cap, do not re-

move the cap quickly. In hot weath-

er, fuel under pressure could cause

injury by spraying out of the filler

neck if the cap is suddenly re-

moved.

2. To remove the fuel tank cap, turn

the cap counterclockwise. Pause

slightly before removing it.

It is not unusual to hear a slight swoosh

when the cap is opened.

3. The removed cap can be hanged on

the cap hanger.

When installing the cap, turn it clock-

wise until one click is heard, in order

to fully close it. The cap returns slight-

ly when your hand is released from the

cap after closure, however this does

not cause any problems.

If the cap is not tightened securely, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on.

Make sure the cap is tightened securely.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DMake sure the cap is tightened se-

curely to prevent fuel spillage in

the event of an accident.

DUse only a genuine Toyota fuel tank

cap for replacement. It is designed

to regulate fuel tank pressure.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the cap, apply

force only in the turning direction to

the cap. Do not pull or pry it.

Sliding operation

Tilting operation

To operate the moon roof, use the

switch on the overhead console.

The engine switch must be in the “ON”

position.

The sun shade can be opened or closed

by hand.

Automatic sliding operation—

To open: Push the switch on the “SLIDE

OPEN” side.

The roof will open and stop partway 50

mm (2.0 in.) from the fully opened posi-

tion. When you push the “SLIDE OPEN”

side again, the moon roof will open fully.

To stop the roof partway, push the switch

on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”

side briefly.

As driving with the moon roof opened fully

will cause wind throbs, we recommend

you to drive with the moon roof partway

50 mm (2.0 in.) from the fully opened

position.

The sun shade will be opened together

with the roof.

To close: Push the switch on the “TILT

UP” side.

The roof will fully close automatically. To

stop the roof partway, push the switch on

either the “SLIDE OPEN” or “TILT UP”

side briefly.

Electric moon roof

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Manual sliding operation—

To open the moon roof slightly, quickly

push and release the switch on the

“SLIDE OPEN” side.

To close the moon roof slightly, quickly

push and release the switch on the “TILT

UP” side.

Automatic tilting operation—

To tilt up: Push the switch on the “TILT

UP” side.

To tilt down: Push the switch on the

“SLIDE OPEN” side.

The roof will fully tilt up or down automati-

cally. To stop the roof partway, push the

switch on either the “SLIDE OPEN” or

“TILT UP” side briefly.

Manual tilting operation—

To tilt up the moon roof slightly, quickly

push and release the switch on the “TILT

UP” side.

To tilt down the moon roof slightly, quickly

push and release the switch on the

“SLIDE OPEN” side.

Key off operation: The moon roof works

for 45 seconds even after the engine

switch is turned off. It stops working when

either front door is opened.

Jam protection function: If something

gets caught between the moon roof and

frame during closing operation, the moon

roof stops and opens half way.

If the moon roof receives a strong impact,

this function may work even if nothing is

caught.

If the moon roof does not operate auto-

matically or the jam protection function

does not operate correctly, you should

normalize the moon roof.

To normalize the moon roof, push and

hold the moon roof switch on the “TILT

UP” side until the roof fully tilts up. Then

release the switch. Push and hold the

switch on the “TILT UP” side until the

moon roof tilts up, tilts down, slides open

and then closes automatically.

Make sure that the moon roof opens and

closes automatically. If the moon roof can-

not be operated properly, have it checked

by your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To avoid death or serious personal

injury, you must do the following:

DWhile the vehicle is moving, always

keep the heads, hands and other

parts of the bodies of all occupants

away from the roof opening. Failure

to do so may result in death or

serious injury if the vehicle stops

suddenly or if the vehicle is in-

volved in an accident.

DBefore you close the moon roof,

always make sure there is nobody

around the moon roof. You must

also make sure nobody places his

or her head, hands and other parts

of the body in the roof opening. If

someone’s neck, head or hands get

caught in the closing roof, it could

result in death or serious injury.

When anyone closes the moon roof,

first make sure it is safe to do so.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DBe sure to remove the key when

you leave your vehicle.

DNever leave anyone (particularly a

small child) alone in your vehicle,

especially with the key still in-

serted. Otherwise, he/she could use

the moon roof switch and get

trapped in the roof opening. Unat-

tended person (particularly a small

child) can be involved in a serious

accident.

DNever sit on top of the vehicle

around the roof opening.

DNever try jamming any part of your

body to activate the jam protection

function intentionally, as it could re-

sult in a death or serious injury.

DThe jam protection function may

not work if something gets caught

just before the moon roof is fully

closed.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Occupant restraint systems

Seats 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front seats 34. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Flattening front seatbacks 38. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seats 41. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Armrest 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Head restraints 51. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat heaters 52. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belts 53. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SRS airbags 65. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Child restraint 85. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 3

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

While the vehicle is being driven, all ve-

hicle occupants should have the seatback

upright, sit well back in the seat and prop-

erly wear the seat belts provided.

CAUTION

DDo not drive the vehicle unless the

occupants are properly seated. Do

not allow any passengers to sit on

top of a folded−down seatback, or

in the luggage compartment or car-

go area. Persons not properly

seated and/or not properly re-

strained by seat belts can be killed

or severely injured in the event of

emergency braking or a collision.

DDuring driving, do not allow any

passengers to stand up or move

around between seats. Otherwise,

death or severe injuries can occur

in the event of emergency braking

or a collision.

Driver seat

CAUTION

The SRS driver airbag deploys with

considerable force, and can cause

death or serious injury especially if

the driver is very close to the airbag.

The National Highway Traffic Safety

Administration (“NHTSA”) advises:

Since the risk zone for driver airbag

is the first 50—75 mm (2—3 in.) of

inflation, placing yourself 250 mm (10

in.) from your driver airbag provides

you with a clear margin of safety.

This distance is measured from the

center of the steering wheel to your

breastbone. If you sit less than 250

mm (10 in.) away now, you can

change your driving position in sever-

al ways:

DMove your seat to the rear as far

as you can while still reaching the

pedals comfortably.

DSlightly recline the back of the

seat. Although vehicle designs vary,

many drivers can achieve the 250

mm (10 in.) distance, even with the

driver seat all the way forward, sim-

ply by reclining the back of the

seat somewhat. If reclining the back

of your seat makes it hard to see

the road, raise yourself by using a

firm, non−slippery cushion, or raise

the seat if your vehicle has that

feature.

DIf your steering wheel is adjustable,

tilt it downward. This points the air-

bag toward your chest instead of

your head and neck.

The seat should be adjusted as rec-

ommended by NHTSA above, while

still maintaining control of the foot

pedals, steering wheel, and your view

of the instrument panel controls.

Seats

Front seats—

—Front seat precautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Front passenger seat

CAUTION

The SRS front passenger airbag also

deploys with considerable force, and

can cause death or serious injury es-

pecially if the front passenger is very

close to the airbag. The front passen-

ger seat should be as far from the

airbag as possible with the seatback

adjusted, so the front passenger sits

upright.

Front seats (with SRS side airbags)

CAUTION

The SRS side airbags are installed in

the driver and front passenger seats.

Observe the following precautions.

DDo not lean against the front door

when the vehicle is in use, since

the side airbag inflates with consid-

erable speed and force. Otherwise,

you may be killed or seriously in-

jured.

DDo not use seat accessories which

cover the area where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

DDo not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side

airbags. Such change may prevent

the side airbag system from activat-

ing correctly, disable the system or

cause the side airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the seat while the

vehicle is moving as the seat may

unexpectedly move and cause the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

DBe careful that the seat does not

hit a passenger or luggage.

DAfter adjusting the seat position,

try sliding it forward and backward

to make sure it is locked in posi-

tion.

DAfter adjusting the seatback, push

your body back against the seat to

make sure the seat is locked in

position.

DDo not put objects under the seats.

Otherwise, the objects may interfere

with the seat−lock mechanism or

unexpectedly push up the seat posi-

tion adjusting lever and the seat

may suddenly move, causing the

driver to lose control of the vehicle.

DWhile adjusting the seat, do not put

your hands under the seat or near

the moving parts. Otherwise, your

hands or fingers may be caught and

injured.

—Seat adjustment precautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Driver’s seat Passenger’s seat

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVER

Hold the center of the lever and pull it

up. Then slide the seat to the desired

position with slight body pressure and

release the lever.

2. SEAT HEIGHT ADJUSTING LEVER

Pull up or push down the lever.

3. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

LEVER

Lean forward and pull the lever up.

Then lean back to the desired angle

and release the lever.

—Adjusting front seats

(manual seat)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the driver and

the front passenger are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats. If

you are reclined, the lap belt may

slide past your hips and apply re-

straint forces directly to the abdomen

or your neck may contact the shoul-

der belt. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or serious injury.

1. SEAT POSITION, SEAT CUSHION

ANGLE AND SEAT HEIGHT

ADJUSTING SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired

direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat at

that position.

Do not place anything under the front

seats, as this might interfere with the seat

movement.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

SWITCH

Move the control switch in the desired

direction.

Releasing the switch will stop the seat-

back at that position.

—Adjusting front seats (power

seat)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Avoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts pro-

vide maximum protection in a frontal

or rear collision when the driver and

the front passenger are sitting up

straight and well back in the seats. If

you are reclined, the lap belt may

slide past your hips and apply re-

straint forces directly to the abdomen

or your neck may contact the shoul-

der belt. In the event of a frontal

collision, the more the seat is re-

clined, the greater the risk of death

or serious injury.

3. SEAT LUMBAR SUPPORT

ADJUSTING SWITCH

Push the control switch on either side.

The amount of lumbar support will change

while the switch is pushed.

1. Hold the center of the lever and pull

it up. Then slide the rear/second

seats fully backward and pull it for-

ward slightly until it locks.

2. Remove the front head restraint.

Hold the center of the lever and pull

it up. Then slide the front seat fur-

ther forward than the front−most

lock position.

Flattening front seatbacks

(manual seat)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

3. Pull the seatback angle adjusting le-

ver up to unlock and push down the

seatback.

When returning the seatback to the up-

right position, be careful not to make

yourself hit by the seatback which will

bound with considerable spring force.

After returning the seat to its original

position, be certain to replace the head

restraint.

CAUTION

DDo not allow passengers to ride on

the flattened seat while driving; use

the seat in the normal position.

DAfter returning the seat to its origi-

nal position, try pushing the seat

and seatback forward and rearward

to make sure it is secured in place.

Be certain to replace head restraint.

1. Hold the center of the lever and pull

it up. Then slide the rear/second

seats fully backward and pull it for-

ward slightly until it locks.

—Flattening front seatbacks

(power seat)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2. Remove the front head restraint.

Push the seat position adjusting

switch forward to slide the seat to

the front−most position.

3. Move the seatback angle adjusting

switch backward to flatten the seat-

back.

After returning the seat to its original

position, be certain to replace the head

restraint.

CAUTION

DDo not allow passengers to ride on

the flattened seat while driving; use

the seat in the normal position.

DAfter putting back the seat, try

pushing the seat and seatback for-

ward and rearward to make sure it

is secured in place. Be certain to

replace the head restraint.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the seat while the

vehicle is moving.

DBe careful that the seat does not

hit a passenger or luggage.

DAdjust both seat cushions to the

same position and align all seat-

backs at the same angle when a

person sits in the rear center posi-

tion. Otherwise, the person cannot

wear the seat belt properly and this

may cause death or serious injuries

in a collision.

DAfter adjusting the seat position,

try sliding it forward and backward

to make sure it is locked in posi-

tion.

DAfter adjusting the seatback, push

back your body to make sure the

seat is locked in position.

DWhen returning seats to their origi-

nal position, observe the following

precautions in order to prevent

death or serious injury in a colli-

sion or sudden stop:

Make sure the seat is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback.

Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operating properly.

Make sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught under the seat

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

Folding down the seats will enlarge the

luggage compartment. See “—Stowage

precautions” on page 336 in Section 2 for

precautions when loading luggage.

Without third seat

Rear seats—

—Rear seat precautions —Adjusting rear/second seats

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

With third seat

1. SEAT POSITION ADJUSTING LEVERS

Hold the center of the lever and pull it

up. Then slide the seat to the desired

position with slight body pressure and

release the lever.

When a person sits in the rear center

position, adjust both seat cushions to

the same position.

2. SEATBACK ANGLE ADJUSTING

LEVERS

Pull down the lever. Then lean back to

the desired angle and release the lever.

When a person sits in the rear center

position, align all seatbacks at the

same angle.

CAUTION

DAdjustments should not be made

while the vehicle is moving.

DAdjust both seat cushions to the

same position and align all seat-

backs at the same angle when a

person sits in the rear center posi-

tion. Otherwise, the person cannot

wear the seat belt properly and this

may cause death or serious injuries

in a collision.

DAvoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts

provide maximum protection in a

frontal or rear collision when the

passengers are sitting up straight

and well back in the seats. If you

are reclined, the lap belt may slide

past your hips and apply restraint

forces directly to the abdomen or

your neck may contact the shoulder

belt. In the event of a frontal colli-

sion, the more the seat is reclined,

the greater the risk of death or ser-

ious injury.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DAfter adjusting the seatback, push

back your body to make sure it is

locked in position.

DAfter adjusting the seat position,

try sliding it forward and backward

to make sure it is locked in posi-

tion.

For easy access to the third seat from

right side, do this.

Pull down the lever and fold the seat-

back. The seat will slide forward.

After passengers are in, lift up the seat-

back and return the seat to the original

position.

CAUTION

After putting back the seat, try push-

ing the seat forward and rearward to

make sure it is secured in place.

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN

REAR/SECOND SEATS

1. If the center seat belt is connected,

release it to prevent damage.

Insert the key into the hole on the

buckle to release the tab, and allow the

belt to retract.

—Moving second seat for

third seat entry

—Fold−down rear/second

seats

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2. Insert the tabs of the center seat

belt into the cover. Make sure the

tabs are securely locked in the cov-

er.

NOTICE

The seat belt tabs must be stowed

before you fold the seatback.

3. Make sure the outer seat belt passes

through the hanger when folding the

rear/second seat.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being

damaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed from

the hanger when the seat belt is in

use.

4. Stow the rear/second seat belt

buckles as shown in the illustration.

This prevents the buckles from falling out

when you fold down the rear/second seat.

CAUTION

Before using the seat belt, pull out

the buckle and make sure the belt is

not twisted.

NOTICE

The seat belt buckles must be stowed

before you fold the seatback.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

FOLDING DOWN REAR/SECOND SEATS

1. Hold the center of the lever and pull

it up. Then slide the rear seat fully

backward and pull it forward slightly

until it locks.

2. Lower the head restraint to the low-

est position.

3. Raise the armrest until it locks.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

4. Pull down the seatback angle adjust-

ing lever and fold down the seat-

back.

Left side

Right side

Without third seats—

The rear seat can be folded down for

the luggage compartment. Open the

back door and pull the lock release le-

ver to fold down the rear seat.

Before folding down the rear seat, slide

the rear seat fully backward and pull it

forward slightly until it locks. Then raise

the armrest until it locks.

Folding down the seats will enlarge the

luggage compartment. See “—Stowage

precautions” on page 336 in Section 2 for

precautions when loading luggage.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Do not fold the rear seatback when

the rear passengers sit on the rear

seats or the luggage is placed on the

seat. Make sure that no passengers

or luggage are on the rear seats.

RETURNING SEATBACKS

Raise the seatback until it locks.

CAUTION

Do not allow passengers to ride on

the folded seat or in the luggage

compartment while driving; use the

seat in its normal position.

When returning the seatback to the

upright position, observe the follow-

ing precautions in order to prevent

serious injury in a collision or sud-

den stop:

DMake sure the seatback is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback.

Failure to do so will prevent the

seat belt from operating properly.

DMake sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

BEFORE FOLDING DOWN THIRD SEATS

1. Stow the third seat belt buckles as

shown in the illustration.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the seat belt

buckles, they must be stowed before

you fold down the seatback.

—Stowing third seats for

luggage space

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2. Pass the third seat belts through the

hangers.

This prevents the shoulder belt from being

damaged.

CAUTION

The seat belt must be removed from

the hanger when the seat belt is in

use.

STOWING THIRD SEATS

1. Lower the head restraint to the low-

est position.

2. Pull the seatback lock release strap

to fold down the seatback. Make

sure it is locked securely.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

3. Pull and hold the seat lock release

strap and lift up the seat rearward.

Then push the seat down.

If the seat does not lift up when the seat

lock release strap is pulled, lift the seat-

back by pulling the seatback lock release

strap, and push the seatback down again.

4. Push the seat on the front side

against the floor and push the seat

on rear side against the floor. Make

sure it is locked securely.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

RETURNING THIRD SEATS

1. Pull and hold the seat lock release

strap, then lift up the seat forward.

Push the seat down. Push the seat

on the rear side against the floor

and push the seat on the front side.

Make sure it is locked securely.

If the seat does not lift up when the seat

lock release strap is pulled, lock the seat-

back again.

To lock the seatback, lift the seatback by

pulling the seatback lock release strap

and push the seatback down.

2. Pull the seatback lock release strap

and raise the seatback.

CAUTION

When stowing or returning the seat,

observe the following precautions in

order to prevent death or serious in-

jury:

DMake sure the seat is free of people

or luggage. Then, hold the seat and

slowly move it. Otherwise, people

may be injured or luggage may be

damaged if the seat hits them.

DBe careful not to get your hands or

feet pinched in the seat.

DDo not stow and return the seats

when you are inside the vehicle in

order to prevent pinching your

hands or feet in the seat. Be sure

to stow and return the seats from

outside the vehicle.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When returning seats to their original

position, observe the following pre-

cautions in order to prevent death or

serious injury in a collision or sud-

den stop:

DMake sure the seat is securely

locked by pushing forward and rear-

ward on the top of the seatback or

by trying to pull up the edge of the

bottom cushion. Failure to do so

will prevent the seat belt from oper-

ating properly.

DMake sure the seat belts are not

twisted or caught in the seatback

and are arranged in their proper

position and are ready to use.

To use the armrest, lower the center

head restraint. Pull the strap and pull

the armrest down.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the armrest,

avoid putting heavy loads on it.

Front seats

Rear/second seats

Armrest Head restraints

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Third seats

For your safety and comfort, adjust the

head restraint before driving.

To raise: Pull it up.

To lower: Push it down while pressing the

lock release button.

The rear/second seats and third seats

head restraints—When an occupant sits

on the rear seats, always pull up the head

restraint to the lock position.

The head restraint is most effective when

it is close to your head. Therefore, using

a cushion on the seatback is not recom-

mended.

CAUTION

DAdjust the center of the head re-

straint so that it is closest to the

top of your ears.

DAfter adjusting the head restraint,

make sure it is locked in position.

DDo not drive with the head re-

straints removed.

To turn on the seat heater, push the

switches (“L” switch for driver’s seat

and “R” switch for passenger’s seat).

At this time, the indicator light will illu-

minate to indicate the seat heater is

operating.

To turn off the seat heater, push the

switch once again.

The engine switch must be in the “ON”

position to operate seat heaters.

Seat heaters

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Occupants must use caution when op-

erating the seat heater because it

may make them feel too hot or cause

burns at low temperatures (erythema,

varicella). Use extra caution for;

DBabies, small children, elderly per-

sons, sick persons or persons with

physical disabilities

DPersons who have sensitive skin

DPersons who are exhausted

DPersons who have taken alcohol or

drugs which induce sleep (sleeping

drug, cold remedy, etc.)

To prevent the seat overheating, do

not use the seat heater with a blan-

ket, cushion, or other insulating ob-

jects which cover the seat.

NOTICE

zDo not put unevenly weighed ob-

jects on the seat and do not stick

sharp objects (needles, nails, etc.)

into the seat.

zWhen cleaning the seats, do not

use organic substances (paint thin-

ner, benzine, alcohol, gasoline,

etc.). They may damage the heater

and seat surface.

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, turn the switch off

when the engine is not running.

Toyota strongly urges that the driver and

passengers in the vehicle be properly re-

strained at all times with the seat belts

provided. Failure to do so could increase

the chance of injury and/or the severity of

injury in accidents.

The seat belts provided for your vehicle

are designed for people of adult size,

large enough to properly wear them.

Child. Use a child restraint system ap-

propriate for the child until the child be-

comes large enough to properly wear the

vehicle’s seat belts. See “Child restraint”

on page 85 in this Section for details.

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. According to accident

statistics, the child is safer when properly

restrained in the rear seat than in the

front seat.

If a child must sit in the front seat, the

seat belts should be worn properly. If an

accident occurs and seat belts are not

worn properly, the force of the rapid infla-

tion of the airbag may cause death or

serious injury to the child.

Seat belts—

—Seat belt precautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Do not allow any children to stand up or

kneel on either rear or front seats. An

unrestrained child could suffer serious in-

jury or death during emergency braking or

a collision. Also, do not let the child sit

on your lap. Holding a child in your arms

does not provide sufficient restraint.

Pregnant woman. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Ask your doctor for

specific recommendations. The lap belt

should be worn securely and as low as

possible over the hips and not on the

waist.

Injured person. Toyota recommends the

use of a seat belt. Depending on the inju-

ry, first check with your doctor for specific

recommendations.

CAUTION

Persons should ride in their seats

properly wearing their seat belts

whenever the vehicle is moving.

Otherwise, they are much more likely

to suffer death or serious bodily inju-

ry, in the event of sudden braking or

a collision.

When using the seat belts, observe

the following:

DUse the belt for only one person at

a time. Do not use a single belt for

two or more people—even children.

DAvoid reclining the seatback any

more than needed. The seat belts

provide maximum protection in a

frontal or rear collision when the

driver and the front passenger are

sitting up straight and well back in

the seats. If you are reclined, the

lap belt may slide past your hips

and apply restraint forces directly

to the abdomen or your neck may

contact the shoulder belt. In the

event of a frontal collision, the

more the seat is reclined, the great-

er the risk of death or serious inju-

ry.

DBe careful not to damage the belt

webbing or hardware. Take care that

they do not get caught or pinched

in the seat or side doors.

DInspect the belt system periodically.

Check for cuts, fraying, and loose

parts. Damaged parts should be re-

placed. Do not disassemble or

modify the system.

DKeep the belts clean and dry. If

they need cleaning, use a mild soap

solution or lukewarm water. Never

use bleach, dye, or abrasive clean-

ers, or allow them to come into

contact with the belts—they may

severely weaken the belts. (See

“Cleaning the interior” on page 386

in Section 5.)

DReplace the belt assembly (includ-

ing bolts) if it has been used in a

severe impact. The entire assembly

should be replaced even if damage

is not obvious.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Tab

Buckle

Adjust the seat as needed and sit up

straight and well back in the seat. To

fasten your belt, pull it out of the re-

tractor and insert the tab into the

buckle.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

The seat belt length automatically adjusts

to your size and the seat position.

The retractor will lock the belt during a

sudden stop or on impact. It also may

lock if you lean forward too quickly. A

slow, easy motion will allow the belt to

extend, and you can move around freely.

When a passenger’s shoulder belt is com-

pletely extended and is then retracted

even slightly, the belt is locked in that

position and cannot be extended. This fea-

ture is used to hold the child restraint

system securely. (For details, see “Child

restraint” on page 85 in this Section.) To

free the belt again, fully retract the belt

and then pull the belt out once more.

If the seat belt cannot be pulled out of the

retractor, firmly pull the belt and release

it. You will then be able to smoothly pull

the belt out of the retractor.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the belt is not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed, because

it cannot protect an adult occupant

or your child from death or serious

injury.

Tak e u p

slack

Too h i g h

Keep as low on

hips as possible

Adjust the position of the lap and

shoulder belts.

Position the lap belt as low as possible

on your hips—not on your waist, then ad-

just it to a snug fit by pulling the shoulder

portion upward through the latch plate.

—Fastening front and rear

seat belts

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DBoth high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause

death or serious injuries due to

sliding under the lap belt during a

collision or other unintended event.

Keep the lap belt positioned as low

on hips as possible.

DDo not place the shoulder belt un-

der your arm.

Seat belts with an adjustable shoulder

anchor—

Adjust the shoulder anchor position to

your size.

To raise: Slide the anchor up.

To lower: Push in the lock release button

and slide the anchor down.

After adjustment, make sure the anchor is

locked in position.

CAUTION

Always make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

your shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from your neck, but not

falling off your shoulder. Failure to

do so could reduce the amount of

protection in an accident and cause

death or serious injuries in a colli-

sion.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To release the belt, press the buckle

release button and allow the belt to

retract.

If the belt does not retract smoothly, pull

it out and check for kinks or twists. Then

make sure it remains untwisted as it re-

tracts.

REAR/SECOND CENTER SEAT BELT

The rear/second center seat belt is a

3−point type restraint with 2 buckles. Both

seat belt buckles must be correctly lo-

cated and securely latched for proper op-

eration.

Make sure that buckle 1 is securely

latched for ready use of the center seat

belt.

Two buckles and tabs for rear/second

center seat belt

The two tabs have different shape for its

end so that the belt is not buckled in the

wrong place.

Buckle 1—Properly matches with hook

end tab

Buckle 2—Properly matches with round

end tab

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Make sure the both buckles are cor-

rectly located and securely latched.

Failure to properly match the buckle

and tab may cause death or severe

injury in case of an accident or a

collision.

To release the hook end tab, insert the

key into the hole on the buckle and allow

the belt to retract.

CAUTION

Do not use the rear/second center

seat belt with either buckle released.

Fastening only the shoulder belt or

lap belt may cause death or severe

personal injury in case of sudden

braking or a collision.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Rear/second seat belt buckles

Third seat belt buckles

The rear seat belt buckles can be

stowed when not in use.

The seat belt buckles must be stowed

before you fold the seatback.

CAUTION

Before using the seat belt, pull out

the buckle and make sure the belt is

not twisted.

STOWING THE REAR/SECOND CENTER

SEAT BELT

Insert the tabs of the center seat belt

into the cover as shown above. Make

sure the tabs are securely locked in the

cover.

The seat belt must be stowed before you

fold the seatback.

NOTICE

Stow the rear/second center seat belt

when not in use.

—Stowing the rear seat belt

buckles

—Stowing the rear/second

center seat belt

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If your seat belts cannot be fastened se-

curely because they are not long enough,

a personalized seat belt extender is avail-

able from your Toyota dealer free of

charge.

Please contact your local Toyota dealer to

order the proper required length for the

extender. Bring the heaviest coat you ex-

pect to wear for proper measurement and

selection of length. Additional ordering in-

formation is available at your Toyota deal-

er.

CAUTION

When using the seat belt extender,

observe the following precautions.

Failure to follow these instructions

could reduce the effectiveness of the

seat belt restraint system in case of

an accident, increasing the chance of

death or serious injury.

DRemember that the extender pro-

vided for you may not be safe when

used on a different vehicle, for

another person, or at a different

seating position than the one origi-

nally intended.

DIf the seat belt extender has been

connected to the driver’s seat belt

buckle without wearing the seat belt

when using the extender in the

driver’s seat, the SRS driver’s air-

bag system will judge that the driv-

er wears the seat belt even if not

wearing it. In this case, the driver’s

airbag may not activate correctly,

causing death or serious injury in

the event of collision. Be sure to

wear the seat belt with the seat belt

extender.

DMake sure the “AIR BAG ON”

indicator light is illuminated when

using the seat belt extender for the

front passenger seat. If the “AIR

BAG OFF” indicator light is

illuminated, disconnect the extender

tongue from the seat belt buckle,

then reconnect the seat belt.

Reconnect the seat belt extender

after making sure the “AIR BAG

ON” indicator light is illuminated. If

you use the seat belt extender

while the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator

light is illuminated, the front

passenger airbag and side airbag

on the front passenger side may

not activate correctly, causing death

or serious injury in the event of

collision.

DBe sure to wear the seat belt with-

out the seat belt extender if you

can fasten the seat belt without the

extender.

—Seat belt extender

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DDo not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

To connect the extender to the seat

belt, insert the tab into the seat belt

buckle so that the “PRESS” signs on

the buckle release buttons of the ex-

tender and the seat belt are both facing

outward as shown.

You will hear a click when the tab locks

into the buckle.

When releasing the seat belt, press on

the buckle release button on the extender,

not on the seat belt. This helps prevent

damage to the vehicle interior and extend-

er itself.

As far as the seat belt extender on the

front passenger side is concerned, do not

fail to disconnect the extender from the

seat belt after the above operation in or-

der to activate the front passenger airbag

correctly when getting into the vehicle

next time.

When not in use, remove the extender

and store in the vehicle for future use.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt and the seat belt extend-

er are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent you

from properly latching the tab and

buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, immediately contact your

Toyota dealer. Do not use the seat

until the seat belt is fixed, because

it cannot protect an adult occupant

or your child from death or serious

injury.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Vehicles without curtain shield air-

bags—The driver and front passenger

seat belt pretensioners are designed to

be activated in response to a severe

frontal impact.

Vehicles with curtain shield airbags—

The driver and front passenger seat

belt pretensioners are designed to be

activated in response to a severe fron-

tal impact or a vehicle roll over.

Vehicles without curtain shield airbags—

When the sensor detects a severe frontal

impact, the front seat belts are quickly

drawn back by the retractors so that the

belts snugly restrain the occupants.

Vehicles with curtain shield airbags—When

the sensor detects a severe frontal impact

or a vehicle roll over, the front seat belts

are quickly drawn back by the retractors

so that the belts snugly restrain the occu-

pants.

The front passenger’s seat belt pretension-

er will not activate if no passenger is

detected in the front passenger seat by

the front passenger occupant classification

system. However, the front passenger’s

seat belt pretensioner may activate if lug-

gage is put on the seat, or the seat belt

is buckled up regardless of the presence

of an occupant in the seat. (As for the

front passenger occupant classification

system, see “—Front passenger occupant

classification system” on page 81 in this

Section.)

The seat belt pretensioners and SRS air-

bags may not operate together in all colli-

sions.

The seat belt pretensioner system con-

sists mainly of the following components

and their locations are shown in the il-

lustration.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights

4. Front passenger occupant classification

system (ECU and sensors)

5. Seat belt pretensioner assemblies

6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

7. Airbag sensor assembly

—Seat belt pretensioners

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The seat belt pretensioners are controlled

by the airbag sensor assembly. The airbag

sensor assembly consists of a safing sen-

sor and airbag sensor.

When the seat belt pretensioners are acti-

vated, an operating noise may be heard

and a small amount of non−toxic gas may

be released. This does not indicate that

a fire is occurring. This gas is normally

harmless.

Once the seat belt pretensioners have

been activated, the seat belt retractors

remain locked.

If the vehicle is involved in multiple colli-

sions, the pretensioner will activate for the

first collision, but will not activate for the

second or subsequent collisions.

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions to

reduce the risk of injury in the event

of sudden braking or an accident.

Failure to do so may cause death or

severe injury.

DIf the pretensioner has activated,

the seat belt becomes locked: it

cannot be further extended, nor will

it return to the stowed position.

The seat belt cannot be used again

and must be replaced at your

Toyota dealer.

DDo not modify, remove, strike or

open the seat belt pretensioner as-

semblies, airbag sensor or sur-

rounding area or wiring. Consult

your Toyota dealer about any repair

and modification.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

seat belt pretensioners in some

cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zRepairs on or near the front seat

belt retractor assemblies

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the front end struc-

ture

zAttachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end

zRepairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure or con-

sole

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

This indicator comes on when the en-

gine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.

This means the seat belt pretensioners

are operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, “AIR BAG ON” indicator

light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front

passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat

belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, in-

terconnecting wiring and power sources.

(For details, see “Service reminder indica-

tors and warning buzzers” on page 129 in

Section 1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on for more than

6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

DIf any seat belt does not retract or

cannot be pulled out due to a malfunc-

tion or activation of the relevant seat

belt pretensioner.

DThe seat belt pretensioner assembly or

surrounding area has been damaged.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DThe front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the seat belt pretensioners to operate.

DEither seat belt pretensioner assembly

or surrounding area is scratched,

cracked, or otherwise damaged.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) front airbags are designed to pro-

vide further protection for the driver

and front passenger in addition to the

primary safety protection provided by

the seat belts.

Your vehicle is equipped with “ADVANCED

AIRBAGS” designed based on US motor

vehicle safety standards (FMVSS208). The

airbag system controls airbag deployment

power for the driver and front passenger.

The driver airbag system consists of the

driver seat’s position sensor etc. The front

passenger’s airbag system consists of the

front passenger occupant classification

sensor etc.

In response to a severe frontal impact,

the SRS front airbags work with the seat

belts to help reduce injury by inflating.

The SRS front airbags help reduce injuries

mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s

head or chest caused by hitting the ve-

hicle interior.

The SRS front passenger airbag will not

activate if there is no passenger sitting in

the front passenger seat. However, the

front passenger airbag may deploy if lug-

gage is put in the seat, or the seat belt

is buckled up, regardless of the presence

of an occupant in the seat. (As for the

front passenger occupant classification

system, see “—Front passenger occupant

classification system” on page 81 in this

Section.)

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

DThe SRS front airbag system is de-

signed only as a supplement to the

primary protection of the driver and

front passenger seat belt systems.

The driver and front passenger can

be killed or seriously injured by the

inflating airbags if they do not wear

the available seat belts properly.

During sudden braking just before

a collision, an unrestrained driver

or front passenger can move for-

ward into direct contact with or

close proximity to the airbag which

may then deploy during the colli-

sion. To ensure maximum protection

in an accident, the driver and all

passengers in the vehicle must

wear their seat belts properly. Wear-

ing a seat belt properly during an

accident reduces the chances of

death or serious injury or being

thrown out of the vehicle. For in-

structions and precautions concern-

ing the seat belt system, see “Seat

belts” on page 53 in this Section.

SRS airbags—

—SRS driver airbag and front

passenger airbag

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DImproperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing airbags. An infant or child who

is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seat of the vehicle and proper-

ly restrained. The rear seat is the

safest for infants and children. For

instructions concerning the installa-

tion of a child restraint system, see

“Child restraint” on page 85 in this

Section.

The SRS front airbags are designed to

deploy in severe (usually frontal) colli-

sions where the magnitude and duration

of the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle exceeds the designed threshold

level.

The SRS front airbags will deploy if the

severity of the impact is above the de-

signed threshold level, comparable to an

approximate 25 km/h (15 mph) collision

when the vehicle has the impact straight

into a fixed barrier that does not move or

deform.

However, this threshold velocity will be

considerably higher if the vehicle strikes

an object, such as a parked vehicle or

sign pole, which can move or deform on

impact, or if the vehicle is involved in an

underride collision (e.g. a collision in

which the front of the vehicle “underrides”,

or goes under, the bed of a truck, etc.).

It is possible that in some collisions

where the forward deceleration of the ve-

hicle is very close to the designed thresh-

old level, the SRS front airbags and the

seat belt pretensioners may not activate

together.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the side

Vehicle rollover

The SRS front airbags are not generally

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a side or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed frontal collision. But, whenever a

collision of any type causes sufficient

forward deceleration of the vehicle, de-

ployment of the SRS front airbags may

occur.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Hitting a curb,

edge of pavement

or hard surface

Falling into or

jumping over a

deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS front airbags may also deploy

if a serious impact occurs to the under-

side of your vehicle. Some examples

are shown in the illustration.

The SRS front airbag system consists

mainly of the following components, and

their locations are shown in the illustra-

tion.

1. Front airbag sensors

2. SRS warning light

3. “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights

4. Airbag module for front passenger

(airbag and inflator)

5. Front passenger occupant classification

system (ECU and sensors)

6. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

7. Driver’s seat belt buckle switch

8. Driver’s seat position sensor

9. Airbag sensor assembly

10. Airbag module for driver

(airbag and inflator)

The airbag sensor assembly consists of a

safing sensor and airbag sensor.

The front airbag sensors constantly moni-

tor the forward deceleration of the vehicle.

If an impact results in a forward decelera-

tion beyond the designed threshold level,

the system triggers the airbag inflators. At

this time a chemical reaction in the infla-

tors very quickly fills the airbags with

non−toxic gas to help restrain the forward

motion of the occupants. The front airbags

then quickly deflate, so that there is no

obstruction of the driver’s vision should it

be necessary to continue driving.

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

loud noise and release some smoke and

residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, primarily to the head and chest, it

may also cause other, less severe injuries

to the face, chest, arms and hands. These

are usually in the nature of minor burns

or abrasions and swelling, but the force of

a deploying airbag can cause more seri-

ous injuries, especially if an occupant’s

hands, arms, chest or head is in close

proximity to the airbag module at the time

of deployment. This is why it is important

for the occupant to: avoid placing any

object or part of the body between the

occupant and the airbag module; sit

straight and well back into the seat; wear

the available seat belt properly; and sit as

far as possible from the airbag module,

while still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

Parts of the airbag module (steering wheel

hub, airbag cover and inflator) may be hot

for several minutes after deployment, so

do not touch! The airbags inflate only

once. The windshield may be damaged by

absorbing some of the force of the inflat-

ing airbag.

CAUTION

The driver or front passenger who is

too close to the steering wheel or

dashboard during airbag deployment

can be killed or seriously injured.

Toyota strongly recommends that:

DThe driver sit as far back as pos-

sible from the steering wheel while

still maintaining control of the ve-

hicle.

DThe front passenger sit as far back

as possible from the dashboard.

DAll vehicle occupants be properly

restrained using the available seat

belts.

For instructions and precautions con-

cerning the seating position, see

“—Front seat precautions” on page

34 in this Section.

DDo not sit on the edge of the seat

or lean against the dashboard when

the vehicle is in use, since the

front passenger airbag could inflate

with considerable speed and force.

Anyone who is up against, or very

close to, an airbag when it inflates,

can be killed or seriously injured.

Sit up straight and well back in the

seat, and always use your seat belt

properly.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DToyota strongly recommends that all

infants and children be placed in

the rear seat of the vehicle and be

properly restrained.

DDo not hold a child on your lap or

in your arms. Use a child restraint

system in the rear seat. For instruc-

tions concerning the installation of

a child restraint system, see “Child

restraint” on page 85 in this Sec-

tion.

DDo not put anything or any part of

your body on or in front of the

dashboard or steering wheel pad

that houses the front airbag sys-

tem. They might restrict inflation or

cause death or serious injury as

they are projected rearward by the

force of the deploying airbags. Like-

wise, the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

DDo not modify or remove any wir-

ing. Do not modify, remove, strike

or open any components such as

the steering wheel pad, steering

wheel, column cover, dashboard

near the front passenger airbag,

front passenger airbag or airbag

sensor assembly. Doing so may pre-

vent the front airbag system from

activating correctly, cause sudden

activation of the system or disable

the system, which could result in

death or serious injury.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for

a person with physical disability, con-

sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-

gerously interfere with the SRS front

airbags operation.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS front airbag system in some

cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the front end struc-

ture

zAttachment of a grille guard (bull

bar, kangaroo bar, etc.), snowplow,

winches or any other equipment to

the front end

zRepairs made on or near the front

fenders, front end structure, con-

sole, steering column, steering

wheel or dashboard near the front

passenger airbag

This indicator comes on when the en-

gine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.

This means the SRS front airbags are

operating properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, “AIR BAG ON” indicator

light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front

passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat

belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, in-

terconnecting wiring and power sources.

(For details, see “Service reminder indica-

tors and warning buzzers” on page 129 in

Section 1−6.)

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on for more than

6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

The SRS warning light and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light will come on if there

is a malfunction in the front passenger

occupant classification system.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DThe SRS front airbags have been in-

flated.

DThe front of the vehicle (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS front airbags to inflate.

DThe pad section of the steering wheel

or dashboard (shaded in the illustra-

tion) is scratched, cracked, or other-

wise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

The SRS (Supplemental Restraint Sys-

tem) side airbags and curtain shield air-

bags are designed to provide further

protection for the driver, front passen-

ger and rear/second passengers in addi-

tion to the primary safety protection

provided by the seat belts.

In response to a severe side impact, the

SRS side airbag and curtain shield airbags

in the impacted side work with the seat

belts to help reduce injury by inflating.

The SRS side airbags help reduce injuries

mainly to the driver’s or front passenger’s

chest. The SRS curtain shield airbags

help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,

front passenger’s or rear/second passen-

ger’s head and help prevent them from

being thrown out of the vehicle.

The SRS side airbag on the passenger

seat will not activate if there is no pas-

senger sitting in the front passenger seat.

However, the side airbag on the passen-

ger seat may deploy if luggage is put in

the seat, or the seat belt is buckled up

regardless of the presence of the occu-

pant in the seat. (As for the front passen-

ger occupant classification system, see

“—Front passenger occupant classification

system” on page 81 in this Section.)

The SRS curtain shield airbag on the pas-

senger side are activated even with no

passenger in the front seat or rear/second

outside seat.

—SRS side airbags and

curtain shield airbags

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Roll sensing function:

In response to a vehicle rollover, the cur-

tain shield airbags on both sides work

with the seat belts to help reduce injury

by inflating. The curtain shield airbags

help reduce injuries mainly to the driver’s,

front passenger’s or rear/second passen-

ger’s head and help prevent them from

being thrown out of the vehicle.

The SRS curtain shield airbags may acti-

vate even when the side airbags are not

activated.

Always wear your seat belt properly.

CAUTION

DThe SRS side airbag and curtain

shield airbag system is designed

only as a supplement to the prima-

ry protection of the driver, front

passenger and rear/second outside

passenger seat belt systems. To en-

sure maximum protection in an ac-

cident, the driver and all passen-

gers in the vehicle must wear their

seat belts properly. Wearing a seat

belt properly during an accident re-

duces the chances of death or seri-

ous injury or being thrown out of

the vehicle. For instructions and

precautions concerning the seat

belt system, see “Seat belts” on

page 53 in this Section.

DDo not allow anyone to lean his/her

head or any part of his/her body

against the door or the area of the

seat, front pillar, rear pillar or roof

side rails from which the SRS side

airbag and curtain shield airbag

deploy even if he/she is a child

seated in the child restraint system.

It is dangerous if the SRS side air-

bag and curtain shield airbag in-

flate, and the impact of the deploy-

ing airbag could cause death or se-

rious injury to the occupant.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DImproperly seated and/or restrained

infants and children can be killed

or seriously injured by the deploy-

ing airbags. An infant or child who

is too small to use a seat belt

should be properly secured using a

child restraint system. Toyota

strongly recommends that all in-

fants and children be placed in the

rear seats of the vehicle and prop-

erly restrained. The rear seats are

the safest for infants and children.

For instructions concerning the

installation of a child restraint sys-

tem, see “Child restraint” on page

85 in this Section.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system may not activate if the

vehicle is subjected to a collision from

the side at certain angles, or a collision

to the side of the vehicle body other

than the passenger compartment as

shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbags are designed to

inflate when the passenger compartment

area suffers a severe impact from the

side.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

Collision from the rear

Collision from the front

Vehicle rollover

The SRS side airbags are not generally

designed to inflate if the vehicle is in-

volved in a front or rear collision, if it

rolls over, or if it is involved in a low−

speed side collision.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The curtain shield airbags may not acti-

vate if the vehicle is subjected to a

collision from the side at certain

angles, or a collision to the side of the

vehicle body other than the passenger

compartment as shown in the illustra-

tion.

The curtain shield airbags are designed to

inflate when the passenger compartment

area suffers a severe impact from the

side or vehicle rollover.

Always wear your seat belts properly.

The angle of

vehicle tip−up

is marginal

Skidding vehicle

hitting a curb

stone

The curtain shield airbags may inflate

if the angle of vehicle tip−up is margin-

al or if the skidding vehicle’s tires hit

a curb stone laterally as shown in the

illustration.

Collision from

the front Collision from

the rear

Pitch end over end

The curtain shield airbags are not gen-

erally designed to inflate if the vehicle

is involved in a front or rear collision,

if it pitches end over end, or if it is

involved in a low−speed side collision.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Hitting a curb,

edge of pavement

or hard surface

Falling into or

jumping over a

deep hole

Landing hard or vehicle falling

The SRS side and curtain shield airbags

may deploy if a serious impact occurs

to the underside of your vehicle. Some

examples are shown in the illustration.

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system consists mainly of the fol-

lowing components, and their locations are

shown in the illustration.

1. SRS warning light

2. “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights

3. Curtain shield airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

4. Front passenger occupant classification

system (ECU and sensors)

5. Side airbag modules

(airbag and inflator)

6. Curtain shield airbag sensors

7. Side and curtain shield airbag sensors

8. Airbag sensor assembly

9. Front passenger’s seat belt buckle

switch

The SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system is controlled by the airbag

sensor assembly. The airbag sensor as-

sembly consists of a safing sensor and

airbag sensor.

In a severe side impact, the side and

curtain shield airbag sensor and/or the

curtain shield airbag sensor trigger(s) the

side airbag inflators and/or the curtain

shield airbag inflators. At this time a

chemical reaction in the inflators quickly

fills the airbags with non−toxic gas to help

restrain the lateral motion of the occu-

pants.

In a vehicle rollover, the airbag sensor

assembly triggers the curtain shield airbag

inflator. At this time, a chemical reaction

in the inflators quickly fills the airbags

with non−toxic gas to help restrain the

lateral motion of the occupants.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When the airbags inflate, they produce a

fairly loud noise and release some smoke

and residue along with non−toxic gas. This

does not indicate a fire. This smoke may

remain inside the vehicle for some time,

and may cause some minor irritation to

the eyes, skin or breathing. Be sure to

wash off any residue as soon as possible

to prevent any potential skin irritation with

soap and water. If you can safely exit

from the vehicle, you should do so imme-

diately.

Deployment of the airbags happens in a

fraction of a second, so the airbags must

inflate with considerable force. While the

system is designed to reduce serious inju-

ries, it may also cause minor burns or

abrasions and swelling.

Front seats as well as parts of the front

and rear pillars, front, center and rear

garnish and roof interior may be hot for

several minutes, but the airbags them-

selves will not be hot. The airbags are

designed to inflate only once.

CAUTION

SRS side airbags and curtain shield

airbags inflate with considerable

force. To reduce the possibility of

death or serious injury when they in-

flate, the driver, front passenger and

rear/second outside passengers must:

DWear their seat belts properly.

DRemain properly seated with their

backs upright and against the seats

at all times.

Improper sitting and wearing of the

seat belts may not retain you inside

the vehicle.

DDo not allow anyone to lean against

the door when the vehicle is in use,

since the side airbag and curtain

shield airbag could inflate with con-

siderable speed and force. Other-

wise, he/she may be killed or seri-

ously injured. Special care should

be taken especially when you have

a small child in the vehicle.

DSit up straight and well back in the

seat, distributing your weight evenly

in the seat. Do not apply excessive

weight to the outer side of the

seats with a side airbag, and to the

front pillar, rear pillar and roof side

rail with a curtain shield airbag.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DDo not allow anyone to get his/her

head closer to the area where the

side airbag and curtain shield air-

bag inflate, since these airbags

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

DDo not allow anyone to kneel on

the passenger seat, facing the pas-

senger’s side door, since the side

airbag and curtain shield airbag

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

DDo not allow anyone to get his/her

head or hands out of windows

since the curtain shield airbags

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, he/she

may be killed or seriously injured.

Special care should be taken espe-

cially when you have a small child

in the vehicle.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DDo not attach a cup holder or any

other device or object on or around

the door. When the side airbag in-

flates, the cup holder or any other

device or object will be thrown with

great force or the side airbag may

not activate correctly, resulting in

death or serious injury. Likewise,

the driver and front passenger

should not hold objects in their

arms or on their knees.

DDo not attach a microphone or any

other device or object near the area

where the curtain shield airbag acti-

vates such as on the windshield

glass, side door glass, front, center

and roof side garnish. When the

curtain shield airbag inflates, the

microphone or other device or ob-

ject will be thrown away with great

force or the curtain shield airbag

may not activate correctly, resulting

in death or serious injury.

DDo not hook a hanger, heavy or

sharp pointed objects on the coat

hook. If the curtain shield airbag

inflates, those items will be thrown

away with great force or the curtain

shield airbag may not activate cor-

rectly, resulting in death or serious

injury. When you hang clothes,

hang them on the coat hook direct-

ly.

DDo not use seat accessories which

cover the parts where the side air-

bags inflate. Such accessories may

prevent the side airbags from acti-

vating correctly, causing death or

serious injury.

DDo not modify or replace the seats

or upholstery of the seats with side

airbags. Such changes may prevent

the side airbag system from activat-

ing correctly, disable the system or

cause the side airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, resulting in death or seri-

ous injury.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DDo not disassemble or repair the

front, center and roof side garnish

containing the curtain shield air-

bags. Such changes may disable

the system or cause the curtain

shield airbags to inflate accidental-

ly, resulting in death or serious in-

jury.

DDo not modify or change the sus-

pension system. Such changes may

cause the curtain shield airbags to

inflate accidentally, which could re-

sult in death or serious injury.

DDo not use tires or wheels other

than the manufacturer’s recom-

mended size. Such a use may cause

the curtain shield airbags to inflate

accidentally, which could result in

death or serious injury. For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 410 in Section 7−2.

DDo not place luggage heavier than

specified on the roof luggage carri-

er. Such luggage may cause the

curtain shield airbags to inflate ac-

cidentally, which could result in

death or serious injury. For details,

see “Roof luggage carrier” on page

303 in Section 1−10.

Failure to follow these instructions

can result in death or serious injury.

Consult your Toyota dealer about any

repair and modification.

If you wish to modify your vehicle for

a person with physical disability, con-

sult your Toyota dealer. It may dan-

gerously interfere with the SRS side

airbags and curtain shield airbags op-

eration.

NOTICE

Do not perform any of the following

changes without consulting your

Toyota dealer. Such changes can

interfere with proper operation of the

SRS side airbag and curtain shield

airbag system in some cases.

zInstallation of electronic devices

such as a mobile two−way radio,

cassette tape player or compact

disc player

zModification of the suspension sys-

tem

zModification of the side structure of

the passenger compartment

zRepairs made on or near the con-

sole or front seat

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

This indicator comes on when the en-

gine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.

This means the SRS side airbags and

curtain shield airbags are operating

properly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, “AIR BAG ON” indicator

light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front

passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat

belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, in-

terconnecting wiring and power sources.

(For details, see “Service reminder indica-

tors and warning buzzers” on page 129 in

Section 1−6.)

If either of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on for more than

6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

The SRS warning light and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light will come on if there

is a malfunction in the front passenger

occupant classification system.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible:

DAny of the SRS side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags have been inflated.

DThe portion of the doors (shaded in the

illustration) was involved in an accident

that was not severe enough to cause

the SRS side airbags and curtain

shield airbags to inflate.

DThe surface of the seats with the side

airbag (shaded in the illustration) is

scratched, cracked, or otherwise dam-

aged.

DThe portion of the front, center and

roof side garnish containing the curtain

shield airbags inside (shaded in the

illustration) is scratched, cracked, or

otherwise damaged.

NOTICE

Do not disconnect the battery cables

before contacting your Toyota dealer.

Your vehicle is equipped with a front

passenger occupant classification sys-

tem. This system detects the conditions

1—4 in the table on page 83 and based

on these conditions activates or deacti-

vates the following systems;

DFront passenger airbag

DSide airbag on the front passenger

seat

DFront passenger’s seat belt pretension-

The system monitors the weight and

load on the front passenger seat, and

the seat belt buckle switch to determine

conditions 1—4.

In order for the system to detect the

conditions correctly, do not do any of

the following:

DApply a heavy load to the front pas-

senger seat or equipment (e.g. seat-

back pocket).

DAttach a commercial seatback table,

etc. to the front passenger seatback.

DPut weight on the front passenger seat

by putting your hands or feet on the

seatback from the rear passenger seat.

The “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights indicate the actuation of

the front passenger airbag, side airbag

on the front passenger seat and front

passenger’s seat belt pretensioner.

The “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light will be

illuminated when the engine switch is in

the “ON” position with the condition 2 in

the table shown below.

—Front passenger occupant

classification system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If the front passenger occupant classifica-

tion system determines that a person of

adult size sits in the front passenger seat

but the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is

illuminated, one of the following is likely

to have occurred:

DA rear passenger lifts the front passen-

ger seat cushion with their legs.

DObjects are placed under the front pas-

senger seat.

DThe front passenger seatback is in

contact with the rear/second seat.

To ensure the system correctly detects an

adult sitting in the front passenger seat,

make sure the above do not occur.

Make sure that the “AIR BAG ON” indica-

tor light is illuminated when an adult is

seated in the front passenger seat. If the

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is illumina-

ted, ask the passenger to sit up straight,

well back in the seat, and with the seat

belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator light still remains illuminated, ei-

ther ask the passenger to move to the

rear seat, or if that is not possible, move

the front passenger seat fully rearward.

The “AIR BAG ON” and “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator lights will be illuminated ini-

tially when the engine switch is turned

to the “ON” position. After about four

seconds, they will go off. After that, the

front passenger occupant classification

system operates and judges which indi-

cator light be illuminated.

The SRS warning light and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light will come on if

there is a malfunction in the front pas-

senger occupant classification system.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Condition and operation in the front passenger occupant classification system

Condition detected by

the front passenger

occupant classification

system

Indicator/warning light Devices

“AIR BAG

ON” and “AIR

BAG OFF”

indicator

lights

SRS warning

light

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

reminder light

Front

passenger

airbag

Side airbag

on the front

passenger

seat

Curtain shield

airbag in the

front

passenger

side

Front

passenger’s

seat belt

pretensioner

1. Adult∗1“AIR BAG

ON” Off Flashing∗4Activated

2. Child∗2 or child

restraint system∗3

“AIR BAG

OFF”∗5Off Flashing∗4Deactivated

Activated

3. Unoccupied Not

illuminated Off Off Deactivated Deactivated

4. There is a

malfunction in the

system

“AIR BAG

OFF” On Off Deactivated Activated

∗1: The system judges a person of adult size as an adult. When a smaller adult sits in the front passenger seat, the system may

recognize him/her as a child depending on his/her physique and posture.

∗2: When a larger child who has outgrown a child restraint system sits in the front passenger seat, the system may recognize him/her

as an adult depending on his/her physique or posture.

∗3: Never install a rear−facing child restraint system on the front passenger seat. A forward−facing child restraint system should only be

installed on the front passenger seat when it is unavoidable. (See “Child restraint” on page 85 in this Section as for installing the

child restraint system.)

∗4: In the event the front passenger does not wear a seat belt.

∗5: In case the indicator is not illuminated, see “Child restraint” on page 85 as for installing the child restraint system properly.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

To avoid potential death or serious

injury when the front passenger occu-

pant classification system does not

detect the conditions correctly, ob-

serve the following.

DMake sure the “AIR BAG ON” indi-

cator light is illuminated when us-

ing the seat belt extender for the

front passenger seat. If the “AIR

BAG OFF” indicator light is illumi-

nated, disconnect the extender

tongue from the seat belt buckle,

then reconnect the seat belt. Recon-

nect the seat belt extender after

making sure the “AIR BAG ON” in-

dicator light is illuminated. If you

use the seat belt extender while the

“AIR BAG OFF” indicator light is

illuminated, the front passenger air-

bag and side airbag on the front

passenger side may not activate

correctly, which could cause death

or serious injury in the event of

collision.

DDo not recline the front passenger

seatback so far that it touches a

rear/second seat. This may cause

the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator to be

illuminated, which indicates that the

passenger’s airbags will not deploy

in the event of a severe accident.

If the seatback touches the rear/

second seat, return the seatback to

a position where it does not

touches the rear/second seat.

Keep the front passenger seatback

as upright as possible when the ve-

hicle is moving. Reclining the seat-

back excessively may lessen the ef-

fectiveness of the seat belt system.

DIf an adult sits in the front passen-

ger seat, the “AIR BAG ON” indica-

tor light should be illuminated. If

the “AIR BAG OFF” indicator is illu-

minated, ask the passenger to sit

up straight, well back in the seat,

feet on the floor, and with the seat

belt worn correctly. If the “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator still remains illumi-

nated, either ask the passenger to

move to the rear/second seat, or if

that is not possible, move the front

passenger seat fully rearward.

DWear the seat belt properly.

DMake sure the front passenger’s

seat belt tab has not been left in-

serted into the buckle before some-

one sits in the front passenger

seat.

DDo not apply a heavy load to the

front passenger seat or equipment

(e.g. seatback pocket).

DDo not put weight on the front pas-

senger seat by putting your hands

or feet on the front passenger seat

seatback from the rear/second pas-

senger seat.

DDo not let a rear/second passenger

lift the front passenger seat with

their feet or press on the seatback

with their legs.

DDo not put objects under the front

passenger seat.

DChild restraint systems installed on

the rear/second seat should not

contact the front seatbacks.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DWhen it is unavoidable to install the

forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem on the front passenger seat,

install the child restraint system on

the front passenger seat in the

proper order. (As for the installation

order, see “—Installation with seat

belt” on page 88 in this Section.)

DDo not remove the front seats.

DDo not kick the front passenger

seat or subject it to severe impact.

Otherwise, the SRS warning light

may come on to indicate a malfunc-

tion of the detection system. In this

case, contact your Toyota dealer im-

mediately.

The “AIR BAG ON” indicator light may be

illuminated (the front passenger airbag and

side airbag on the front passenger seat

may deploy) even if observing the above

cautions, when a child sits in, or a for-

ward−facing child restraint system is

installed on the front passenger seat. Re-

fer to all the cautions in “SRS airbags” on

page 65 and “Child restraint” on page 85

in this Section.

Toyota strongly urges the use of ap-

propriate child restraint systems for

children.

The laws of all 50 states in the U.S.A.

and Canada now require the use of a

child restraint system.

Your vehicle conforms to SAEJ1819.

If a child is too large for a child restraint

system, the child should sit in the rear

seat and must be restrained using the

vehicle’s seat belt. See “Seat belts” on

page 53 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

DFor effective protection in automo-

bile accidents and sudden stops, a

child must be properly restrained,

using a seat belt or child restraint

system depending on the age and

size of the child. Holding a child in

your arms is not a substitute for a

child restraint system. In an acci-

dent, the child can be crushed

against the windshield, or between

you and the vehicle’s interior.

DToyota strongly urges use of a

proper child restraint system which

conforms to the size of the child,

installed on the rear seat. Accord-

ing to accident statistics, the child

is safer when properly restrained in

the rear seat than in the front seat.

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator light is illuminated. In the

event of an accident, the force of

the rapid inflation of the front pas-

senger airbag can cause death or

serious injury to the child if the

rear−facing child restraint system is

installed on the front passenger

seat.

Child restraint—

—Child restraint precautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DA forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible even if the “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light is illuminated,

because the front passenger airbag

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, the

child may be killed or seriously in-

jured.

DOn vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or center and roof side garnish

from which the side airbags or cur-

tain shield airbags deploy even if

the child is seated in the child re-

straint system. It is dangerous if

the side airbag and/or curtain shield

airbag inflate, and the impact could

cause death or serious injury to the

child.

DDo not use the seat belt extender

when installing a child restraint

system on the front or rear passen-

ger seat. If installing a child re-

straint system with the seat belt

extender connected to the seat belt,

the seat belt will not securely hold

the child restraint system, which

could cause death or serious injury

to the child or other passengers in

the event of collision.

DMake sure you have complied with

all installation instructions provided

by the child restraint manufacturer

and that the system is properly se-

cured. If it is not secured properly,

it may cause death or serious injury

to the child in the event of a sud-

den stop or accident.

A child restraint system for a small

child or baby must itself be properly

restrained on the seat with the lap por-

tion of the lap/shoulder belt. You must

carefully consult the manufacturer’s

instructions which accompany the child

restraint system.

To provide proper restraint, use a child

restraint system following the manufactur-

er’s instructions about the appropriate age

and size of the child for the child restraint

system.

Install the child restraint system correctly

following the instructions provided by its

manufacturer. General directions are also

provided under the following illustrations.

The child restraint system should be

installed on the rear seat. According to

accident statistics, the child is safer when

properly restrained in the rear seat than

in the front seat.

—Child restraint system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

When the child restraint system is

not in use:

DKeep the child restraint system

properly secured on the seat even

if it is not in use. Do not store the

restraint unsecured in the passen-

ger compartment.

DIf it is necessary to detach the

child restraint system, remove it

from the vehicle or store it securely

in the luggage compartment. This

will prevent it from injuring passen-

gers in the event of a sudden stop

or accident.

Child restraint systems are classified into

the following 3 types depending on the

child’s age and size.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

Install the child restraint system following

the instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

Your vehicle has anchor brackets for se-

curing the top strap of a child restraint

system.

For instructions about how to use the an-

chor bracket, see “—Using a top strap” on

page 100 in this Section.

The child restraint lower anchorages ap-

proved for your vehicle may also be used.

See “—Installation with child restraint low-

er anchorages” on page 104 in this Sec-

tion.

(A) Infant seat

(B) Convertible seat

—Types of child restraint

system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

An infant seat must be used in rear−

facing position only.

CAUTION

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator light is illuminated. In the

event of an accident, the force of

the rapid inflation of the front pas-

senger airbag can cause death or

serious injury to the child if the

rear−facing child restraint system is

installed on the front passenger

seat.

—Installation with seat belt

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear/second or third

seat if it interferes with the lock

mechanism of the front or second

seats. Otherwise, the child or front

or second seat occupant(s) may be

killed or seriously injured in case

of sudden braking or a collision.

DIf the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear right

seat.

Same

position Same angle

DWhen installing a child restraint

system on the rear/second center

position, adjust both seat cushions

to the same position and align all

seatbacks at the same angle. Other-

wise, the child restraint system can-

not be securely restrained and this

may cause death or serious injuries

in a collision.

To install the infant seat:

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the infant seat following the

instructions provided by its manufactur-

er and insert the tab into the buckle

taking care not to twist the belt. Keep

the lap portion of the belt tight.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the infant seat securely, make

sure the belt is in the lock mode before

letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the infant seat firmly

against the seat cushion and seatback,

let the shoulder belt retract as far as

it will go to hold the infant seat secure-

ly.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

To remove the infant seat:

Press the buckle release button and allow

the belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to work

for an adult or older child passenger.

Rear/second center seat: If the seat in

which a child restraint system is installed

in the rear most position, release the cen-

ter seat belt after removing the child re-

straint system. Otherwise, the rear center

seat belt may not work properly.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

(B) CONVERTIBLE SEAT INSTALLATION

A convertible seat must be used in for-

ward−facing or rear−facing position de-

pending on the age and size of the

child. When installing, follow the

manufacturer’s instructions about the

applicable age and size of the child as

well as directions for installing the

child restraint system.

Install the child restraint system on the

front passenger seat only when it is un-

avoidable. Your vehicle is equipped with a

front passenger occupant classification

system. In order to activate the occupant

classification system correctly, install the

forward−facing child restraint system on

the front passenger seat in the following

order:

1. Turn the engine switch to the “ON”

position.

2. Move the front passenger seat to the

rearward position.

3. Put the child restraint system on the

front passenger seat without putting

your weight on the front passenger

seat.

4. Insert the seat belt tab into the seat

belt buckle.

5. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended. To hold the seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

6. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

7. Put a child on the child restraint sys-

tem and secure the child, complying

with the instructions provided by the

child restraint system manufacturer.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light should

be illuminated when the engine switch is

in the “ON” position and the child is in the

child restraint system after following these

procedures. The “AIR BAG OFF” indicator

light indicates the SRS front passenger

airbag and side airbag on the passenger

side will not deploy. If the “AIR BAG ON”

indicator light is illuminated, remove the

child restraint system and reinstall it with

the engine switch in the “ACC” or “LOCK”

position. If the “AIR BAG ON” indicator

light is illuminated when the engine switch

is turned to the “ON” position, then the

SRS front passenger airbag and side air-

bag on the passenger side may deploy in

an accident. Do not drive the vehicle in

this condition. Remove the child restraint

system and contact your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat. A forward−facing child re-

straint system should only be

installed on the front passenger

seat when unavoidable. If you must

install the child restraint system on

the front passenger seat, put the

seat in its most rearward position,

and install the forward−facing child

restraint system in the proper or-

der. Otherwise, the front passenger

occupant classification system can

not detect the presence of the child

restraint system and the front pas-

senger airbag and side airbag on

the front passenger seat could

deploy, and the impact could cause

death or serious injury to the child.

DNever install a rear−facing child re-

straint system on the front passen-

ger seat even if the “AIR BAG OFF”

indicator light is illuminated. In the

event of an accident, the impact of

the rapid inflation of the front pas-

senger airbag could cause death or

serious injury to the child if the

rear−facing child restraint system is

installed on the front passenger

seat.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Move seat

fully back

DA forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible even if the “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light is illuminated,

because the front passenger airbag

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, the

child may be killed or seriously in-

jured.

DOn vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or center and roof side garnish

from which the side airbags or cur-

tain shield airbags deploy even if

the child is seated in the child re-

straint system. It is dangerous if

the side airbag and/or curtain shield

airbag inflate, and the impact could

cause death or serious injury to the

child.

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear/second or third

seat if it interferes with the lock

mechanism of the front or second

seats. Otherwise, the child or front

or second seat occupant(s) may be

killed or seriously injured in case

of sudden braking or a collision.

DIf the driver’s seat position does

not allow sufficient space for safe

installation, install the child re-

straint system on the rear/second

right seat.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Same

position Same angle

DWhen installing a child restraint

system on the rear/second center

position, adjust both seat cushions

to the same position and align all

seatbacks at the same angle. Other-

wise, the child restraint system can-

not be securely restrained and this

may cause death or serious injuries

in a collision.

To install the convertible seat:

1. Run the lap and shoulder belt through

or around the convertible seat following

the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into

the buckle taking care not to twist the

belt. Keep the lap portion of the belt

tight.

CAUTION

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2. Fully extend the shoulder belt to put it

in the lock mode. When the belt is

then retracted even slightly, it cannot

be extended.

To hold the convertible seat securely,

make sure the belt is in the lock mode

before letting the belt retract.

3. While pressing the convertible seat

firmly against the seat cushion and

seatback, let the shoulder belt retract

as far as it will go to hold the convert-

ible seat securely.

CAUTION

Push and pull the child restraint sys-

tem in different directions to be sure

it is secure. Follow all the installation

instructions provided by its manufac-

turer.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To remove the convertible seat:

Press the buckle release button and allow

the belt to retract completely. The belt will

move freely again and be ready to work

for an adult or older child passenger.

Rear/second center seat: If the seat in

which a child restraint system is installed

in the rear most position, release the cen-

ter seat belt after removing the child re-

straint system. Otherwise, the rear center

seat belt may not work properly.

A booster seat must be used in for-

ward−facing position only.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Move seat

fully back

CAUTION

DA forward−facing child restraint sys-

tem should be allowed to be

installed on the front passenger

seat only when it is unavoidable.

Always move the seat as far back

as possible even if the “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light is illuminated,

because the front passenger airbag

could inflate with considerable

speed and force. Otherwise, the

child may be killed or seriously in-

jured.

DOn vehicles with side airbags and

curtain shield airbags, do not allow

the child to lean his/her head or

any part of his/her body against the

door or the area of the seat, front

or center and roof side garnish

from which the side airbags or cur-

tain shield airbags deploy even if

the child is seated in the child re-

straint system. It is dangerous if

the side airbag and/or curtain shield

airbag inflate, and the impact could

cause death or serious injury to the

child.

Same

position Same angle

DWhen installing a child restraint

system on the rear/second center

position, adjust both seat cushions

to the same position and align all

seatbacks at the same angle. Other-

wise, the child restraint system can-

not be securely restrained and this

may cause death or serious injuries

in a collision.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To install the booster seat:

Sit the child on a booster seat. Run the

lap and shoulder belt through or around

the booster seat and across the child fol-

lowing the instructions provided by its

manufacturer and insert the tab into the

buckle taking care not to twist the belt.

Make sure the shoulder belt is correctly

across the child’s shoulder and that the

lap belt is positioned as low as possible

on the child’s hips. See “Seat belts” on

page 53 in this Section for details.

CAUTION

DAlways make sure the shoulder belt

is positioned across the center of

child’s shoulder. The belt should be

kept away from child’s neck, but

not falling off child’s shoulder.

Otherwise, the child may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

DBoth high−positioned lap belts and

loose−fitting belts could cause

death or serious injuries due to

sliding under the lap belt during a

collision or other unintended event.

Keep the lap belt positioned as low

on a child’s hips as possible.

DFor child’s safety, do not place the

shoulder belt under child’s arm.

DAfter inserting the tab, make sure

the tab and buckle are locked and

that the lap and shoulder portions

of the belt are not twisted.

DDo not insert coins, clips, etc. in

the buckle as this may prevent your

child from properly latching the tab

and buckle.

DIf the seat belt does not function

normally, it cannot protect your

child from death or serious injury.

Contact your Toyota dealer immedi-

ately. Do not install the child

restraint system on the seat until

the seat belt is fixed.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

100

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To remove the booster seat:

Press the buckle release button and allow

the belt to retract.

Rear/second center seat: If the seat in

which a child restraint system is installed

in the rear most position, release the cen-

ter seat belt after removing the child re-

straint system. Otherwise, the rear center

seat belt may not work properly.

Outside position

Center position

—Using a top strap

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

101

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Follow the procedure below for a child

restraint system that requires the use

of a top strap.

Anchor brackets

Symbol mark

Outside position

Symbol mark

Center position

Use one anchor bracket on the roof and

two anchor brackets on the rear/second

seatbacks to attach the top strap.

Anchor brackets are installed for each

rear/second seating position.

This symbol indicates the locations of the

anchor brackets.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

102

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

TO USE THE OUTSIDE ANCHOR

BRACKET:

1. Remove the head restraint.

Hold the center of the lever and pull it

up. Then slide the rear/second seats

forward slightly if it is in the rear−most

position.

2. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Widen the slit of the cover slightly

and confirm the position of the an-

chor fitting. Latch the hook onto the

anchor bracket and tighten the top

strap.

For instructions to install the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” on

page 85 in this Section.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

103

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

3. Insert the head restraint and push it

down to the lock position.

After installing the child restraint

system, move the rear/second seat to

the rear−most lock position to prevent

the child restraint system from

interfering with the front seat.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

104

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

TO USE THE CENTER ANCHOR

BRACKET:

1. Open the lid of the anchor bracket.

2. Fix the child restraint system with

the seat belt.

Latch the hook onto the anchor

bracket and tighten the top strap.

For instructions to install the child re-

straint system, see “Child restraint” on

page 85 in this Section.

CAUTION

Make sure the top strap is securely

latched, and check that the child re-

straint system is secure by pushing

and pulling it in different directions.

Follow all the installation instructions

provided by its manufacturer.

Lower anchorages for the child restraint

systems complying with the FMVSS225

or CMVSS210.2 specifications are

installed in the rear/second seat.

The anchorages are installed in the gap

between the seat cushion and seatback of

both outside rear/second seating position.

Child restraint systems complying with the

FMVSS213 or CMVSS213 specification

can be fixed to these anchorages. In this

case, it is not necessary to fix the child

restraint system with a seat belt on the

vehicle.

—Installation with child

restraint lower anchorages

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

105

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

7th lock

position

1st lock

position

CHILD RESTRAINT SYSTEM

INSTALLATION

1. Fold down the seatback and back it

to the 1st lock position (most up-

right position) until it locks into

place. Adjust the seatback to the 7th

lock position.

Make sure the seatback is locked secure-

ly.

Canada only

Type A

Canada only

Type B

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

106

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2. Widen the gap between the seat

cushion and seatback slightly and

confirm the position of the lower an-

chorages near the buttons on the

seatback.

3. Type A—Latch the hooks of lower

straps onto the anchorages and

tighten the lower straps.

Type B—Latch the buckles onto the

anchorages.

For owners in Canada—The symbol on a

child restraint system indicates the pres-

ence of a lower connector system.

If your child restraint system has a top

strap, it should be anchored. (For the

installation of the top strap, see “—Using

a top strap” on page 100 in this Section.)

For installation details, refer to the instruc-

tion manual equipped with each product.

CAUTION

DWhen using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, be

sure that there are no irregular ob-

jects around the anchorages or that

the seat belt is not caught.

DPush and pull the child restraint

system in different directions to be

sure it is secure. Follow all the

installation instructions provided by

its manufacturer.

DWhen using the lower anchorages

for the child restraint system, en-

sure that the seat is moved to the

rear−most position, with the seat-

back close to the child restraint

system.

DAfter securing the child restraint

system, never slide or recline the

seat.

DDo not install a child restraint sys-

tem on the rear seat if it interferes

with the lock mechanism of the

front seats. Otherwise, the child or

front seat occupant(s) may be killed

or seriously injured in case of sud-

den braking or a collision.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

107

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Steering wheel and Mirrors

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside rear view mirrors 108. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Anti−glare inside rear view mirror 110. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Sun visors 111. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 4

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

108

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To adjust the steering wheel position,

push down the lock release lever. Then

tilt the steering wheel to the desired

angle, push or pull it to the desired

steering column length and return the

lever to its original position.

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the steering wheel

while the vehicle is moving. Doing

so may cause the driver to mishan-

dle the vehicle and an accident may

occur resulting in death or serious

injuries.

DAfter adjusting the steering wheel,

try moving it up and down or for-

ward and rearward to make sure it

is locked in position.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the side of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

Be careful when judging the size or dis-

tance of any object seen in the outside

rear view mirror on the passenger’s side

because it is a convex mirror. Any object

seen in a convex mirror will look smaller

and farther away than when seen in a flat

mirror.

On some models, when you push the rear

window defogger switch, the heater panels

in the outside rear view mirrors will quick-

ly clear the mirror surface. (See “Rear

window and outside rear view mirror de-

foggers” on page 122 in Section 1−5.)

Tilt and telescopic steering

wheel Outside rear view mirrors—

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

109

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DDo not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the

vehicle and an accident may occur

resulting in death or serious inju-

ries.

DOn some models: Since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch

them when the defogger switch is

on.

To adjust a mirror, use the switches.

1. Master switch—To select the mirror to

be adjusted

Push the switch to “L” (left) or “R”

(right).

2. Control switch—To move the mirror

Push the switch in the desired direc-

tion.

Mirrors can be adjusted when the engine

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

NOTICE

If ice should jam the mirror, do not

operate the control or scrape the mir-

ror face. Use a spray de−icer to free

the mirror.

—Power rear view mirror

control

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

110

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The rear view mirrors can be folded

backward for parking in compact areas.

To fold the rear view mirror, push back-

ward.

CAUTION

Do not drive with the mirrors folded

backward. Both the driver and pas-

senger side rear view mirrors must

be extended and properly adjusted

before driving.

Adjust the mirror so that you can just

see the rear of your vehicle in the mir-

ror.

To reduce glare from the headlights of

the vehicle behind you during night

driving, operate the lever on the lower

edge of the mirror.

Daylight driving—Lever at position 1

The reflection in the mirror has greater

clarity at this position.

Night driving—Lever at position 2

Remember that by reducing glare you also

lose some rear view clarity.

CAUTION

Do not adjust the mirror while the

vehicle is moving. Doing so may

cause the driver to mishandle the ve-

hicle and an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

—Folding rear view mirrors

Anti−glare inside rear view

mirror

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

111

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To block out glare, move the sun visor.

To block out glare from the front—Swing

down the main sun visor (position 1).

To block out glare from the side—Swing

down the main sun visor, remove it from

the hook and swing it to the lateral side

(position 2).

If glare comes from obliquely behind you,

extend the plate at the end of the visor

(to position 3).

CAUTION

Do not extend the plate at the end of

the sun visor when the visor is in the

position 1. It can cover the anti−glare

inside rear view mirror and obstruct

the rear view.

To use the vanity mirrors, swing down

the main sun visor and slide the cover.

The vanity light comes on when you slide

the cover.

Sun visors— —Vanity mirrors

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

112

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

113

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Lights, Wipers and Defogger

Headlights and turn signals 114. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emergency flashers 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Instrument panel light control 116. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front fog lights 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Interior light 117. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Personal lights 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage compartment light 118. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Illuminated entry system 119. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield wipers and washer 120. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear window wiper and washer 121. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Windshield wiper de−icer 122. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear window and outside rear view mirror defoggers 122. . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 5

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

114

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

For the U.S.A.

For Canada

HEADLIGHTS

To turn on the following lights: Twist

the headlight/turn signal lever knob.

Position 1—Parking, tail, license plate,

side marker and instrument panel lights

For Canada—The tail light indicator lights

up in the instrument cluster.

Position 2—Headlights and all of the

above

For the U.S.A.—The headlight indicator

lights up in the instrument cluster.

Automatic light cut off system

If the driver’s door is opened and closed

with the engine turned off, the lights will

automatically turn off after 30 seconds. If

all the doors are locked with the wireless

remote control, the lights will turn off im-

mediately.

To turn on the lights again, turn the en-

gine switch to the “ON” position or turn

the headlight switch on. If you are going

to park for over one week, make sure the

headlight switch is off.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the lights on

for a long period when the engine is

not running.

Daytime running light system

(on some models)

The headlights turn on at reduced intensi-

ty when the parking brake is released with

the engine started, even with the light

switch in the “OFF” position. They will not

go off until the engine switch is turned off.

To turn on the other exterior lights and

instrument panel lights, twist the knob to

the position 1.

Twist the knob to the position 2 to turn

the headlights to full intensity for driving

at night.

Headlights and turn signals

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

115

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

High−Low beams—For high beams, turn

the headlights on and push the lever away

from you (position 1). Pull the lever to-

ward you (position 2) for low beams.

The headlight high beam indicator light

(blue light) on the instrument panel will

tell you that the high beams are on.

Flashing the high beam headlights

(position 3)—Pull the lever all the way

back. The high beam headlights turn off

when you release the lever.

You can flash the high beam headlights

with the knob turned to “OFF”.

TURN SIGNALS

To signal a turn, push the headlight/

turn signal lever up or down to position

The engine switch must be in the “ON”

position.

The lever automatically returns after you

make a turn, but you may have to return

it by hand after you change lanes.

To signal a lane change, move the lever

up or down to the pressure point (position

2) and hold it.

If the turn signal indicator lights (green

lights) on the instrument panel flash faster

than normal, a front or rear turn signal

bulb is burned out. See “Replacing light

bulbs” on page 422 in Section 7−3.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

116

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To turn on the emergency flashers,

push the switch.

All the turn signal lights will flash. To turn

them off, push the switch once again.

Turn on the emergency flashers to warn

other drivers if your vehicle must be

stopped where it might be a traffic hazard.

Always pull as far off the road as pos-

sible.

The turn signal light switch will not work

when the emergency flashers are operat-

ing.

NOTICE

To prevent the battery from being dis-

charged, do not leave the switch on

longer than necessary when the en-

gine is not running.

To adjust the brightness of the instru-

ment panel lights, turn the dial.

With the dial turned fully up, the intensity

of the instrument panel lights will not be

reduced even when the tail lights/head-

lights are turned on.

Emergency flashers Instrument panel light control

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

117

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To turn on the front fog lights, twist

the band of the headlight and turn sig-

nal switch lever. They will come on

only when the headlights are on low

beam.

Front fog light indicator light on the instru-

ment panel will tell you that the front fog

lights are on.

To turn on the interior light, slide the

switch.

The interior light switch has the following

positions:

“ON”—Keeps the light on all the time.

“OFF”—Turns the light off.

“DOOR”—Turns the light on when any of

the side doors are opened. For details,

see “Illuminated entry system” on page

119 in this Section.

INTERIOR LIGHT CUT OFF OPERATION

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the light will automatically turn off when

the engine switch is in the “LOCK” posi-

tion and the door is left opened with the

switch at the “DOOR” position for 20 min-

utes or more.

Front fog lights Interior light

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

118

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Without electric moon roof

With electric moon roof

The personal lights operate separately

with each lens.

To turn on the light, push the lens on your

side. To turn the light off, push the lens

once again.

The personal light switch has the following

positions:

“DOOR”—Turns the lights on when any of

the side doors is opened. For details, see

“Illuminated entry system” on page 119 in

this Section.

“OFF”—Turn the lights on only when you

push the lens.

INTERIOR LIGHT CUT OFF OPERATION

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the light will automatically turn off when

the engine switch is in the “LOCK” posi-

tion and the door is left opened with the

switch at the “DOOR” position for 20 min-

utes or more.

Personal lights Luggage compartment light

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

119

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To turn on the luggage compartment

light, push the luggage compartment

light switch upwards. The light turn on

when the back door is opened. The

light goes off when the back door is

closed.

The following lights will come on when

any of the side doors are opened. After

all the side doors are closed, the lights

remain on for about 15 seconds before

fading out.

1. Engine switch light

2. Personal lights (with the “DOOR” posi-

tion)

3. Interior light (with the “DOOR” position)

4. Foot lights

When any of the side doors are unlocked,

the lights will come on and remain on for

about 15 seconds before fading out.

If all the doors are closed, when the en-

gine switch is turned to the “LOCK” posi-

tion, the lights will come on and remain

on for about 15 seconds.

The duration of the lighting can be

changed. For details, ask your Toyota

dealer.

If all the doors are closed and the engine

switch is in the “ACC” position, the engine

switch light and interior light will fade out.

If all the doors are locked, all the lights

will fade out.

Illuminated entry system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

120

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To prevent the battery being discharged,

the lights will automatically turn off when

the key is removed and the door is left

opened for about 20 minutes.

FOOT LIGHTS

The foot lights also come on when the

engine switch is in the “ON” position with

the automatic transmission selector lever

in the “P” position. When the selector le-

ver is moved out of “P” position, the foot

lights will be dimmed.

This operation can be customized. For de-

tails, ask your Toyota dealer.

To turn on the windshield wipers, move

the lever to the desired setting.

The engine switch must be in the “ON”

position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

operation

Position 2 Low speed

operation

Position 3 High speed

operation

For a single sweep of the windshield,

push the lever up and release it.

The “INT” band lets you adjust the wiping

time interval when the wiper lever is in

the intermittent position (position 1). Twist

the band upward to decrease the time

between sweeps, and downward to in-

crease it.

To squirt washer fluid, pull the lever

toward you.

If the windshield wipers are off, they will

operate a couple of times after the washer

squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 422 in

Section 7−3.

In freezing weather, warm the windshield

with the defroster before using the washer.

This will help prevent the washer fluid

from freezing on your windshield, which

can block your vision.

NOTICE

Do not operate the wipers if the wind-

shield is dry. It may scratch the

glass.

Windshield wipers and washer

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

121

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When waxing your vehicle, make sure that

the washer nozzles do not become

blocked. If a nozzle becomes blocked,

contact your Toyota dealer to have the

vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not

try to clear it with a pin or other

object. The nozzle will be damaged.

To turn on the rear window wiper, twist

the lever knob upward.

The engine switch must be in the “ON”

position.

Lever position Speed setting

Position 1 Intermittent

operation

Position 2 Normal operation

To squirt washer fluid on the rear window,

twist the knob upward or downward as far

as it will go (position 3 or 4). The knob

automatically returns from these positions

after you release it. The rear window wip-

er operates while the washer squirts.

For instructions on adding washer fluid,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 422 in

Section 7−3.

NOTICE

Do not operate the rear wiper if the

rear window is dry. It may scratch the

glass.

Rear window wiper and

washer

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

122

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To deice the windshield wiper blades,

push the switch.

The engine switch must be in the “ON”

position.

The system will automatically shut off af-

ter the deicer has operated about 15 min-

utes. An indicator light will illuminate to

indicate the deicer is operating.

If further deicing is desired, simply actuate

the switch again. When the wiper blades

have deiced, push the switch once again

to turn the deicer off. Continuous use may

cause the battery to discharge, especially

during stop−and−go driving.

Manual air conditioning system

Automatic air conditioning system

To defog or defrost the rear window,

push the switch.

The engine switch must be in the “ON”

position.

The thin heater wires on the inside of the

rear window will quickly clear the window

surface. An indicator light will illuminate to

indicate the defogger is operating.

On some models, the heater panels in the

outside rear view mirrors will also quickly

clear the surfaces.

Push the switch once again to turn the

defoggers off.

The system will automatically shut off af-

ter the defoggers have operated about 15

minutes.

CAUTION

On some models: Since the mirror

surfaces can get hot, do not touch

them when the switch is on.

Windshield wiper de−icer

Rear window and outside rear

view mirror defoggers

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

123

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Make sure you turn the defoggers off

when the surfaces are clear. Leaving the

defoggers on for a long time could cause

the battery to discharge, especially during

stop−and−go driving. The defoggers are

not designed for drying rain water or for

melting snow.

If the outside rear view mirrors are heavi-

ly coated with ice, use a spray de−icer

before operating the switch.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the heater wires or connec-

tors.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

124

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

125

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Gauges, Meters and Service reminder indicators

Fuel gauge 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine coolant temperature gauge 126. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tachometer 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Odometer and two trip meters 127. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Outside temperature display 128. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers 129. . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 6

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

126

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The gauge indicates the approximate

quantity of fuel remaining in the tank

when the engine switch is in the “ON”

position.

Nearly full—Needle at “F”

Nearly empty—Needle at “E”

It is a good idea to keep the tank over

1/4 full.

The needle moves when braking, acceler-

ating or making turns. This is caused by

the movement of the fuel in the tank.

If the fuel level approaches “E” or the low

fuel level warning light comes on, fill the

fuel tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the fuel gauge

needle may fluctuate or the low fuel level

warning light may come on earlier than

usual.

If the fuel tank is completely empty, the

malfunction indicator lamp comes on. Fill

the fuel tank immediately.

The indicator lamp goes off after driving

several times. If the indicator lamp does

not go off, contact your Toyota dealer as

soon as possible.

The gauge indicates the engine coolant

temperature when the engine switch is

in the “ON” position. The engine oper-

ating temperature will vary with

changes in weather and engine load.

If the needle moves into the red zone,

your engine is too hot. If your vehicle

overheats, stop your vehicle and allow the

engine to cool.

Your vehicle may overheat during severe

operating conditions, such as:

DDriving up a long hill on a hot day.

DReducing speed or stopping after high

speed driving.

Fuel gauge

Engine coolant temperature

gauge

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

127

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DIdling for a long period with the air

conditioning on in stop−and−go traffic.

DTowing a trailer.

NOTICE

zDo not remove the thermostat in

the engine cooling system as this

may cause the engine to overheat.

The thermostat is designed to con-

trol the flow of coolant to keep the

temperature of the engine within

the specified operating range.

zDo not continue driving with an

overheated engine. See “If your ve-

hicle overheats” on page 360 in

Section 4.

The tachometer indicates engine speed

in thousands of rpm (revolutions per

minute). Use it while driving to select

correct shift points and to prevent en-

gine lugging and over−revving.

Driving with the engine running too fast

causes excessive engine wear and poor

fuel economy. Remember, in most cases

the slower the engine speed, the greater

the fuel economy.

NOTICE

Do not let the indicator needle get

into the red zone. This may cause

severe engine damage.

This meter displays the odometer and

two trip meters.

1. Odometer—Shows the total distance

the vehicle has been driven.

2. Two trip meters—Show two different

distances independently driven since

the last time each trip meter was set

to zero.

You can use one trip meter to calculate

the fuel economy and the other to

measure the distance on each trip. All

trip meter data is cancelled if the elec-

trical power source is disconnected.

Tachometer Odometer and two trip meters

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

128

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

3. Trip meter reset knob—Resets the two

trip meters to zero, and also change

the meter display.

To change the meter display, quickly

push and release the knob. The meter

display changes in the order from the

odometer to trip meter A to trip meter

B, then back to the odometer each

time you push.

To reset the trip meter A to zero, dis-

play the meter A reading, then push

and hold the knob until the meter is

set to zero. The same process can be

applied for resetting the trip meter B. The displayed temperature ranges from

−40_C (−40_F) up to 50_C (122_F).

The engine switch must be in the “ON”

position.

If an abnormality exists in the connection

of the outside air temperature sensor,

“−−_C” will appear on the display. If

“−−_C” appears on the display, contact

your Toyota dealer.

When the outside air temperature falls be-

low 3_C (37_F) while driving, the tempera-

ture display flashes to indicate that the

outside air temperature is becoming low.

However, if the temperature is already

3_C (37_F) or below, the display does not

flash when the engine is turned to the

“ON” position.

Outside temperature display

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

129

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(a) or If parking brake is off, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(b)

(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten driver’s seat belt.

(c)

(indicator and buzzer)

Fasten front passenger’s seat belt.

(d) Stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(e) Stop and check.

(f) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(g) Fill up tank.

Service reminder indicators and warning buzzers

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

130

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(h) or Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

If brake system warning light is also on, stop immediately and contact Toyota dealer.

(i) Close all side doors and back door.

(j) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer immediately.

(k) Stop and check.

(l) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer.

(m) Adjust the tire inflation pressure. If warning light remains, contact Toyota dealer.

(n) Cool the driveline without turning off the engine. If warning light remains, contact

Toyota dealer.

(o) Take vehicle to Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

131

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If the indicator or buzzer comes on... Do this.

(p) Add washer fluid.

(q) Replace engine oil.

(r) Key reminder buzzer Remove key.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

132

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

(a) Brake System Warning Light

This light comes on in the following cases

when the engine switch is in the “ON”

position.

DWhen the parking brake is applied...

This light comes on for a few seconds

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position even after the parking brake

is released.

DWhen the brake fluid level is low...

CAUTION

It is dangerous to continue driving

normally when the brake fluid level is

low.

Have your vehicle checked at your

Toyota dealer in the following cases:

DThe light does not come on even if the

parking brake is applied when the en-

gine switch is in the “ON” position.

DThe light does not come on even if the

engine is turned to the “ON” position

with the parking brake released.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If either of the following conditions

occurs, immediately stop your vehicle

at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

DThe light does not turn off even

after the parking brake is released

while the engine is running.

In this case, the brakes may not

work properly and your stopping

distance will become longer. De-

press the brake pedal firmly and

bring the vehicle to an immediate

stop.

DThe brake system warning light re-

mains on together with the “ABS”

warning light.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely un-

stable during braking.

(b) Driver’s Seat Belt Reminder Light

and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to

buckle up the driver’s seat belt.

Once the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” or “START” position, the reminder

light flashes if the driver’s seat belt is not

fastened. Unless the driver fastens the

belt, the light continues flashing.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h

(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,

the buzzer will sound for 30 seconds.

Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,

the buzzer will sound in a different tone

for 90 more seconds. Even if the vehicle

speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the

buzzer will continue to sound. To stop the

buzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer

still sounds, make sure the front passen-

ger’s seat belt is fastened.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

133

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

minder Light and Buzzer

The light and buzzer act as a reminder to

have the front passenger buckle up the

seat belt.

Once the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” or “START” position, the reminder

light flashes if a passenger sits in the

front passenger seat and does not fasten

the seat belt. However, if a front passen-

ger uses an additional seat cushion, the

light may not flash even when the seat

belt is not buckled up.

If the vehicle speed rises above 20 km/h

(12 mph) with the seat belt unfastened,

the buzzer will sound for 30 seconds.

Then, if the seat belt is still unfastened,

the buzzer will sound in a different tone

for 90 more seconds. Even if the vehicle

speed drops below 20 km/h (12 mph), the

buzzer will continue to sound. To stop the

buzzer, fasten the seat belt. If the buzzer

still sounds, make sure the driver’s seat

belt is fastened.

If luggage or other load is placed on the

front passenger seat, depending on its

weight the reminder light may flash.

(d) Charging System Warning Light

This warning light comes on when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion, and goes off when the engine is

started.

When there are problems in the charging

system while the engine is running, the

warning light comes on.

NOTICE

When the charging system warning

light comes on while the engine is

running, malfunctions such as the en-

gine drive belt being broken may have

occurred. If the warning light comes

on, immediately stop the vehicle in a

safe place and contact your Toyota

dealer.

(e) Low Engine Oil Pressure Warning

Light

This light warns that the engine oil pres-

sure is too low.

If it flickers or stays on while you are

driving, pull off the road to a safe place

and stop the engine immediately. Call a

Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for

assistance.

The light may occasionally flicker when

the engine is idling or it may come on

briefly after a hard stop. There is no

cause for concern if it then goes out when

the engine is accelerated slightly.

The light may come on when the oil level

is extremely low. It is not designed to

indicate low oil level, and the oil level

must be checked using the level dipstick.

NOTICE

Do not drive the vehicle with the

warning light on—even for one block.

It may ruin the engine.

(f) Malfunction Indicator Lamp

This lamp comes on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position

and goes off after the engine starts.

This means that the warning light sys-

tem is operating properly.

If the lamp remains on, or the lamp

comes on while driving, first check the

followings.

DEmpty fuel tank

If the fuel tank is empty, refuel immedi-

ately.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

134

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DLoose fuel tank cap

If the fuel tank cap is loose, securely

tighten it.

These cases are temporary malfunctions.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off

after taking several driving trips.

If the lamp does not go off even after

several trips, contact your Toyota dealer

as soon as possible.

If the fuel tank is not empty or the fuel

tank cap is not loose...

DThere is a problem somewhere in the

engine, emission control system, elec-

tronic throttle control system, automatic

transmission electrical system or warn-

ing light system itself.

Contact your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible to service the vehicle.

If engine speed does not increase when

the accelerator pedal is depressed, there

may be a problem somewhere in the elec-

tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-

er, if you depress the accelerator pedal

more firmly and slowly, you can drive your

vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic

throttle control system is corrected during

low speed driving, the system may not be

recovered until the engine is stopped and

the engine switch is turned to the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-

neous pedal operation.

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance

(I/M) programs

Your vehicle may not pass a state

emission inspection if the malfunction

indicator lamp remains on. Contact your

Toyota dealer to check your vehicle’s

emission control system and OBD

(On−Board Diagnostics) system before

taking your vehicle for the inspection.

For details, see “Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs” on page 394

in Section 6.

(g) Low Fuel Level Warning Light

This light comes on when the fuel level

in the tank becomes nearly empty. Fill up

the tank as soon as possible.

On inclines or curves, due to the move-

ment of fuel in the tank, the low fuel level

warning light may come on earlier than

usual.

(h) “ABS” Warning Light

The light comes on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position. If

the anti−lock brake system and the brake

assist system work properly, the light

turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter,

if either of the systems malfunctions, the

light comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

following systems do not operate, but the

brake system still operates conventionally.

DAnti−lock brake system

DBrake assist system

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DEnhanced vehicle stability control sys-

tem

DDownhill assist control system

DHill−start assist control system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

135

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate

so that the wheels could lock up during

a sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions

occurs, this indicates a malfunction

somewhere in the components moni-

tored by the warning light. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position, or remains on.

DThe light comes on while you are driv-

ing.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the brake system warn-

ing light, immediately stop your ve-

hicle at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

(i) Open Door Warning Light

This light remains on until all the side

doors and back door are completely

closed.

(j) SRS Warning Light

This indicator comes on when the en-

gine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. It goes off after about 6 seconds.

This means the SRS airbags and seat

belt pretensioners are operating proper-

ly.

This warning light system monitors the

airbag sensor assembly, front airbag sen-

sors, side and curtain shield airbag sen-

sors, curtain shield airbag sensors, driv-

er’s seat position sensor, driver’s seat belt

buckle switch, “AIR BAG ON” indicator

light, “AIR BAG OFF” indicator light, front

passenger’s seat belt buckle switch, seat

belt pretensioner assemblies, inflators, in-

terconnecting wiring and power sources.

If any of the following conditions occurs,

this indicates a malfunction of the airbags

or seat belt pretensioners. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on for more than

6 seconds.

DThe light comes on while driving.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

136

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The SRS warning light and “AIR BAG

OFF” indicator light will come on if there

is a malfunction in the front passenger

occupant classification system.

(k) Automatic Transmission Fluid Tem-

perature Warning Light

This light warns that the automatic trans-

mission fluid temperature is too high.

If this light comes on while you are driv-

ing, slow down and pull off the road. Stop

the vehicle at a safe place and put the

selector lever in “P”. With the engine id-

ling, wait until the light goes off. If the

light goes off, you can start the vehicle

again. If the light does not go off, call a

Toyota dealer or qualified repair shop for

assistance.

NOTICE

Continued driving with the warning

light on may damage the automatic

transmission.

(l) “VSC” Warning Light

The light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following.

DEnhanced vehicle stability control sys-

tem

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DDownhill assist control system

DHill−start assist control system

The light will come on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position and

will go off after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, all the

above systems will not work. In such a

case, the brakes will operate when applied

(no electronic assistance will be avail-

able), and it will be possible to continue

driving the vehicle.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

after the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

(m) Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light warns that the tire pressure of

one or more of your tires (including the

spare tire) is low. The light comes on

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position. It goes off after a few sec-

onds. This indicates that the tire pressure

warning system is functioning properly.

If the warning light comes on while you

are driving, the tire pressure of one or

more of your tires (including the spare

tire) is low. The light goes off after the

tire inflation pressure is adjusted to the

proper pressure.

If the warning light blinks, the tire pres-

sure warning system may be malfunction-

ing. Contact your Toyota dealer.

For details, see “Tire pressure warning

system” on page 163 in Section 1−7.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

137

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

(n) “4WD” Warning Light

The light warns that when there is a prob-

lem somewhere in active torque control

4WD system.

The light will come on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position, and

will go off after about a few seconds.

If the warning light does not come on

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position, contact your Toyota dealer

to service the vehicle.

If the “4WD” warning light flashes...

This indicates that the driveline tempera-

ture has become too high. Without turning

off the engine, do either of the following

to cool the driveline:

DReduce vehicle speed until the light

goes off.

DStop the vehicle at a safe place and

allow the engine to idle until the light

goes off.

If operation of the vehicle is continued

while the light is flashing, the system au-

tomatically shuts off the engine torque that

is applied to the rear wheels to protect

the driveline. If this happens, the light will

flash faster.

When the driveline temperature falls

enough, the light will go off.

If the “4WD” warning light remains on...

This indicates that the system may not

work properly. Contact your Toyota dealer

to service your vehicle.

(o) Electric Power Steering System

Warning Light

The light comes on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position. If

the electric power steering system warning

light works properly, the light turns off

after a few seconds. If the system has

malfunctions, the light comes on again.

If the following conditions occur, this

indicates a malfunction somewhere in

the components monitored by the warn-

ing light system. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon

as possible.

DThe light does not come on when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on.

DThe light stays on while you are driv-

ing.

CAUTION

If the electric power steering system

warning light comes on, take your ve-

hicle to your Toyota dealer as soon

as possible. In this case, more effort

is required for the steering wheel to

turn than usual. Drive your vehicle

while firmly gripping the steering

wheel.

(p) Low Windshield Washer Fluid Level

Warning Light

The light warns that the windshield washer

fluid level is too low. Add washer fluid at

your earliest opportunity. (For instructions,

see “Adding washer fluid” on page 422 in

Section 7−3.)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

138

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

(q) Engine Oil Replacement Reminder

Light

This light acts as a reminder to replace

the engine oil.

This light will come on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position and

will go off after about a few seconds.

When you drive for about 7200 km (4500

miles) after the engine oil replacement,

this light illuminates for about 3 seconds

and then flashes for about 12 seconds

with the engine switch turned to the “ON”

position. If you continue driving without

replacing the engine oil, and if the dis-

tance driven exceeds 8000 km (5000

miles), the light will come on after the

engine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion. The light will remain on thereafter.

If the light is flashing, we recommend that

you replace the engine oil at an early

opportunity depending on the driving and

road conditions. If the light comes on,

replace it as soon as possible.

The system must be reset after the en-

gine oil replacement. Reset the system by

the following procedure:

1. Turn the engine switch to the “OFF”

position with the trip meter A reading

shown. (For details, see “Odometer and

two trip meters” on page 127 in this

Section.)

2. Turn the engine switch to the “ON”

position while holding down the trip

meter reset knob.

Hold down the knob for at least 5 sec-

onds. The odometer indicates “000000”

and the light goes off.

If the system fails to reset, the light will

continue flashing.

(r) Key Reminder Buzzer

This buzzer acts as a reminder to remove

the key when you open the driver’s door

with the engine switch in the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position.

CHECKING SERVICE REMINDER

INDICATORS (except the low fuel level

warning light and low windshield

washer fluid level warning light)

1. Apply the parking brake.

2. Open one of the doors.

The open door warning light should

come on.

3. Close the door.

The open door warning light should go

off.

4. Turn the engine switch to the “ON”

position, but do not start the engine.

All the service reminder indicators ex-

cept the open door warning light should

come on.

The following service reminder indica-

tors go off after a few seconds:

DEngine oil replacement reminder light

DAutomatic transmission fluid tempera-

ture warning light

D“ABS” warning light

D“VSC” warning light

DTire pressure warning light

D“4WD” warning light

DElectric power steering system warning

light

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

139

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

D“AUTO LSD” indicator light

DSlip indicator light

DDownhill assist control system indicator

light

DFour−wheel drive lock indicator light

The SRS warning light goes off after

about 6 seconds.

If any service reminder indicator or warn-

ing buzzer does not function as described

above, have it checked by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

140

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

141

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Engine (ignition) switch, Transmission and Parking

brake

Engine (ignition) switch 142. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic transmission 143. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Active torque control 4WD system 150. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Traction control system 152. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

“AUTO LSD” system 153. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Enhanced vehicle stability control system 155. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Downhill assist control system 158. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hill−start assist control system 161. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire pressure warning system 163. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parking brake 167. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cruise control 168. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 7

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

142

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

“START”—Starter motor on. The key

will return to the “ON” position when

released.

For starting tips, see page 341 in Section

“ON”—Engine on and all accessories

on.

This is the normal driving position.

“ACC”—Accessories such as the radio

operate, but the engine is off.

If you leave the engine switch in the

“ACC” or “LOCK” position and open the

driver’s door, a buzzer will remind you to

remove the key.

“LOCK”—Engine is off and the steering

wheel is locked. The key can be re-

moved only at this position.

You must push in the key to turn the

engine switch from the “ACC” to “LOCK”

position. The selector lever must be in the

“P” position before pushing the key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer sys-

tem—Once you remove the key, the en-

gine immobilizer system is automatically

set. (See “Engine immobilizer system” on

page 15 in Section 1−2.)

When starting the engine, the engine

switch may seem stuck at the “LOCK”

position. To free it, first be sure the key

is pushed all the way in, and then rotate

the steering wheel slightly while turning

the key gently.

Approximately five hours after the engine

is turned off, you may hear sound coming

from under the floor around the driver’s

seat for several minutes. This is normal

operation and does not indicate a malfunc-

tion. (See “Leak detection pump” on page

ix.)

It is not a malfunction if the needle on all

meters and gauges move slightly when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON” or

“START” position.

NOTICE

Do not leave the engine switch in the

“ON” position if the engine is not

running. The battery will discharge

and the ignition could be damaged.

Engine (ignition) switch

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

143

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift

lock system to minimize the possibility of

incorrect operation. This means you can

only shift out of the “P” position when the

brake pedal is depressed (with the engine

switch in the “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the

instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and

key removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

(shifting into overdrive possible)

3: Engine braking

(shifting into overdrive not possible)

2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission (4−speed)

Selector lever

Shift normally.

Shift with the brake pedal

depressed.

(The engine switch must

be in the “ON” position.)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

144

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” on page 342 in

Section 3. The transmission must be in

the “P” or “N” position.

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the selector lever to the

“D” position.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the

automatic transmission system will select

the most suitable gear for running condi-

tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-

ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low, the transmis-

sion will not shift into the overdrive gear

even in the “D” position.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

To use engine braking, you can downshift

the transmission as follows:

DShift into the “3” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to third gear and

engine braking will be enabled.

Two−wheel drive models

173 km/h (108 mph)

Four−wheel drive models

164 km/h (102 mph)

DShift into the “2” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to second gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

stronger engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two−wheel drive models

113 km/h (70 mph)

Four−wheel drive models

107 km/h (66 mph)

DShift into the “L” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to first gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than the following speed, and

maximum engine braking will be en-

abled.

Two−wheel drive models

56 km/h (35 mph)

Four−wheel drive models

53 km/h (33 mph)

When the cruise control is being used,

even if you downshift from the “D” to “3”

position, engine braking will not be en-

abled because the cruise control is not

cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,

see “Cruise control” on page 168 in this

Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. Abrupt shifting

could cause the vehicle to skid or

spin.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

145

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

(d) Using the “2” and “L” positions

The “2” and “L” positions are used for

strong engine braking as described pre-

viously.

With the selector lever in the “2” or “L”

position, you can start the vehicle in mo-

tion as with the lever in the “D” position.

With the selector lever in the “2” position,

the vehicle will start in first gear and au-

tomatically shift to second gear.

With the selector lever in the “L” position,

the transmission is engaged in first gear.

NOTICE

zBe careful not to over−rev the en-

gine. Watch the tachometer to keep

engine rpm from going into the red

zone. The approximate maximum al-

lowable speed for each position is

given below for your reference:

Two−wheel drive models

“2” 126 km/h (78 mph). . . . . . . . .

“L” 70 km/h (43 mph). . . . . . . . . .

Four−wheel drive models

“2” 120 km/h (74 mph). . . . . . . . .

“L” 67 km/h (41 mph). . . . . . . . . .

zDo not continue hill climbing or

hard towing for a long time in the

“2” or “L” position. This may cause

severe automatic transmission dam-

age from overheating. To prevent

such damage, the “3” position

should be used in hill climbing or

hard towing.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the

“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-

hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Pull the parking brake lever up fully to

securely apply the parking brake.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector

lever into the “P” position under any

circumstances while the vehicle is

moving. Serious mechanical damage

and loss of vehicle control may re-

sult.

(g) Good driving practice

DIf the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between third gear and over-

drive when climbing a gentle slope,

shift the selector lever to the “3” posi-

tion. Be sure to shift the selector lever

to the “D” position immediately after-

ward.

DWhen towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use the “D” position.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

146

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle

from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on

an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold

the vehicle using the accelerator ped-

al, as this can cause the transmission

to overheat.

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-

ver out of the “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from

the “P” position even though the brake

pedal is depressed, use the shift lock

override button. For instructions, see “If

you cannot shift automatic transmission

selector lever” on page 378 in Section 4.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

147

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Your automatic transmission has a shift

lock system to minimize the possibility of

incorrect operation. This means you can

only shift out of the “P” position when the

brake pedal is depressed (with the engine

switch in the “ON” position).

(a) Selector lever

The shift position is also displayed on the

instrument cluster.

P: Parking, engine starting and key

removal

R: Reverse

N: Neutral

D: Normal driving

(shifting into overdrive possible)

4: Engine braking

(shifting into overdrive not possible)

3, 2: Stronger engine braking

L: Maximum engine braking

Automatic transmission (5−speed)

Shift normally.

Selector lever

Shift with the brake pedal

depressed.

(The engine switch must

be in the “ON” position.)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

148

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

(b) Normal driving

1. Start the engine as instructed in “How

to start the engine” on page 342 in

Section 3. The transmission must be in

the “P” or “N” position.

2. With your foot holding down the brake

pedal, shift the selector lever to the

“D” position.

When the lever is in the “D” position, the

automatic transmission system will select

the most suitable gear for running condi-

tions such as normal cruising, hill climb-

ing, hard towing, etc.

Always use the “D” position for better fuel

economy and quieter driving. If the engine

coolant temperature is low, the transmis-

sion will not shift into the overdrive gear

even in the “D” position.

CAUTION

Never put your foot on the accelera-

tor pedal while shifting.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Depress the accelerator pedal

slowly for smooth starting.

To use engine braking, you can downshift

the transmission as follows:

DShift into the “4” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to fourth gear

and engine braking will be enabled.

DShift into the “3” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to third gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than 161 km/h (100 mph),

and stronger engine braking will be en-

abled.

DShift into the “2” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to second gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than 99 km/h (62 mph), and

stronger engine braking will be en-

abled.

DShift into the “L” position. The trans-

mission will downshift to first gear

when the vehicle speed drops down to

or lower than 42 km/h (26 mph), and

maximum engine braking will be en-

abled.

When the cruise control is being used,

even if you downshift from the “D” to “4”

position, engine braking will not be en-

abled because the cruise control is not

cancelled.

For ways to decrease the vehicle speed,

see “Cruise control” on page 168 in this

Section.

CAUTION

Be careful when downshifting on a

slippery surface. Abrupt shifting

could cause the vehicle to skid or

spin.

(d) Using the “3”, “2” and “L” posi-

tions

The “3”, “2” and “L” positions are used for

strong engine braking as described pre-

viously.

With the selector lever in the “3”, “2” or

“L” position, you can start the vehicle in

motion as with the lever in the “D” posi-

tion.

With the selector lever in the “3” or “2”

position, the vehicle will start in first gear

and automatically shift to third gear or

second gear.

With the selector lever in the “L” position,

the transmission is engaged in first gear.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

149

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

NOTICE

zBe careful not to over−rev the en-

gine. Watch the tachometer to keep

engine rpm from going into the red

zone. The approximate maximum al-

lowable speed for each position is

given below for your reference:

“3” 175 km/h (109 mph). . . . . . . .

“2” 113 km/h (70 mph). . . . . . . . .

“L” 63 km/h (39 mph). . . . . . . . . .

zDo not continue hill climbing or

hard towing for a long time in the

“3”, “2” or “L” position. This may

cause severe automatic transmis-

sion damage from overheating. To

prevent such damage, the “4” posi-

tion should be used in hill climbing

or hard towing.

(e) Backing up

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. With the brake pedal held down with

your foot, shift the selector lever to the

“R” position.

NOTICE

Never shift into reverse while the ve-

hicle is moving.

(f) Parking

1. Bring the vehicle to a complete stop.

2. Pull the parking brake lever up fully to

securely apply the parking brake.

3. With the brake pedal pressed down,

shift the selector lever to the “P” posi-

tion.

CAUTION

Never attempt to move the selector

lever into the “P” position under any

circumstances while the vehicle is

moving. Serious mechanical damage

and loss of vehicle control may re-

sult.

(g) Good driving practice

DIf the transmission repeatedly shifts up

and down between fourth gear and

overdrive when climbing a gentle slope,

shift the selector lever to the “4” posi-

tion. Be sure to shift the selector lever

to the “D” position immediately after-

ward.

DWhen towing a trailer, in order to main-

tain engine braking efficiency, do not

use the “D” position.

CAUTION

Always keep your foot on the brake

pedal while stopped with the engine

running. This prevents the vehicle

from creeping.

NOTICE

Always use the brake pedal or the

parking brake to hold the vehicle on

an upgrade. Do not attempt to hold

the vehicle using the accelerator ped-

al, as this can cause the transmission

to overheat.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

150

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

(h) If you cannot shift the selector le-

ver out of the “P” position

If you cannot shift the selector lever from

the “P” position even though the brake

pedal is depressed, use the shift lock

override button. For instructions, see “If

you cannot shift automatic transmission

selector lever” on page 378 in Section 4.

The active torque control 4WD system

controls the engine torque that is ap-

plied to the rear wheels according to

the driving conditions and road condi-

tions. When the vehicle’s driving condi-

tions are stable such as driving straight

ahead, the engine torque is applied to

only the front wheels.

FOUR−WHEEL DRIVE LOCK SWITCH

When the vehicle is driven on loose

surfaces, such as sand, gravel, or deep

snow, or if the vehicle gets stuck,

pushing the four−wheel drive lock

switch to ensure that the engine torque

is applied to the 4 wheels.

When the four−wheel drive lock switch is

pushed, the four−wheel drive lock indicator

light blinks twice and remains on until the

four−wheel drive lock is canceled.

To cancel the four−wheel drive lock, push

the switch once again and the four−wheel

drive lock indicator light will go off.

Active torque control 4WD

system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

151

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When the vehicle speed exceeds 40 km/h

(25 mph), the four−wheel drive lock will

be cancelled automatically.

The four−wheel drive lock indicator will

come on for a few seconds when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON” posi-

tion.

If the indicator light does not come on

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position or the four−wheel drive lock

switch is pushed, contact your Toyota

dealer.

NOTICE

Use the four−wheel drive lock only

when driving on the loose surfaces,

such as sand, gravel, or deep snow,

or if the vehicle gets stuck. After the

four−wheel drive lock is used to pro-

vide traction, cancel the four−wheel

drive lock. Using the four−wheel drive

lock at other times may cause dam-

age to the four−wheel drive system.

SYSTEM FAILURE WARING

The “4WD” warning light warns that there

is a problem somewhere in the active

torque control 4WD system.

The light will come on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

When the system works properly, the light

turns off after a few seconds.

If the warning light does not come on

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position, contact your Toyota dealer

to service the vehicle.

If the “4WD” warning light flashes...

This indicates that the driveline tempera-

ture has become too high. Without turning

off the engine, do either of the following

to cool the driveline:

DReduce vehicle speed until the light

goes off.

DStop the vehicle at a safe place and

allow the engine to idle until the light

goes off.

If operation of the vehicle is continued

while the light is flashing, the system au-

tomatically shuts off the engine torque that

is applied to the rear wheels to protect

the driveline. If this happens, the light will

flash faster.

When the driveline temperature falls

enough, the light will go off.

If the “4WD” warning light remains on...

This indicates that the system may not

work properly. Contact your Toyota dealer

to service your vehicle.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

152

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The traction control system automatical-

ly helps prevent the spinning of the

front wheels (two−wheel drive models)

or 4 wheels (four−wheel drive models)

when the vehicle is started or acceler-

ated on slippery road surfaces.

When the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the system automatically

turns on.

CAUTION

Under certain slippery road condi-

tions, full traction of the vehicle and

power to the front wheels (two−wheel

drive models) or 4 wheels (four−wheel

drive models) cannot be maintained,

even though the traction control sys-

tem is in operation. Do not drive the

vehicle under any speed or maneuver-

ing conditions which may cause the

vehicle to lose traction control. If the

road surface is covered with ice or

snow, your vehicle should be fitted

with snow tires or tire chains. Always

drive at a speed that is appropriate

for the present road conditions.

A sound may be heard from the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the sys-

tem is in the self−check mode. This sound

does not indicate a malfunction.

When the traction control system is oper-

ating, the following conditions occur:

DThe system controls the spinning of the

front wheels (two−wheel drive models)

or 4 wheels (four−wheels drive mod-

els). At this time, the slip indicator light

blinks.

DThe vehicle may vibrate or make a

noise due to brake operation. This indi-

cates the system is functioning proper-

ly.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the engine switch is turned

to the “ON” position. If the indicator light

does not come on when the engine switch

is turned to the “ON” position, contact

your Toyota dealer.

Traction control system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

153

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following systems:

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DEnhanced vehicle stability control sys-

tem

DDownhill assist control system

DHill−start assist control system

The light will come on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

When the systems are work properly, the

light turns off after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, all the

above systems will not work. In such a

case, the brakes will operate when applied

(no electronic assistance will be avail-

able), and it will be possible to continue

driving the vehicle.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The “AUTO LSD” system aids traction

by using the traction control system to

control engine performance and braking

when one of the front wheels begins to

spin.

This system is used only when wheel

spinning occurs in a ditch or on a

rough surface.

This system is effective in case one of

the front wheels is spinning.

NOTICE

Do not use the “AUTO LSD” system

in conditions other than the above. A

much greater steering effort and more

careful cornering control will be re-

quired.

“AUTO LSD” system

(two−wheel drive models)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

154

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To turn on the system, push the “AUTO

LSD” switch when the vehicle is

stopped.

The “AUTO LSD” indicator light will come

on and remain on while the system is on.

While the system is operating, the slip

indicator light will also flash.

To turn off the system, push the “AUTO

LSD” switch again and the “AUTO LSD”

indicator light will go off.

If the vehicle speed exceeds 50 km/h (31

mph), this system will be cancelled auto-

matically.

The “AUTO LSD” indicator light will come

on for a few seconds when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position. If

the indicator light does not come on when

the engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position or the “AUTO LSD” switch is

pushed, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the brake actuator temperature becomes

too high, a buzzer will sound for about 3

seconds. (The slip indicator light will also

be lit.) The system will temporarily stop

operating in order to protect the brake

actuator. Although “AUTO LSD” system is

not operating, it is still possible to contin-

ue your driving.

The operation of the system will be auto-

matically restored after the actuator cools

down. After operation is restored, the slip

indicator light will go off.

“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following systems:

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DEnhanced vehicle stability control sys-

tem

DDownhill assist control system

DHill−start assist control system

When the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the light will come on.

When the systems are work properly, the

light turns off after a few seconds.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

155

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If the light comes on while driving, all the

above systems will not work. In such a

case, the brakes will operate when applied

(no electronic assistance will be avail-

able), and it will be possible to continue

driving the vehicle.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The vehicle stability control system

helps provide integrated control of the

such systems as the anti−lock brake,

brake assist, traction control, engine

control, electric power steering. This

system automatically controls the

brakes, engine and power steering to

help prevent the vehicle from skidding

when cornering on a slippery road sur-

face or operating steering wheel abrupt-

ly.

This system activates when the vehicle

speed exceeds about 15 km/h (9 mph).

A sound may be heard from the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the sys-

tem is in the self−check mode. This sound

does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

DDo not rely excessively on the ve-

hicle stability control system. Even

if the vehicle stability control sys-

tem is operating, you must always

drive carefully and attentively to

avoid death or serious injury. Reck-

less driving will result in an unex-

pected accident. If the slip indicator

light flashes, and an alarm sounds,

special care should be taken while

driving.

DUse only tires of the specified size.

The size, manufacturer, brand and

tread pattern for all 4 tires should

be the same. If you use the tires

other than specified, or different

type or size, the vehicle stability

control system may not function

correctly. When replacing the tires

or wheels, contact your Toyota deal-

er. (See “Checking and replacing

tires” on page 410 in Section 7−2.)

DIn situations where the road surface

is covered with ice or snow, your

vehicle should be fitted with snow

tires or tire chains.

Enhanced vehicle stability

control system

(two−wheel drive vehicles)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

156

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-

ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an

alarm sounds intermittently. Special care

should be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the engine switch is turned

to the “ON” position. If the indicator light

does not come on when the engine switch

is turned to the “ON” position, contact

your Toyota dealer.

“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following systems:

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DEnhanced vehicle stability control sys-

tem

DDownhill assist control system

DHill−start assist control system

The light will come on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

When the systems are work properly, the

light turns off after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, all the

above systems will not work. In such a

case, the brakes will operate when applied

(no electronic assistance will be avail-

able), and it will be possible to continue

driving the vehicle.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

157

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The vehicle stability control system

helps provide integrated control of the

such systems as the anti−lock brake,

brake assist, traction control, engine

control, electric power steering, active

torque control 4WD. This system auto-

matically controls the brakes, engine

and power steering as well as driving

force to all the 4 wheels to help pre-

vent the vehicle from skidding when

cornering on a slippery road surface or

operating steering wheel abruptly.

This system activates when the vehicle

speed exceeds about 15 km/h (9 mph).

A sound may be heard from the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the sys-

tem is in the self−check mode. This sound

does not indicate a malfunction.

CAUTION

DDo not rely excessively on the ve-

hicle stability control system. Even

if the vehicle stability control sys-

tem is operating, you must always

drive carefully and attentively to

avoid death or serious injury. Reck-

less driving will result in an unex-

pected accident. If the slip indicator

light flashes, and an alarm sounds,

special care should be taken while

driving.

DUse only tires of the specified size.

The size, manufacturer, brand and

tread pattern for all 4 tires should

be the same. If you use the tires

other than specified, or different

type or size, the vehicle stability

control system may not function

correctly. When replacing the tires

or wheels, contact your Toyota deal-

er. (See “Checking and replacing

tires” on page 410 in Section 7−2.)

DIn situations where the road surface

is covered with ice or snow, your

vehicle should be fitted with snow

tires or tire chains.

If the vehicle is going to skid during driv-

ing, the slip indicator light blinks and an

alarm sounds intermittently. Special care

should be taken while driving.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the engine switch is turned

to the “ON” position. If the indicator light

does not come on when the engine switch

is turned to the “ON” position, contact

your Toyota dealer.

Enhanced vehicle stability

control system

(four−wheel drive models)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

158

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following systems:

DTraction control system

DEnhanced vehicle stability control sys-

tem

DDownhill assist control system

DHill−start assist control system

The light will come on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position.

When the systems are work properly, the

light turns off after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, all the

above systems will not work. In such a

case, the brakes will operate when applied

(no electronic assistance will be avail-

able), and it will be possible to continue

driving the vehicle.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

The downhill assist control system as-

sists the deceleration of the engine

brake when you drive down a steep hill.

When you are driving down a hill,

pushing the “DAC” switch turns on the

system. If the vehicle is traveling at a

speed of 25 km/h (15 mph) or less, you

can descend at a constant speed.

CAUTION

Do not rely excessively on the down-

hill assist control system. It may not

be able to maintain a low speed over

road surfaces or off−road surfaces on

which sliding can easily occur, such

as extremely steep slopes or icy or

muddy roads.

TO ACTIVATE THE DOWNHILL ASSIST

CONTROL SYSTEM

1. In order to make full use of the en-

gine brake, put the transmission se-

lector lever in “L” (forward) or “R”

(reverse).

Downhill assist control system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

159

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2. Push the “DAC” switch to turn the

system on. The downhill assist con-

trol system indicator light will come

on.

If the downhill assist control system indi-

cator light flashes, the selector lever may

not be in “L” or “R”.

If the indicator light does not come on

when the switch is pushed, or the indica-

tor light flashes when the selector lever is

in “L” or “R”, contact your Toyota dealer.

With the vehicle traveling at a speed of

25 km/h (15 mph) or less, release the

brake pedal and accelerator pedal to acti-

vate the system. The vehicle will descend

the hill at a low speed.

While the system is operating, the slip

indicator light will flash and the stoplights

and high mounted stoplight will be lit. A

sound may also occur during the opera-

tion. This does not indicate a malfunction.

If the brakes are applied while the system

is operating, a kickback from the brake

pedal may result and a sound may occur.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

If the “DAC” switch is pushed to turn the

system off while it is in operation, the

system will stop operating gradually. The

downhill assist control system indicator

light will flash to alert the driver. To con-

tinue driving at a low speed, push the

“DAC” switch to turn the system on.

The slip indicator light and downhill assist

control system indicator light come on for

a few seconds when the engine switch is

turned to the “ON” position. If any of the

indicator lights does not come on when

the engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position, contact your Toyota dealer.

If the brake actuator temperature becomes

too high, the downhill assist control sys-

tem indicator light will flash and a buzzer

will start to sound intermittently. This indi-

cates that the system cannot operate for

much longer. In this case, stop the vehicle

immediately in a safe place.

If the system continues to operate while

driving, the buzzer will sound for about 3

seconds. The system will temporarily stop

operating in order to protect the brake

actuator. Although the downhill assist con-

trol system is not operating, it is still pos-

sible to continue your driving.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

160

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The operation of the system will be auto-

matically restored after the actuator cools

down. The downhill assist control system

indicator light changes from flash to re-

main on after operation is restored.

“VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following systems:

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DEnhanced vehicle stability control sys-

tem

DDownhill assist control system

DHill−start assist control system

When the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the light will come on.

When the systems are work properly, the

light turns off after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, all the

above systems will not work. In such a

case, the brakes will operate when applied

(no electronic assistance will be avail-

able), and it will be possible to continue

driving the vehicle.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

161

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The hill−start assist control system as-

sists in starting to drive a steep or a

slippery hill. When you start to move

up a hill slope, the system helps to

prevent the vehicle from rolling back-

ward in the interval while moving the

foot from the brake pedal to the accel-

erator pedal.

CAUTION

DDo not rely excessively on the hill−

start assist control system. The ve-

hicle may not be able to start

smoothly on road surfaces or off−

road surfaces such as extremely

steep slopes or icy roads, on which

sliding can occur very easily.

DDo not use the hill−start assist con-

trol system to park the vehicle. This

system is not designed as a func-

tion for parking the vehicle on a

uphill slope.

TO ACTIVATE THE HILL−START ASSIST

CONTROL SYSTEM

The hill−start assist control system will

operate for maximum of 2 seconds. The

brake pedal must be depressed further

to activate the system when all of the

following conditions apply with the

brake pedal is depressed:

At this time, one beep will be heard.

DWhen the selector lever is not in “P”

DWhen the accelerator pedal is not de-

pressed

DWhen the parking brake is not applied

DWhen the vehicle is stopped

The system is designed to operate when

the vehicle is starting on uphill slope;

therefore, if the transmission selector le-

ver is in “P”, it will not operate.

When the hill−start assist control system

is operating, the slip indicator light flashes

and the stoplights and high mounted stop-

light are lit.

When any of the following is performed,

the system will stop operation. At this

time, two beeps will be heard and the slip

indicator light will go off.

DShifting the selector lever to “P”

DApplying the parking brake

DDepressing the brake pedal

If the accelerator pedal is depressed, the

system will also stop operation without

beep sounds.

Hill−start assist control

system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

162

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The hill−start assist control system oper-

ates for a maximum of 2 seconds. If the

vehicle is not started within 2 seconds,

two beeps will be heard and the system

will gradually stop operating.

The hill−start control system is not de-

signed to park the vehicle on uphill slope.

When parking the vehicle, be sure to ap-

ply the parking brake.

The slip indicator light comes on for a few

seconds when the engine switch is turned

to the “ON” position. If the indicator light

does not come on when the engine switch

is turned to the “ON” position, contact

your Toyota dealer. “VSC” warning light

This light warns that there is a problem

somewhere in the following systems:

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DEnhanced vehicle stability control sys-

tem

DDownhill assist control system

DHill−start assist control system

When the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position, the light will come on. If

the systems are work properly, the light

turns off after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, all the

above systems will not work. In such a

case, the brakes will operate when applied

(no electronic assistance will be avail-

able), and it will be possible to continue

driving the vehicle.

In the following cases, contact your Toyota

dealer:

DThe warning light does not come on

when the engine switch is turned to the

“ON” position.

DThe warning light remains on after the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position.

DThe warning light comes on while driv-

ing.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

163

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The tire pressure warning system warns

you that the tire inflation pressure is

low.

The tire pressure warning system is not

a substitute for checking normal tire infla-

tion pressure. Check the tire inflation

pressure with a tire pressure gauge regu-

larly.

CAUTION

The warning system may not activate

immediately if blowout or sudden air

loss should occur. The tire pressure warning light comes on

when the engine switch is in “ON” position

and goes off after a few seconds. This

means the tire pressure warning system is

operating properly. If the tire inflation pres-

sure becomes low, the light comes on

again. In this case, adjusting the tire infla-

tion pressure will turn off the light after a

few minutes. If the light comes on after

blinking for 1 minute, the tire pressure

warning system is not working properly.

Indicator

status Meanings Do this

ON Tire inflation

pressure is

low

Adjust the

tire inflation

pressure

ON after

blinking for

1 minute

Tire pres-

sure warn-

ing system

malfunction

Have the

system

checked at

your Toyota

dealer

CAUTION

If the tire pressure warning light

comes on, be sure to observe the

following precautions. Failure to do

so could cause loss of vehicle control

and result in death or serious injury.

DStop your vehicle in a safe place as

soon as possible. Adjust the tire

inflation pressure immediately.

Tire pressure warning system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

164

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DIf the tire pressure warning light

comes on even after tire inflation

pressure adjustment, it is probable

that you have a flat tire. Check the

tires. If the tire is flat, change to

the spare tire and have the flat tire

repaired by the nearest Toyota deal-

er.

DAvoid abrupt maneuvering and bra-

king. If the vehicle tires deteriorate,

you could lose control of the steer-

ing wheel or the brakes.

The tire pressure warning light may turn

on due to natural causes such as natural

air leaks or tire inflation pressure changes

caused by temperature. In this case, ad-

justing the tire inflation pressure will turn

off the light after a few minutes.

The spare tire is also equipped with the

tire pressure warning valve and transmit-

ter. The tire pressure warning light will

turn on if the tire inflation pressure of the

spare tire is low. If a tire goes flat, even

though the flat tire is replaced with the

spare tire, the warning light does not turn

off. Replace the spare tire with the re-

paired tire and adjust the proper tire infla-

tion pressure. The tire pressure warning

light will turn off after a few minutes.

CAUTION

Each tire, including the spare (if pro-

vided), should be checked monthly

when cold and inflated to the inflation

pressure recommended by the vehicle

manufacturer on the vehicle placard

or tire inflation pressure label (tire

and load information label). (If your

vehicle has tires of a different size

than the size indicated on the vehicle

placard or tire inflation pressure label

(tire and load information label), you

should determine the proper tire infla-

tion pressure for those tires.)

As an added safety feature, your ve-

hicle has been equipped with a tire

pressure monitoring system (TPMS–

tire pressure warning system) that il-

luminates a low tire pressure telltale

(tire pressure warning light) when one

or more of your tires is significantly

under−inflated. Accordingly, when the

low tire pressure telltale (tire pres-

sure warning light) illuminates, you

should stop and check your tires as

soon as possible, and inflate them to

the proper pressure. Driving on a sig-

nificantly under−inflated tire causes

the tire to overheat and can lead to

tire failure. Under−inflation also re-

duces fuel efficiency and tire tread

life, and may affect the vehicle’s han-

dling and stopping ability.

Please note that the TPMS (tire pres-

sure warning system) is not a substi-

tute for proper tire maintenance, and

it is the driver’s responsibility to

maintain correct tire pressure, even if

under−inflation has not reached the

level to trigger illumination of the

TPMS low tire pressure telltale (tire

pressure warning light).

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

165

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Your vehicle has also been equipped

with a TPMS (tire pressure warning

system) malfunction indicator to indi-

cate when the system is not operat-

ing properly. The TPMS (tire pressure

warning system) malfunction indicator

is combined with the low tire pres-

sure telltale (tire pressure warning

light). When the system detects a

malfunction, the telltale will flash for

approximately one minute and then

remain continuously illuminated. This

sequence will continue upon subse-

quent vehicle start−ups as long as

the malfunction exists. When the mal-

function indicator is illuminated, the

system may not be able to detect or

signal low tire pressure as intended.

TPMS (tire pressure warning system)

malfunctions may occur for a variety

of reasons, including the installation

of replacement or alternate tires or

wheels on the vehicle that prevent

the TPMS (tire pressure warning sys-

tem) from functioning properly. Al-

ways check the TPMS (tire pressure

warning system) malfunction telltale

after replacing one or more tires or

wheels on your vehicle to ensure that

the replacement or alternate tires and

wheels allow the TPMS (tire pressure

warning system) to continue to func-

tion properly.

NOTICE

zDo not use liquid sealants for a flat

tire as tire pressure warning valve

and transmitter will be damaged.

zWhen the tires must be repaired or

replaced, have them repaired or re-

placed by the nearest Toyota dealer

or an authorized tire dealer. The

tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters will be affected by the

installation or removal of tires.

IF THE TIRE PRESSURE WARNING

LIGHT COMES ON AFTER BLINKING

FOR 1 MINUTE···

If the tire pressure warning light comes

on after blinking for 1 minute when the

engine switch is in “ON” position, the

tire pressure warning system is not

working properly.

The system will be disabled in the follow-

ing conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the

system will work properly.)

DIf tires not equipped with tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters are

used.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

166

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DIf the ID code on the tire pressure

warning valves and transmitters is not

registered in the tire pressure warning

computer.

DIf the tire inflation pressure is more

than 500 kPa (5.1 kgf/cm2 or bar, 73

psi).

The system may be disabled in the follow-

ing conditions:

(When the condition becomes normal, the

system will work properly.)

DIf electronic devices or facilities using

similar radio wave frequencies are

nearby.

DIf a radio set at similar frequencies is

in use in the vehicle.

DIf a window tint that affects the radio

wave signals is installed.

DIf there is a lot of snow or ice on the

vehicle, in particular around the wheels

or wheel housings.

DIf non−genuine Toyota wheels are used.

DIf tire chains are used.

DIf the spare tire is in a location subject

to poor radio wave signal reception.

DIf a large metallic object which can

interfere with signal reception is put in

the luggage compartment.

If the tire pressure warning light continues

to come on after blinking for 1 minute

when the engine switch is in “ON” posi-

tion, have the system checked by your

Toyota dealer.

Even if you use genuine wheels, the tire

pressure warning system may not work

properly with some types of tires.

For vehicles sold in U.S.A.

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules. Operation is subject to the

following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) this device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

NOTICE:

This equipment has been tested and

found to comply with the limits for a

Class B digital device, pursuant to Part

15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are

designed to provide reasonable protec-

tion against harmful interference in a

residential installation. This equipment

generates, uses and can radiate radio

frequency energy and, if not installed

and used in accordance with the instruc-

tions, may cause harmful interference to

radio communications. However, there is

no guarantee that interference will not

occur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful interfer-

ence to radio or television reception,

which can be determined by turning the

equipment off and on, the user is en-

couraged to try to correct the interfer-

ence by one or more of the following

measures:

DReorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

DIncrease the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

167

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DConnect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

DConsult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

For vehicles sold in Canada

Operation is subject to the following two

conditions:

(1) this device may not cause interfer-

ence, and (2) this device must accept

any interference, including interference

that may cause undesired operation of

the device.

REPLACING TIRES AND WHEELS

When replacing the tires and wheels, be

sure to install tire pressure warning valves

and transmitters. ID codes on the tire

pressure warning valves and transmitters

are registered in the tire pressure warning

computer. When replacing a tire pressure

warning valve and transmitter, it is neces-

sary to register the ID code of tire pres-

sure warning valve and transmitter. Have

the ID code registered by your Toyota

dealer.

If the ID code is not registered, the sys-

tem will not work properly. After driving

about 20 minutes, the tire pressure warn-

ing light comes on after blinking for 1

minute to indicate a system malfunction.

NOTICE

When the tires or tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters must be

replaced, have them replaced by your

Toyota dealer. The tire pressure warn-

ing valves and transmitters will be

affected by the installation or removal

of tires.

For the U.S.A.

For Canada

Parking brake

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

168

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When parking, firmly apply the parking

brake to avoid inadvertent creeping.

To set: Pull up the lever. For better hold-

ing power, first depress the brake pedal

and hold it while setting the parking

brake.

To release: Pull up the lever slightly (1),

press the lock release button (2), and low-

er (3).

To remind you that the parking brake is

set, the parking brake reminder light in

the instrument panel remains on until you

release the parking brake.

CAUTION

Before driving, be sure the parking

brake is fully released and the park-

ing brake reminder light is off.

The cruise control is designed to main-

tain a set cruising speed without requir-

ing the driver to operate the accelera-

tor. Cruising speed can be set to any

speed above 40 km/h (25 mph).

Within the limits of the engine’s capabili-

ties, cruising speed can be maintained up

or down grades. However, changes in ve-

hicle speed may occur on steeper grades.

CAUTION

DTo help maintain maximum control

of your vehicle, do not use the

cruise control when driving in

heavy or varying traffic, or on slip-

pery (rainy, icy or snow−covered) or

winding roads.

DBe careful about vehicle speed as

it may increase when driving down-

hill with the cruise control on.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

To turn the cruise control on, press the

“ON−OFF” button. The “CRUISE” indicator

light on the instrument panel will come on

to indicate that the cruise control is opera-

tional. Pressing the “ON−OFF” button

again turns the system off.

When the system is turned off, cruising

speed must be reset when the cruise con-

trol is turned on again.

Cruise control

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

169

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

To avoid accidentally engaging the

cruise control, turn the system off

when it is not in use. Make sure the

“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

SETTING THE CRUISING SPEED

The transmission must be in “D”, “3”

(4−speed) or “4” (5−speed) before you set

the cruising speed.

Bring your vehicle to the desired speed,

push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-

tion and release it. This sets the vehicle

at that speed. If the speed is not satisfac-

tory, tap the lever up for a faster speed,

or tap it down for a slower speed. Each

tap changes the set speed by 1.6 km/h

(1.0 mph). You can now take your foot off

the accelerator pedal.

If you need acceleration—for example,

when passing—depress the accelerator

pedal enough for the vehicle to exceed

the set speed. When you release it, the

vehicle will return to the speed set prior

to the acceleration.

CANCELLING THE CRUISE CONTROL

The cruise control may be temporarily

cancelled by the driver or by the system

itself under certain circumstances. Tempo-

rary cancellation allows the set cruising

speed to remain in memory.

The cruise control can be temporarily can-

celled by doing the following:

DPulling the lever in the “CANCEL” di-

rection and releasing it

DDepressing the brake pedal

Under certain circumstances, the cruise

control is temporarily cancelled:

DWhen vehicle speed falls below 40

km/h (25 mph)

DWhen vehicle stability control is acti-

vated

When vehicle speed drops 16 km/h (10

mph) below the set speed, the cruise con-

trol is cancelled and the set speed is

erased from memory.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

170

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The “CRUISE” indicator light remains on

to indicate that the system is still in op-

eration.

To turn the cruise control off, press the

“ON−OFF” button. Make sure the

“CRUISE” indicator light is off.

If the cruise control automatically cancels

out other than for the above cases, have

your vehicle checked by your Toyota deal-

er at the earliest opportunity.

RESUMING THE CRUISE CONTROL

If the cruise control is temporarily can-

celled, the cruising speed can be resumed

by pushing the lever up in the “+ RES”

direction.

Vehicle speed must be above 40 km/h (25

mph).

RESETTING TO A FASTER SPEED

Push the lever up in the “+ RES” direction

and hold it. Release the lever when the

desired speed is attained. While the lever

is held up, the vehicle will gradually gain

speed.

However, a faster way to reset is to ac-

celerate the vehicle and then push the

lever down in the “− SET” direction.

RESETTING TO A SLOWER SPEED

Push the lever down in the “− SET” direc-

tion and hold it. Release the lever when

the desired speed is attained. While the

lever is held down, the vehicle speed will

gradually decrease.

A sound may occur due to brake opera-

tion while the vehicle speed is decreasing.

This does not indicate a malfunction.

However, a faster way to reset is to de-

press the brake pedal and then push the

lever down in the “− SET” direction.

Even if you downshift the transmission

from the “D” position to “3” (4−speed) or

“4” (5−speed) with the cruise control on,

engine braking will not be enabled be-

cause the cruise control is not cancelled.

To decrease the vehicle speed, reset to a

slower speed with the cruise control lever

or depress the brake pedal. If you use the

brake pedal, cruise control is cancelled.

CRUISE CONTROL FAILURE WARNING

If the “CRUISE” indicator light flashes

when using the cruise control, press the

“ON−OFF” button to turn the system off

and then press it again to turn it on.

If any of the following conditions then oc-

curs, there is some trouble in the cruise

control system.

DThe indicator light does not come on.

DThe indicator light flashes again.

DThe indicator light goes out after it

comes on.

If this is the case, contact your Toyota

dealer and have your vehicle inspected.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

171

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Audio and hands−free phone systems

Reference 172. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Using your audio system 173. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

AUX adapter 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio remote controls 191. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear seat entertainment system 194. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Audio/video system operating hints 232. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Hands−free phone system 239. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 8

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

172

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Type 1: AM·FM radio/compact disc player

(with compact disc changer controller)

Type 2−1: AM·FM radio/compact disc play-

er with changer (with XMr Satellite Radio∗

controller)

Type 2−2: AM·FM radio/compact disc play-

er with changer (with XMr Satellite Radio∗

controller)

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

Reference

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

173

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

This section describes some of the basic

features on Toyota audio systems. Some

information may not pertain to your sys-

tem.

Your audio system works when the engine

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

TURNING THE SYSTEM ON AND OFF

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off.

Push “AM”, “AM·SAT”∗, “FM1”, “FM2” or

“DISC·AUX” to turn on that function with-

out pushing “PWR·VOL”. To turn on the

compact disc player, a compact disc must

be loaded in the player.

You can turn on compact disc player by

inserting a compact disc.

You can turn off the compact disc player

by ejecting the compact disc. If the audio

system was previously off, then the entire

audio system will be turned off when you

eject the compact disc. If other function

was previously playing, it will come on

again.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

SWITCHING BETWEEN FUNCTIONS

Push “AM”, “AM·SAT”∗, “FM1”, “FM2”,

“DISC·AUX” if the system is already on

but you want to switch from one function

to other.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

LISTENING TO THE XMr SATELLITE

RADIO BROADCAST∗ (type 2−1 and 2−2)

To listen to a satellite radio broadcast in

your vehicle, an additional genuine Toyota

satellite receiver and antenna (or equiva-

lents) must be purchased and installed. A

subscription to the XMr Satellite Radio

service is also necessary.

How to subscribe to an XMr Satellite

Radio

An XMr Satellite Radio is a tuner de-

signed exclusively to receive broadcasts

provided under a separate subscription.

Availability is limited to the 48 contiguous

U.S. states and 10 Canadian provinces.

How to subscribe:

You must enter into a separate service

agreement with the XMr Satellite Radio in

order to receive satellite broadcast pro-

gramming in the vehicle. Additional activa-

tion and service subscription fees apply

that are not included in the purchase price

of the vehicle and optional digital satellite

tuner. For complete information on sub-

scription rates and terms, or to subscribe

to the XMr Satellite Radio,

U.S.A.—

Visit on the web at www.xmradio.com or

call 1−800−967−2346.

Canada—

Visit on the web at www.xmradio.ca or call

1−877−438−9677.

The XMr Satellite Radio is solely respon-

sible for the quality, availability and con-

tent of the satellite radio services pro-

vided, which are subject to the terms and

conditions of the XMr Satellite Radio cus-

tomer service agreement.

Customers should have their radio ID

ready; the radio ID can be found by tun-

ing to “channel 000” on the radio. For

details, see “Displaying the radio ID” be-

low.

Using your audio system—

—Some basics

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

174

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

All fees and programming are the respon-

sibility of the XMr Satellite Radio and are

subject to change.

Satellite tuner technology notice:

Toyota’s satellite radio tuners are awarded

Type Approval Certificates from XMr Sat-

ellite Radio Inc. as proof of compatibility

with the services offered by the XMr

Satellite Radio.

Displaying the radio ID

Each XMr tuner is identified with a unique

radio ID. You will need the radio ID when

activating XMr service or when reporting

a problem.

If you select the “CH 000” using the

“TUNE·FILE” knob, the ID code of 8 al-

phanumeric characters appears. If you se-

lect another channel, display of the ID

code is canceled. The channel (000) alter-

nates the display between the radio ID

and the specific radio ID code.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

TONE AND BALANCE

For details about your system’s tone and

balance controls, see the description of

your own system.

SRS

Type 1 and 2−1 audio systems utilize SRS

FOCUSr and SRS TruBassr audio

enhancement technologies, under license

from SRS Labs, Inc., in all modes except

AM radio mode.

FOCUS, TruBass, SRS and rsymbols are trade-

marks of SRS Labs, Inc.

FOCUS and TruBass technologies are incorporated under

license from SRS Labs, Inc.

Tone

How good an audio program sounds to

you is largely determined by the mix of

the treble, midrange (type 2−2) and bass

levels. In fact, different kinds of music

and vocal programs usually sound better

with different mixes of treble, midrange

and bass.

Balance

A good balance of the left and right stereo

channels and of the front and rear sound

levels is also important.

Keep in mind that if you are listening to

a stereo recording or broadcast, changing

the right/left balance will increase the vol-

ume of one group of sounds while de-

creasing the volume of other.

YOUR RADIO ANTENNA

Your vehicle has a mast type antenna.

To remove the antenna, carefully turn it

counterclockwise.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,

make sure it is removed before driv-

ing your Toyota through an automatic

car wash.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

175

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER (type 1)

When you insert a disc, gently push it in

with the label side up. The player will play

from track 1 through to the end of the

disc. Then it will play from track 1 again.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything other than com-

pact discs into the slot.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

YOUR COMPACT DISC PLAYER WITH

CHANGER (type 2)

When you insert a disc, push the “LOAD”

button and gently push the disc in with

the label side up. This compact disc play-

er can store up to six discs. The player

will play from track 1 through to the end

of the disc. Then it will play from track

1 of the next disc.

The player is intended for use with 12 cm

(4.7 in.) discs only.

NOTICE

zDo not stack up two discs for in-

sertion, or it will cause damage to

the compact disc changer. Insert

only one compact disc into slot at

a time.

zNever try to disassemble or oil any

part of the compact disc player. Do

not insert anything except a com-

pact disc into the slot.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

176

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

—Controls and features

"Type 1

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

177

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The button num-

ber will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The button num-

ber and station frequency will appear on

the display.

These systems can store one AM and two

FM stations for each button. (The display

will show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

(Eject button)

Push the compact disc eject button to

eject a compact disc.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

Push the “AM” button to turn on the radio

and select the AM band. “AM” will appear

on the display.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To

adjust the tone and balance, turn the

knob.

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can

be turned on by turning the knob. In addi-

tion, turning the knob allows you to select

from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and

tone settings. The ASL system automati-

cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-

dance with the driving speed. This helps

ensure an optimal listening experience

even if noise levels rise while driving.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a

compact disc.

When the audio system is set into com-

pact disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

To switch between CD and AUX (external

device) modes, press the “DISC·AUX” but-

ton. The AUX mode is only available when

AUX adapter is connected to the system.

When the AUX adapter is in use, “AUX”

will appear on the display.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

178

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of

separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,

it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA

data has been inserted. Remove the disc

from the player and insert an MP3/WMA

data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

With compact disc changer only—

Use these buttons to select the disc you

want to listen to.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen appears on the display.

DolbyrB NR∗

If you are listening to a tape that was

recorded with Dolbyr B Noise Reduction,

push “ ” (preset button 3). “ ” will

appear on the display. Push the button

again to turn off Dolbyr B NR.

The Dolby NR mode reduces tape noise

by about 10 dB. For best sound reproduc-

tion, play your tapes with this button on

or off according to the mode used to re-

cord the tape.

∗: Dolby digital

Manufactured under license from Dolby Laboratories.

“Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and the double−D symbol are trade-

marks of Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpublished

works.

This product incorporates copyright protection technology

that is protected by method claims of certain U.S. patents

and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision

Corporation, and is intended for home and other limited view-

ing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision

Corporation.

Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on

the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”

or “FM2” will appear on the display. This

system allows you to set twelve FM sta-

tions, two for each of the preset button.

FOLDER (Folder up/down)

To skip up or down to a different folder:

Push either side of the “FOLDER” several

times until the number of the folder you

want to listen to appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the first folder:

Push and hold the “Ɲ” side of the button

until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio

data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio

data (CD−DA) is played.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

179

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

With compact disc changer only—

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—

you can either listen to all of the files on

the compact discs in random order. You

can also listen to the files in a single

folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display.

To randomly play all of the files on the

compact disc:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

play all of the files on the disc in random

order. To turn off the random playback

feature, push this button again.

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

With compact disc changer only—

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the first track on

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—you can

repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the file is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the file ends, it will repeat automatically.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again to turn off the re-

peat feature.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

180

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Repeating a folder:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all of the files in the folder. When the last

file in the folder ends, the folder will re-

peat from the beginning. To turn off the

repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear a

beep. The radio will tune in the next pres-

et station up or down the band, stay there

for 5 seconds, and then move to the next

preset station. To stop scanning, push this

button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. The

radio will find the next station up or down

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”

will appear on the display and the player

will scan up or down all the tracks on the

disc you are listening to. To stop scan-

ning, push this button again. If the player

scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will

stop scanning.

The discs in the compact disc changer

can be scanned up only.

With compact disc changer only—

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“SCAN” will appear on the display and

the player will scan up or down the first

track of the next disc. To stop scanning,

push this button again. If the auto changer

has scanned all the discs, it will stop

scanning.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-

ic disc or scan the first file of all the

folder.

Scanning the files on a folder:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”

will appear on the display and the player

will scan all the files in the folder you are

listening to. To select a file, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the

disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-

mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:

Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“SCAN” will appear on the display and

the player will scan the first file of the

next folder. To select a folder, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the folders have

been scanned in one pass, normal play

resumes.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

181

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to

find the station after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the “SEEK/

TRACK” button until the number of the

track you want to listen to appears on the

display. If you want to return to the begin-

ning of the current track, quickly push the

down side of the button one time.

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file:

Push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK”

several times until the file you want to

listen to appears on the display. If you

want to return to the beginning of the

current file, push the “Ɲ” side of the but-

ton one time, quickly.

To fast forward or reverse the disc:

If you want to fast forward or reverse the

disc, push and hold it until you hear a

beep. When you release the button, the

player will resume playing.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TEXT

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display

for the MP3/WMA file that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the

MP3/WMA file is playing. The display

changes in the order from the elapsed

time to folder name to file name to album

title to track title to artist name, then back

to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an

MP3/WMA file that does not contain text

data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on

the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,

push and hold it until you hear a beep.

The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

step up the frequency. Turn the knob

counterclockwise to step down the fre-

quency.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turn

the knob counterclockwise to file down.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

182

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

"Type 2−1

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

183

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Details of specific buttons, controls and

features are described in the alphabetical

list that follows.

"Type 2−2

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

184

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1 2 3 4 5 6 (Preset buttons)

These buttons are used to preset and

tune in radio stations.

To preset a station to a button: Tune in

the desired station. (See “TUNE·FILE” or

“SEEK/TRACK”.) Push and hold down the

button until you hear a beep—this will set

the station to the button. The preset but-

ton number will appear on the display.

To recall a preset station: Push the button

for the station you want. The preset but-

ton number and station frequency will ap-

pear on the display.

This radio can store one AM and two FM

stations for each button. (The display will

show “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” when you

push “AM”, “FM1” or “FM2” button.)

(Eject button)

This button is used to eject one or all

compact discs.

To eject the current compact disc, push

and release the compact disc eject button.

To eject a specific disc, push “Ɲ” (preset

button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset button 4) until the

number of the disc you want to eject is

displayed. Push and release the eject but-

ton.

To eject all discs at a time, press and

hold the eject button until you hear a

beep. The last compact disc played before

pushing the button will be ejected first. If

the ejected disc is not removed for a long

time, the eject function will be cancelled.

(Reverse/Fast−forward button)

Push and hold “ ” (preset button 6) or

“” (preset button 5) to fast forward or

reverse within a compact disc. When you

release the button, the compact disc play-

er will resume playing.

AM·SAT (AM band and XMr Satellite

Radio∗)

Push the “AM·SAT” button to turn on the

radio and select the AM or XMr band.

“AM”, “SAT1”, “SAT2” or “SAT3” will ap-

pear on the display.

Error messages

If the satellite radio tuner malfunctions,

your audio system will display following

error messages.

“ANTENNA”:

DThe XMr antenna is not connected.

Check whether the XMr antenna cable

is attached securely.

DA short−circuit occurs in the antenna or

the surrounding antenna cable. See a

Toyota certified dealer.

“UPDATING”:

DYou have not subscribed to the XMr

Satellite Radio. The radio is being up-

dated with the latest encryption code.

Contact the XMr Satellite Radio for

subscription information. When a con-

tact is canceled, you can choose the

“CH000” and all free−to−air channels.

DThe premium channel you selected is

not authorized. Wait for about 2 sec-

onds until the radio returns to the pre-

vious channel or “CH001”. If it does

not change automatically, select anoth-

er channel. If you want to listen to the

premium channel, contact the XMr Sat-

ellite Radio.

“NO SIGNAL”: The XMr signal is too

weak at the current location. Wait until

your vehicle reaches a location with a

stronger signal.

“LOADING”: The unit is acquiring audio

or program information. Wait until the unit

has received the information.

“OFF AIR”: The channel you selected is

not broadcasting any programming. Select

another channel.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

185

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

“−−−”: The channel you selected is no

longer available. Wait for about 2 seconds

until the radio returns to the previous

channel or “CH001”. If it does not change

automatically, select another channel.

The XMr Listener Care Center is also

available on the phone, please call

1−800−967−2346 (U.S.A.) or

1−877−438−9677 (Canada).

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

AUDIO CONTROL (Tone and sound bal-

ance adjustment function)

Each time you push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob, the mode changes. To

adjust the tone and balance, turn the

knob.

Type 2−1—

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can

be turned on by turning the knob. In addi-

tion, turning the knob allows you to select

from LOW, MID, and HIGH volume and

tone settings. The ASL system automati-

cally adjusts volume and tone in accor-

dance with the driving speed. This helps

ensure an optimal listening experience

even if noise levels rise while driving.

Type 2−2—

BAS: Adjusts low−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

MID: Adjusts mid−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

TRE: Adjusts high−pitched tones. The dis-

play ranges from −5 to 5.

FAD: Adjusts the sound balance between

the front and rear speakers. The display

ranges from F7 to R7.

BAL: Adjusts the sound balance between

the right and left speakers. The display

ranges from L7 to R7.

ASL: The Automatic Sound Levelizer can

be turned on by turning the knob. The

ASL system automatically adjusts volume

and tone in accordance with ambient noise

levels. This helps ensure an optimal lis-

tening experience even when road, wind

or other ambient noise levels rise.

RSE: Vehicles with a rear seat entertain-

ment system—See “Rear seat entertain-

ment system” on page 194 in this Section.

DISC·AUX (Compact disc)

Push the “DISC·AUX” button to play a

compact disc.

When the audio system is set into com-

pact disc operation, the display shows the

track, or track and disc number currently

being played.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

The “DISC·AUX” button may also be used

to operate the DVD player when a disc is

in the DVD player. Pressing the

“DISC·AUX” button allows you to switch

between the CD player and the DVD play-

er. When the DVD player is in operation,

“RSE DVD” appears on the display.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

186

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Vehicles with AUX adapter—

To switch between CD, DVD, and AUX

(external device) modes, press the

“DISC·AUX” button. The AUX mode is only

available when AUX adapter is connected

to the system. When the AUX adapter is

in use, “AUX” will appear on the display.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

“WAIT”: The compact disc player unit

may be too hot. Allow the player to cool

down.

“ERROR 1”: The disc may be dirty, dam-

aged or inserted incorrectly (up−side

down). Clean the disc and re−insert it.

“NO DISC”: The compact disc changer of

separate unit is empty. Insert a disc.

“ERROR 3”: There is a problem inside

the system. Eject the disc or magazine.

Set the disc or magazine again.

“ERROR 4”: Over−current. Ask your

Toyota dealer to inspect.

“CD OPEN”: The compact disc changer

lid of separate unit is open. Close the

compact disc changer lid.

If “NO MUSIC” appears on the display,

it indicates that a disc with no MP3/WMA

data has been inserted. Remove the disc

from the player and insert an MP3/WMA

data disc.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

Ɲ DISC Ɯ

Use these buttons to select a disc you

want to listen to.

Push “Ɲ” (preset button 3) or “Ɯ” (preset

button 4) until the number of the disc you

want to listen to appears on the display.

FM1 FM2

Push the “FM1” or “FM2” button to turn on

the radio and select the FM band. “FM1”

or “FM2” will appear on the display. This

system allows you to set twelve FM sta-

tions, two for each of the preset button.

TYPE/FOLDER (Type/Folder up/down)

Radio

XMr Satellite Radio∗—

When you push the “Ɲ” or “Ɯ” side of

the “TYPE/FOLDER” button while receiving

a XMr channel, the current channel cate-

gory appears on the display.

When the channel category appears, push

either “Ɲ” or “Ɯ” side of the

“TYPE/FOLDER” button to switch to the

next or previous category.

∗: Use of satellite radio requires XMr

tuner and service. Contact your Toyota

dealer for details.

MP3/WMA player

To skip up or down to a different folder:

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“TYPE/FOLDER” several times until the

number of the folder you want to listen to

appears on the display.

To jump to the first file in the first folder:

Push and hold the “Ɲ” side of the button

until you hear a beep.

When playing a disc featuring both audio

data (CD−DA) and MP3/WMA files, audio

data (CD−DA) is played.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

187

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

LOAD

This button is used to load the compact

discs in the compact disc player. This

player can store up to six discs.

To load one compact disc only, quickly

push and release the button, then insert

a compact disc. After the disc is loaded,

the shutter of the slot will close.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

To load multiple compact discs, push and

hold the button (until you hear a beep

when the audio system is on). When the

indicators on both sides of the slot turn

green, insert the first compact disc. After

the disc is loaded, the shutter of the slot

will close. After a few seconds, the shut-

ter will automatically open again and the

indicators will turn green so the next disc

can be inserted. The same process can

be applied for loading the rest of the

discs. If the player is full of discs, “DISC

FULL” will appear on the display.

If no compact disc is inserted, the shutter

will close after 15 seconds.

PWR·VOL (Power and Volume)

Push “PWR·VOL” to turn the audio system

on and off. Turn “PWR·VOL” to adjust the

volume.

RAND (Random)

Compact disc player

There are two random features—you can

either listen to the tracks on one compact

disc in random order, or listen to the

tracks on all the compact discs in the

magazine in random order.

To play the tracks on one disc in random

order:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display and the player will perform the

tracks on the disc you are listening to in

random order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this button again.

To play all the tracks in the magazine in

random order:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display and the player will

perform all the tracks on all the discs in

the magazine in random order. To turn off

the random feature, push this button

again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two random playback features—

you can either listen to all of the files on

the compact discs in random order. You

can also listen to the files in a single

folder in random order.

To randomly play the files in a folder:

Quickly push and release “RAND” (preset

button 1). “ ” will appear on the

display.

To randomly play all of the files on the

compact disc:

Push and hold “RAND” (preset button 1)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will

appear on the display and the player will

play all of the files on the disc in random

order. To turn off the random playback

feature, push this button again.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

188

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

RPT (Repeat)

Compact disc player

There are two repeat features—you can

either replay a disc track or a whole com-

pact disc.

Repeating a track:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the track is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the track ends, it will automatically replay.

To turn off the repeat feature, push this

button again.

Repeating a disc:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all the tracks on the disc you are listening

to. When the disc ends, the player will

automatically go back to the first track on

the disc and replay. To turn off the repeat

feature, push this button again.

MP3/WMA player

There are two repeat features—you can

repeat a signal file or an entire folder.

Repeating a file:

Quickly push and release “RPT” (preset

button 2) while the file is playing.

“” will appear on the display. When

the file ends, it will repeat automatically.

This process will be continued until you

push the button again to turn off the re-

peat feature.

Repeating a folder:

Push and hold “RPT” (preset button 2)

until you hear a beep. “ ” will ap-

pear on the display. The player will repeat

all of the files in the folder. When the last

file in the folder ends, the folder will re-

peat from the beginning. To turn off the

repeat feature, push this button again.

SCAN

Radio

You can either scan all the frequencies on

a band or scan only the preset stations

for that band.

To scan the preset stations:

Push and hold “SCAN” until you hear a

beep. The radio will tune in the next pres-

et station up or down the band, stay there

for 5 seconds, and then move to the next

preset station. To stop scanning, push this

button again.

To scan all the frequencies:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. The

radio will find the next station up or down

the station band, stay there for 5 seconds,

and then scan again to the next station.

To stop scanning, push this button again.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

189

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Compact disc player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the tracks on a specific disc or

scan the first tracks of all the discs in the

magazine.

Scanning the tracks on a disc:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”

will appear on the display and the player

will scan up or down all the tracks on the

disc you are listening to. To stop scan-

ning, push this button again. If the player

scanned all the tracks on the disc, it will

stop scanning.

The discs in the compact disc changer of

separate unit can be scanned up only.

Scanning the first tracks of all the discs

in the magazine:

Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“SCAN” will appear on the display and

the player will scan up or down the first

track of the next disc. To stop scanning,

push this button again. If the auto changer

has scanned all the discs, it will stop

scanning.

The discs in the compact disc changer of

separate unit can be scanned up only.

MP3/WMA player

There are two scan features—you can ei-

ther scan the files in a folder on a specif-

ic disc or scan the first file of all the

folder.

Scanning the files on a folder:

Quickly push and release “SCAN”. “SCAN”

will appear on the display and the player

will scan all the files in the folder you are

listening to. To select a file, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the tracks on the

disc have been scanned in one pass, nor-

mal play resumes.

Scanning the first file of all the folders:

Push “SCAN” until you hear a beep.

“SCAN” will appear on the display and

the player will scan the first file of the

next folder. To select a folder, push the

“SCAN” again. After all the folders have

been scanned in one pass, normal play

resumes.

SEEK/TRACK (Seeking/Track up/down)

Radio

In the seek mode, the radio finds and

plays the next station up or down the

station band.

To seek the next station, quickly push and

release “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK/TRACK” button. Do this again to

find the station after that.

Compact disc player

Use this button to skip up or down to a

different track.

Push “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK/TRACK” button until the number of

the track you want to listen to appears on

the display. If you want to return to the

beginning of the current track, quickly

push the down side of the button one

time.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

While the rear DVD player is in operation,

the chapter or track can be changed by

pushing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK·TRACK” button.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

190

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

MP3/WMA player

To file up or down to a different file:

Push either side of the “SEEK/TRACK”

several times until the file you want to

listen to appears on the display. If you

want to return to the beginning of the

current file, push the “Ɲ” side of the but-

ton one time.

To fast forward or reverse the disc:

If you want to fast forward or reverse the

disc, push and hold it until you hear a

beep. When you release the button, the

player will resume playing.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

While the rear DVD player is in operation,

the chapter or track can be changed by

pushing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK·TRACK” button.

ST (Stereo reception) display

Your radio automatically changes to stereo

reception when a stereo broadcast is re-

ceived. “ST” appears on the display. If the

signal becomes weak, the radio reduces

the amount of channel separation to prev-

ent the weak signal from creating noise.

If the signal becomes extremely weak, the

radio switches from stereo to mono recep-

tion.

TEXT

Compact disc player

This button is used to change the display

for the compact disc that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the com-

pact disc is playing. The display changes

in the order from the elapsed time to disc

title to track title, then back to the

elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while a compact

disc that does not contain text data is

playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on the

display.

If the entire disc or track title does not

appear on the display, push and hold the

button until you hear a beep. The rest of

the title will appear.

MP3/WMA player

This button is used to change the display

for the MP3/WMA file that contains text

data.

To change the display, quickly push and

release the “TEXT” button while the

MP3/WMA file is playing. The display

changes in the order from the elapsed

time to folder name to file name to disc

title to track title to artist name, then back

to the elapsed time.

If this button is pushed while an

MP3/WMA file that does not contain text

data is playing, “NO TITLE” will appear on

the display.

If the entire text data is not displayed,

push and hold it until you hear a beep.

The rest of the text data will appear.

TUNE·FILE (Tuning and File up/down)

Radio

Turn the “TUNE·FILE” knob clockwise to

step up the frequency. Turn the knob

counterclockwise to step down the fre-

quency.

MP3/WMA player

Turn the knob clockwise to file up. Turn

the knob counterclockwise to file down.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

191

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

An AUX adapter is installed in the rear

console box.

By inserting a mini plug into the AUX

adapter, you can listen to music from a

portable audio device through the vehicle’s

speaker system.

To use the AUX adapter, switch to the

AUX mode (external device mode) by

pressing the “DISC·AUX” button. When the

AUX adapter is in use, “AUX” will appear

on the display. To adjust the volume, turn

the “PWR·VOL” knob.

When using a portable audio device con-

nected to the power outlet or cigarette

lighter, noise may occur during playback.

If this happens, use the power source of

the portable audio device.

If you install an audio system other than

a genuine audio system, you will not be

able to use the AUX adapter.

Some parts of the audio system can be

adjusted using the switches on the steer-

ing wheel.

Details of the specific switches, controls,

and features are described below.

1. “+ −” switch

2. “MODE” switch

3. “Ɯ Ɲ” switch

AUX adapter

Audio remote controls

(steering switches)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

192

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

“+ −” switch

Push “+” side to increase the volume. The

volume continues to increase while the

switch is being pushed.

Push “−” side to decrease the volume.

The volume continues to decrease while

the switch is being pushed.

“MODE” switch

Push “MODE” switch to select an audio

mode. Each push changes the mode se-

quentially if the desired mode is ready to

use.

To turn the audio system on, push the

“MODE” switch.

To turn the audio system off, push and

hold the “MODE” switch until the system

turns off.

“Ɯ Ɲ” switch

Radio

To select a preset station:

Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”

side of the switch. Do this again to select

the next preset station.

To seek a station:

Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

switch until you hear a beep. Do this

again to find the next station. If you push

the switch on either side during the seek

mode, seeking will be cancelled.

To step up or down the frequency, push

and hold the switch even after you hear

a beep. When you release from the

switch, the radio will begin seeking up or

down for a station. Do this again to find

the next station.

Compact disc player

To select a desired track:

Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”

side of the switch until the track you want

to listen to is set. If you want to return

to the beginning of the current track, push

the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

While the rear DVD player is in operation,

the chapter or track can be changed by

pushing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the switch.

With compact disc changer only—

To select a desired disc:

Push and hold the “Ɲ” or “Ɯ” side of the

switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this

until the disc you wish to listen to is set.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

193

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

MP3/WMA player

To select a desired file:

Quickly push and release the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ”

side of the switch until the file you want

to listen to is set. If you want to return

to the beginning of the current file, push

the “Ɲ” side of the switch once, quickly.

To select a desired folder:

Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this

until the folder you want to listen to is

set.

Vehicles with rear seat entertainment sys-

tem—

While the rear DVD player is in operation,

the file can be changed by pushing the

“Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the switch.

With compact disc changer only—

To select a desired disc:

Push and hold the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

switch until you hear a beep. Repeat this

until the disc you want to listen to is set.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

194

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The rear seat entertainment system con-

sists of the following components.

1. Front audio system∗

2. DVD player

3. Rear seat entertainment system display

4. Rear seat entertainment system

controller

5. A/V input adapter

6. Power outlet (115 VAC)

7. Audio remote control switches∗

8. Power outlet main switch

∗: For details, see “—Controls and fea-

tures” on page 176 or “Audio remote con-

trols” on page 191 in this section.

Rear seat entertainment system—

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

195

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The rear seat entertainment system is de-

signed for the rear passengers to enjoy

audio and DVD video separately from the

front audio system.

The rear seat entertainment system can

be operated when the engine switch is in

the “ACC” or “ON” position.

The rear passengers can enjoy DVD vid-

eo, audio CD, video CD, CD text, dts−CD

and MP3.

The rear seat entertainment system can

play DVD video, audio CD, video CD, CD

text, dts−CD or MP3 only when a disc is

loaded in the DVD player.

You can enjoy videos and sound when

your personal audio system is connected

to the A/V input adapter. For details, refer

to the manufacturer’s instructions.

You can enjoy the rear seat entertainment

system with a wireless headphone. The

wireless headphone can be used within

rear seat. If the signal becomes weak, the

headphone will mute. For details, refer to

the manufacturer’s instructions.

With some wireless headphone generally

available in the market, it may be difficult

to catch sound properly. Toyota recom-

mends the use of Toyota genuine wireless

headphone.

You can purchase a wireless headphone

at a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

DDo not operate a motor vehicle

while using headphones. Doing so

may cause an accident, resulting in

death or serious injury.

DWith DVD player:

Conversational speech on some

DVDs is recorded at a low volume

to emphasize the impact of sound

effects. If you adjust the volume

assuming that the conversations

represent the maximum volume lev-

el that the DVD will play, you may

be startled by louder sound effects

or when you change to a different

audio source. Be sure to adjust the

volume with this in mind.

Make sure the volume is not in-

creased, before you turn on the

headphone.

To open the display, push the lock release

button.

—Display

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

196

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Pull the display down to an easily view-

able angle (between 90_ and 125_)

NOTICE

The screen should be cleaned with a

dry soft cloth. If the screen is pushed

by hand or wiped with a hard cloth,

the surface of the screen may be

scratched.

To close, push the display up until you

hear a click.

The illumination of the screen is automati-

cally turned off when the display is

closed. However, the rear seat entertain-

ment system is not turned off.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop

while driving, close the display when

it is not in use.

NOTICE

zBenzene or alkaline solutions may

damage the coated surface of the

screen.

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not turn on the rear

seat entertainment system longer

than necessary when the engine is

not running.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

197

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The rear seat entertainment system can

be operated with the rear seat entertain-

ment system controller and buttons on the

DVD player unit. The system cannot be

operated by touching the switches on the

screen directly.

CAUTION

Do not disassemble or modify the

controller. It may cause an accident,

fire or electric shock.

NOTICE

Keep the controller away from direct

sunlight, high heat and high humidity.

These conditions could cause the

case to deform or the battery to ex-

plode or leak.

BEFORE USING THE CONTROLLER

(for new vehicle owners)

A battery is already set in the control-

ler with an insulating sheet, which pre-

vents the battery from being dis-

charged. Before using the controller,

remove the insulating sheet according

to the following procedure.

1. Remove the cover of the controller

as shown.

—Rear seat entertainment

system controller

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

198

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2. Remove the insulating sheet.

USING THE CONTROLLER

To use the rear seat entertainment sys-

tem controller, direct the signal output

portion of the controller to the signal

reception portion of the rear seat enter-

tainment system display.

The controller does not operate properly

when the signal reception portion of the

display is exposed to direct sunlight.

Block the display from direct sunlight.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop

while driving, stow the controller in

the console box or front seat side

table when it is not in use.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

199

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

NOTICE

Observe the followings, otherwise the

controller may be damaged.

zDo not drop or strongly knock the

controller against hard objects.

zDo not sit on or place heavy ob-

jects on the controller.

zDo not leave the controller exposed

to high temperatures (such as on

the instrument panel) for a long

time.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

200

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. “DVD” button

This button turns on the DVD mode.

2. “VIDEO” button

This button causes the display to use

the video signal from an external video

device.

3. “OFF” button

This button turns off the rear seat en-

tertainment system.

4. Joystick

This joystick selects a control switch,

mode switch on the screen or the

menu for the disc.

5. “ENT” button

This button inputs the selected switch

or the selected menu for the disc.

6. “FOLDER ” button

This button selects a desired folder.

7. “FOLDER ” button

This button selects a desired folder.

8. “ ” button

This button fast forwards a screen

when the DVD player is operated.

—Control buttons

"Controller

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

201

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

9. “ ” button

This button stops a screen when the

DVD player is operated.

10. “SET UP” button

This button indicates the initial set up

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

11. “MENU” button

This button indicates the menu screen

for DVD video when the DVD player is

operated.

12. “AUDIO” button

This button indicates the changing au-

dio screen when the DVD player is

operated.

13. “SUB TITLE” button

This button indicates the changing sub-

title screen when the DVD player is

operated.

14. “DISPLAY” button

This button adjusts the color, tone,

contrast and brightness of the screen.

15. “SIZE” button

This button changes the display mode

when the DVD player is operated.

16. “ANGLE” button

This button selects the angle of the

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

17. “SEARCH” button

This button indicates the title search

screen when the DVD player is oper-

ated.

18. “TOP MENU” button

This button indicates the title selection

screen for DVD video when the DVD

player is operated.

19. “ ” button

This button reverse a screen when the

DVD player is operated.

20. “"” button

This button plays or pauses a screen

when the DVD player is operated.

21. “TRACK/CHAPTER ” button

This button selects track/chapter.

22. “TRACK/CHAPTER ” button

This button selects track/chapter.

23. “OPTION” button

This button indicates the control

switches on the screen when the DVD

player is operated.

REPLACING CONTROLLER BATTERY

For replacement, use 3 AA batteries.

CAUTION

Special care should be taken to pre-

vent small children from swallowing

the removed battery or components.

NOTICE

zWhen replacing the battery, be care-

ful not to lose the components.

zReplace only with the same or

equivalent type recommended by a

Toyota dealer.

zDispose of used batteries according

to the local laws.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

202

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Replace the battery according to the fol-

lowing procedure:

1. Remove the cover of the controller as

shown.

2. Remove the discharged batteries and

put in the new batteries as shown.

Install the cover.

NOTICE

zBe sure that the positive side and

negative side of the controller bat-

tery should be faced correctly.

zDo not replace the battery with wet

hands. Water may cause rust.

zDo not touch or move any compo-

nents inside of the controller, or it

may interfere with proper operation.

zBe careful not to bend the electrode

of the controller battery insertion.

zClose the battery case securely.

After replacing the battery, check that the

controller operates properly. If the control-

ler still does not operate properly, contact

your Toyota dealer.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

203

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To turn on the system, push the “DVD”

button or “VIDEO” button.

When the “DVD” button is pushed, the

disc load screen changes to the DVD

player operation screen.

When the “VIDEO” button is pushed, the

images and sounds from the personal au-

dio machine are output.

The “DVD” button is effective only when

a disc is inserted.

To turn off the system, push the “OFF”

button.

When the front audio system is turned off,

the rear audio system and the DVD player

will be turned off simultaneously.

While the rear DVD player is in operation,

the chapter or track can be changed by

pushing the “Ɯ” or “Ɲ” side of the

“SEEK/TRACK” button.

For details, see “—Controls and features”

on page 176 in this Section.

—Turning the rear seat

entertainment system on and

off

—Operating the rear DVD

player using the front audio

system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

204

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The audio system controls in the instru-

ment panel can be used to disable the

operation of the rear seat entertainment

system by rear seat passengers.

Turning on the rear system lock prevents

small children from using the remote con-

troller or operation panel of the DVD play-

er unit to operate the rear seat entertain-

ment system during driving.

Turn the audio system on. Push the

“AUDIO CONTROL” knob repeatedly until

“RSE” is displayed. Next, turn the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob until “ON” is displayed,

and then push the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob. When the rear system lock is on and any

button is pushed on the remote controller

or the operation panel, the screen shown

above is displayed for approximately 6

seconds.

Even when the rear system lock is turned

on during play mode, the images and

sounds continue without interruption.

The condition of the rear system lock is

maintained, even when the engine switch

is turned off.

The DVD player can play audio CDs/

MP3 CDs, DVD video discs, CD texts,

dts−CDs and video CDs.

For appropriate discs for this player, see

“Audio/video system operating hints” on

page 232 in this Section.

The DVD player works when the engine

switch is in the “ACC” or “ON” position.

To turn on the DVD player, a disc must

be loaded in the player.

To turn off the player, eject the disc.

Error messages

If the player malfunctions, your audio sys-

tem will display following error messages.

If “DISC CHECK” appears on the

screen: It indicates that the disc is dirty,

damaged or it was inserted upside down.

Clean the disc or insert it correctly.

If “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on

the screen: It indicates that the DVD re-

gion code is not set properly.

If “DVD ERROR” appears on the

screen: There is a problem inside the

player. Eject the disc. Set the disc again.

If the malfunction still exists, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer.

—Rear system lock —DVD player

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

205

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

INSERTING THE DISC

Insert a disc into the slot with the label

side up.

“DISC” indicator light turns on while the

disc is loaded.

If the label faces down, the disc cannot

be played. In this case, “DISC CHECK”

and disc number appear on the screen.

If a disc which is not playable is inserted,

“DISC CHECK” will also appear on the

screen. For appropriate discs for this play-

er, see “Audio/video system operating

hints” on page 232 in this Section.

The player will play the track or chapter,

and it will play from the beginning of the

track or chapter again after it reaches the

end.

NOTICE

Never try to disassemble or oil any

part of the DVD player. Do not insert

anything other than a disc into the

slot.

8 cm (3 in.) compact disc singles

Your compact disc player needs an adap-

tor to play compact disc singles. Compact

disc singles are about 8 cm (3 in.) in

diameter−smaller than standard discs.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

206

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

EJECTING THE DISC

Push the “ ” button.

The DVD player can be operated with the

controller buttons directly.

1. “DVD” button

2. “SET UP” button

3. “MENU” button

4. “AUDIO” button

5. “SUB TITLE” button

6. “ANGLE” button

7. “SIZE” button

8. “SEARCH” button

9. “TOP MENU” button

10. “"”, “ ”, “AA” and “""” buttons

The player can also be operated with the

switches on the screen.

To operate the switches on the screen,

select the switch by the joystick and push

the “ENT” button. You cannot select the

switches on the screen by touching them

directly.

When the switch is selected by the joys-

tick, the outline of the switch changes to

blue. Push the “ENT” button, and the

switch will be highlighted in green.

—DVD player operation

switches

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

207

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

TURNING THE OPERATION SWITCHES

ON AND OFF

To turn on the operation switches, push

the “OPTION” button on the controller.

Top page (DVD video operation switch)

Second page (DVD video operation

switch)

Top page (video CD)

Second page (video CD)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

208

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

There are operation switches on the “Page

1” and “Page 2” screens.

To change the screen, push the “Page 1”

or “Page 2” switch on the screen.

If “ ” appears on the screen when

you select a switch, it indicates that

the switch cannot work.

On the screen

Controller

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

209

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To turn off the switches on the screen,

push the “OPTION” button on the control-

ler once again or push the “Hide Buttons”

on the screen.

—DVD player operation

NOTE: The playback condition of some

DVD video discs may be determined by

the DVD video software producer. This

DVD player plays discs as the software

producer intended. Therefore, some

functions may not work properly. Be

sure to read the instruction manual for

the DVD video disc separately provided.

For detailed information about DVD

video discs, see “—DVD video disc

information” on page 229 in this

Section.

Precautions for DVD video discs

When recording on a DVD video, video

CD or audio tracks may not record in

some cases while the menu is displayed.

As audio will not play in this case, verify

that the video tracks are playing and then

activate playback.

The title/chapter number and playback

time display may not appear while playing

back certain DVD video discs.

CAUTION

Conversational speech on some DVDs

is recorded at a low volume to em-

phasize the impact of sound effects.

If you adjust the volume assuming

that the conversations represent the

maximum volume level available for

the DVD, you may be startled by

louder sound effects or when you

change to a different audio source.

Loud sounds may have a significant

impact on the human body or pose a

driving hazard. Keep this in mind

when you adjust the volume.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

210

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

TURNING THE MENU SCREEN FOR THE

DISC ON OR OFF

To turn on the menu screen for the disc,

push the “Top Menu” or the “Menu” switch

on the screen. You can also turn on the

menu screen by pushing the “MENU” or

“TOP MENU” button on the controller.

For the operation of the menu screen, see

the separate manual for the DVD disc.

You can select the menu for the disc by

the joystick and the “ENT” button on the

controller.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

211

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATING THE “"”, “ ”, “AA”

AND “""” SWITCHES/BUTTONS

“"” switch/button: Push this switch/but-

ton to pause the disc or to cancel the

pause and return to normal playing.

“” switch/button: This switch/button

stops a screen when the DVD player is

operated.

“AA” and “""” switches/buttons: Push

and hold the “AA” or “""” switch/button

to fast forward or reverse. When you re-

lease the switch/button, the DVD player

will resume playing.

Push the “""” switch/button while paus-

ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion

video replay.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

212

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

SKIPPING TO THE PREDETERMINED

SCREEN

To skip to the predetermined screen, push

the “Return” switch. The DVD player starts

playing from the beginning of the predeter-

mined screen.

For further details of the predetermined

screen, see the separate manual for the

DVD disc.

SELECTING THE TITLE

To display the searching title screen, push

the “Search” switch on the screen. You

can also display the screen by pushing

the “SEARCH” button on the controller.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

213

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Select the title number by using the

joystick and push the “ENT” button to

enter the number. The player starts play-

ing disc for that title number. The selected

title number will appear on the screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

menu screen.

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

Push the “Sub Title” switch on the screen,

and then the changing subtitle language

screen will appear. You can also display

the screen by pushing the “SUB TITLE”

button on the controller.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

214

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Each time you push the “Sub Title” switch,

another language stored on the disc is

selected.

To turn off the subtitles, push the “Hide

Buttons” switch.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

The selected subtitle language will appear

on the screen.

CHANGING AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio” switch on the screen

and then the changing audio language

screen will appear. You can also display

the screen by pushing the “AUDIO” button

on the controller.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

215

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Each time you push the “Audio” switch,

another language stored on the disc is

selected.

To turn off the audio language screen,

push the “Hide Buttons” switch.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

The selected audio language will appear

on the screen.

CHANGING ANGLE SCREEN

Push the “Angle” switch on the screen,

and then the changing angle screen will

appear. You can also display the screen

by pushing the “ANGLE” button on the

controller.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

216

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The angle can be selected for discs that

are multi−angle compatible when the “ ”

mark appears on the screen. Each time

you push the “Angle” switch, the angle

changes. The angle number which you

can select will appear on the screen.

To turn off the screen, push the “Hide

Buttons” switch.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

previous screen.

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen,

and then the initial setting screen will ap-

pear. You can also display the screen by

pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-

troller. You can change the initial setting.

After the setting is done, the player plays

from the beginning of the chapter or the

track.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

217

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Setup Menu screen

There are initial setting switches on the

“Setup Menu” screen.

After you change the initial setting, push

the “Enter” switch. The initial setting

switch will be turned off and return to the

picture previously.

When the “Default” switch is pushed, all

menus are initialized.

CHANGING THE AUDIO LANGUAGE

Push the “Audio Language” switch on the

“Setup Menu” and the “Select Audio

Lang.” screen appears.

Select the language you want to hear by

pushing the appropriate switch on the

screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find the language you want

to hear, push the “Others” switch. The

“Enter Audio Lang. Code” screen will ap-

pear.

To select an audio language, use the joys-

tick to enter the appropriate 4−digit lan-

guage code. For details of the language

codes, see the language code list.

If a code which is not on the list is en-

tered and the “ENT” button is pushed, the

“Incorrect Code” screen will appear. Enter

the code of the language you want to hear

again.

To return to the “Select Audio Lang.”

screen, push the “Back” switch.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

218

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CHANGING THE SUBTITLE LANGUAGE

To display the “Select Subtitle Lang.”

screen, push the “Subtitle Language”

switch on the “Setup Menu” screen.

Select the language you want to read by

pushing the appropriate switch on the

screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find the language you want

to read, push the “Others” switch. The

“Enter Subtitle Lang. Code” screen will

appear.

To enter the code of the language you

want to read, use the joystick to enter the

appropriate 4−digit language code. For de-

tails about the language codes, see the

language code list.

Push the “ENT” button on the controller.

If numbers which are not on the list are

entered and the “ENT” button is pushed,

the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.

Enter the language code you want to read

again.

To return to the “Select Subtitle Lang.”

screen, push the “Back” switch on the

screen.

CHANGING THE DVD LANGUAGE

To display the “Select DVD Lang.” screen,

push the “DVD Language” switch on the

“Setup Menu” screen.

Select the language you want to read on

the screen.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

If you cannot find a language you want to

read, push the “Others” switch. The “Enter

DVD Lang. Code” screen will appear.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

219

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To enter the code of the language you

want to read, use the joystick to enter the

appropriate 4−digit language code. For de-

tails about the language codes, see the

language code list.

Push the “ENT” button on the controller.

If numbers which are not on the list are

entered and the “ENT” button is pushed,

the “Incorrect code” screen will appear.

Enter the language code you want to read

again.

To return to the “Select DVD Lang.”

screen, push the “Back” switch on the

screen.

TURNING THE ANGLE MARK ON OR

OFF

The angle mark can be turned on for

discs that are multi−angle compatible.

Each time you push the “Angle Mark”

switch on the screen, the angle mark

turns on or off alternately.

SETTING LEVEL OF VIEWER

RESTRICTIONS

You can restrict the play back screen by

setting the viewer restrictions. You can

prevent the restriction with a password.

Some discs do not supply a restriction.

To set the level of viewer restriction, push

the “Parental Lock” switch on the “Setup

Menu” screen. The “Enter Personal Code”

screen will appear.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

220

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Enter the password and push the “ENT”

button. The “Select Restriction Level”

screen will appear.

You cannot change the setting without in-

putting the password. When you forget or

change the password, push the “A” side

of the joystick ten times to initialize the

password.

To return to the “Setup Menu” screen,

push the “Back” switch.

Push a parental level (1—8). The smaller

the level number, the stricter the age limit.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

“Setup Menu” screen.

SETTING THE DISPLAY MODE

Pushing the “SIZE” button on the control-

ler causes the display modes to change

sequentially as follows:

Normal Wide1 Wide2

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

221

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

LANGUAGE CODE LIST

Code Language

1001 Japanese

0514 English

0618 French

0405 German

0920 Italian

0519 Spanish

2608 Chinese

1412 Dutch

1620 Portuguese

1922 Swedish

1821 Russian

1115 Korean

0512 Greek

0101 Afar

0102 Abkhazian

0106 Afrikaans

0113 Amharic

0118 Arabic

0119 Assamese

0125 Aymara

0126 Azerbaijani

0201 Bashkir

0205 Byelorussian

0207 Bulgarian

0208 Bihari

0209 Bislama

0214 Bengali

0215 Tibetan

0218 Breton

0301 Catalan

0315 Corsican

0319 Czech

0325 Welsh

0401 Danish

0426 Bhutani

0515 Esperanto

0520 Estonian

0521 Basque

0601 Persian

0609 Finnish

0610 Fiji

0615 Faroese

0625 Frisian

0701 Irish

0704 Scots−Gaelic

0712 Galician

0714 Guarani

0721 Gujarati

0801 Hausa

0809 Hindi

0818 Croatian

0821 Hungarian

0825 Armenian

0901 Interlingua

0905 Interlingue

0911 Inupiak

0914 Indonesian

0919 Icelandic

0923 Hebrew

1009 Yiddish

1023 Javanese

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

222

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1101 Georgian

1111 Kazakh

1112 Greenlandic

1113 Cambodian

1114 Kannada

1119 Kashmiri

1121 Kurdish

1125 Kirghiz

1201 Latin

1214 Lingala

1215 Laothian

1220 Lithuanian

1222 Latvian

1307 Malagasy

1309 Maori

1311 Macedonian

1312 Malayalam

1314 Mongolian

1315 Moldavian

1318 Marathi

1319 Malay

1320 Maltese

1325 Burmese

1401 Nauru

1405 Nepali

1415 Norwegian

1503 Occitan

1513 (Afan) Oromo

1518 Oriya

1601 Punjabi

1612 Polish

1619 Pashto, Pushto

1721 Quechua

1813 Rhaeto−Romance

1814 Kirundi

1815 Romanian

1823 Kinyarwanda

1901 Sanskrit

1904 Sindhi

1907 Sangho

1908 Serbo−Croatian

1909 Sinhalese

1911 Slovak

1912 Slovenian

1913 Samoan

1914 Shona

1915 Somali

1917 Albanian

1918 Serbian

1919 Siswati

1920 Sesotho

1921 Sundanese

1923 Swahili

2001 Ta mi l

2005 Telugu

2007 Tajik

2008 Thai

2009 Tigrinya

2011 Turkmen

2012 Tagalog

2014 Setswana

2015 Tonga

2018 Turkish

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

223

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2019 Tsonga

2020 Ta t ar

2023 Twi

2111 Ukrainian

2118 Urdu

2126 Uzbek

2209 Vietnamese

2215 Volapük

2315 Wolof

2408 Xhosa

2515 Yoruba

2621 Zulu

SELECTING THE CHAPTER/TRACK

To select the chapter/track, push the

“CHAPTER/TRACK ” button or

“CHAPTER/TRACK ” button on the

controller until the number of the

chapter/track you want to select appears

on the screen.

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-

ton on the controller. The status screen

will appear on the screen.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

224

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

SELECTING THE DISC MENU NUMBER

(video CD only)

Push the “Select Number” switch and then

the disc menu number search screen will

appear. You can also display the screen

by pushing the “SEARCH” button on the

controller.

Enter the disc menu number by using the

joystick and push the “ENT” button. The

player starts playing the disc from the

entered disc menu number. The entered

disc menu number will appear on the

screen.

Push the “Back” switch to return to the

menu screen.

OPERATING THE “"”, “AA” AND

“""” SWITCHES (video CD only)

“"” switch: Push this switch to pause

the disc or to cancel the pause and return

to normal playing.

“AA” and “""” switches: Push this

switch to fast forward or reverse. If you

want to return to the beginning of the

current track, release the switch.

Video CD only—

Push the “""” switch/button while paus-

ing, the DVD video plays the slow−motion

video replay.

—DVD player operation (video

CD/audio CD/CD text/MP3)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

225

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

TURNING ON THE DISC MENU (video

CD only)

Push the “Return” switch to turn on the

menu screen for the disc.

For the operation of the menu screen, see

the manual for the video CD.

CHANGING MENU PAGE OR TRACK

(video CD only)

Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”

switch while the disc menu is displayed.

The next or previous page will appear on

the screen.

Push the “Next Menu” or “Prev. Menu”

switch while the player is playing video.

The next or previous track will be

searched and played.

CHANGING A MULTIPLEX

TRANSMISSION (video CD only)

Push the “Main/Sub” switch to change a

multiplex transmission. The mode changes

from Main/Sub to Main to Sub and back

to Main/Sub by pushing the “Main/Sub”

switch.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

226

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING (video

CD only)

Push the “Set Up” switch on the screen

and then the initial setting screen will ap-

pear. You can also display the screen by

pushing the “SET UP” button on the con-

troller. You can change the initial setting.

(See “CHANGING THE INITIAL SETTING”

on page 216 in this Section for details.)

After the setting is done, the player plays

from the beginning of the chapter or the

track.

CD Text

CD MP3

USING THE CONTROL SCREEN

When playing a disc, push the “DVD” but-

ton on the controller. The control screen

will appear on the screen.

CD text only—

The disc title and track title will appear on

the screen when pushing the “DVD” but-

ton.

Details of the specific switches, controls

and features are described below.

1. “RPT” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RPT” switch while the track

is playing. When the track ends, it will

automatically replay. To turn off the re-

peat feature, push this switch again.

2. “RAND” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “RAND” switch. The player

will play the tracks on the disc in ran-

dom order. To turn off the random fea-

ture, push this switch again.

3. “SCAN” switch (audio CD and CD text)

Push the “SCAN” switch. The player

will scan all the tracks on the disc. To

stop scanning, push this switch again.

When the player has scanned all the

tracks on the disc, it will stop scan-

ning.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

227

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

MP3 only—

Folder and file names will appear on the

screen when the “DVD” button is pushed.

The details of the specific switches, con-

trols, and features are described below.

1. “RPT” switch

When the “RPT” switch is pushed while

a track is played, the track file will be

played repeatedly until the switch is

pushed again. When the switch is

pushed for at least 0.8 seconds, all the

files in a folder will be played repeat-

edly. To turn off repeat play mode,

push the switch again.

2. “RAND” switch

When the “RAND” switch is pushed,

the files in a current folder will be

played in random order. When the

switch is pushed for at least 0.8 sec-

onds, all the files in the disk will be

played in random. To turn off random

play mode, push the switch again.

3. “SCAN” switch

When the “SCAN” switch is pushed, all

the files in a current folder will be

scanned. Only the first 10 seconds of

each file are played sequentially until

all the files are scanned. When the

switch is pushed for at least 0.8 sec-

onds, the first 10 seconds of each ini-

tial file of all the folders in the disk will

be played sequentially until the entire

initial files are scanned. To stop scan-

ning, push the switch again.

4. “FLD ” switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial

file of the next folder will be played.

5. “ FLD” switch

When the switch is pushed, the initial

file of the previous folder will be

played.

6. “DETAIL” switch

When the switch is pushed while a

track is played, the detailed file infor-

mation of the track will be displayed.

You can adjust the color, contrast, tone

and brightness of the screen.

Push the “DISPLAY” button on the control-

ler and the “Display” screen will appear.

The screen may turn purple to deflect the

sunlight. This is not a malfunction.

—Screen adjustment

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

228

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Operate the joystick up and down to se-

lect Brightness, Contrast, Tone, or Color

and left and right to make adjustments.

− or “Red” + or

“Green”

Brightness Darkens Brightens

Contrast Weakens

the contrast

Strengthens

the contrast

Tone Weakens

the tone

Strengthens

the tone

Color

Strengthens

the red

color

Strengthens

the green

color

After adjusting the screen, push the “ENT”

button or “DISPLAY” button to return to

the previous screen.

The audio machine connected to the input

terminal adapter can be played in the

video mode.

To select the video mode, push the

“VIDEO” button on the controller.

—Selecting the video mode

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

229

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DVD PLAYER AND DVD VIDEO DISCS

This DVD player conforms to NTSC col-

or TV formats. DVD video discs con-

forming to other formats such as PAL

or SECAM cannot be used.

Region codes: Some DVD video discs

have a region code indicating where you

can use. If the DVD video disc is not

labeled “ALL” or “1”, you cannot use it in

this DVD player. If you attempt to play an

inappropriate DVD video disc in this play-

er, “REGION CODE ERROR” appears on

the screen. Even if the DVD video disc

does not have a region code, in some

cases you cannot use it.

Marks shown on DVD video discs:

Indicates NTSC format

of color TV.

Indicates the number

of audio tracks.

Indicates the number

of language subtitles.

Indicates the number

of angles.

Indicates the screen

to be selected.

Wide screen: 16:9

Standard: 4:3

Indicates regions in

which this video disc

can be played.

ALL: all countries

Number: region code

DVD VIDEO DISC GLOSSARY

DVD video discs: Digital Versatile Disc

that holds video. DVD video discs have

adopted “MPEG2”, one of the world stan-

dards of digital compression technologies.

The picture data is compressed by 1/40

on average and stored. Variable rate en-

coded technology in which the volume of

data assigned to the picture is changed

depending on the picture format has also

been adopted. Audio data is stored using

PCM and Dolby digital, which enables

higher quality of sound. Furthermore, mul-

ti−angle and multi−language features will

also help you enjoy the more advanced

technology of DVD video.

Viewer restrictions: This feature limits

what can be viewed in conformity with the

level of restrictions of the country. The

level of restrictions varies depending on

the DVD video disc. Some DVD video

discs cannot be played at all, or violent

scenes are skipped or replaced with other

scenes.

Level 1: DVD video discs for children can

be played.

Level 2—7: DVD video discs for children

and G−rated movies can be played.

—DVD video disc information

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

230

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Level 8: All types of DVD video discs can

be played.

Multi−angle feature: You can enjoy the

same scene at different angles.

Multi−language feature: You can select

the language of the subtitles and audio.

Region codes: Region codes are provided

on DVD players and DVD discs. If the

DVD video disc does not have the same

region code as the DVD player, you can-

not play the disc on the DVD player. For

region codes, see page 229.

Audio: This DVD player can play liner

PCM, Dolby digital, dts and MPEG audio

format DVD. Other decoded type cannot

be played.

Title and chapter: Video and audio pro-

grams stored on DVD video discs are di-

vided in parts by title and chapter.

Title: The largest unit of the video and

audio programs stored on DVD video

discs. Usually, one piece of a movie, one

album, or one audio program is assigned

as a title.

Chapter: A unit smaller than a title. A title

comprises plural chapters.

Manufactured under license from Dolby

Laboratories. “Dolby”, “Pro Logic”, and

the double−D symbol are trademarks of

Dolby Laboratories. Confidential unpub-

lished works.

E1992−1997 Dolby Laboratories. All

rights reserved.

“dts” is a trademark of Digital Theater

Systems, Inc.

The rear entertainment system plays vid-

eos and sound when an audio−video

equipment is connected to the A/V input

adapter. For details, refer to the manufac-

turer’s instructions.

—A/V input adapter

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

231

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To use the adapter, open the cover.

The A/V input adapter is composed of 3

input adapters.

Yellow: Image input adapter

Red: Audio input adapter

White: Audio input adapter

NOTICE

Close the cover when the A/V input

adapter is not in use. Inserting a for-

eign object other than the appropriate

plug may cause electrical failure or

short circuit.

This power outlet is designed for use as

a power supply for the audio device con-

nected to the A/V input adapter.

The engine switch must be in the “ON”

position for the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-

let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to

use an appliance that requires more than

115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit

will activate and cut the power supply.

The power supply will restart automatically

when you use an appliance that operates

within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

To use the power outlet, push the main

switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn

the power outlet off. When the power out-

let is not in use, make sure that the main

switch is turned off.

—Power outlet

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

232

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

NOTICE

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlet longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

zClose the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use. Inserting

a foreign object other than the ap-

propriate plug that fits the outlet

may cause electrical failure or short

circuit.

The power outlet is not designed for

the following electric appliances even if

their power consumption is under 115

VAC/100W. These appliances may not

operate properly.

DAppliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,

compressor−driven refrigerators, electric

pumps, electric tools, etc.

DMeasuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measur-

ing instruments, etc.

DOther appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−

controlled electric blankets, touch sen-

sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause

radio noise.

NOTICE

To ensure correct audio/video system

operation:

zBe careful not to spill beverages

over the audio system.

zDo not put anything other than a

compact disc into the slot.

zDo not put anything other than a

DVD video, video CD, dts−CD or au-

dio CD into the DVD player.

zThe use of a cellular phone inside

or near the vehicle may cause a

noise from the speakers of the au-

dio system which you are listening

to. However, this does not indicate

a malfunction.

RADIO RECEPTION

Usually, a problem with radio reception

does not mean there is a problem with

your radio—it is just the normal result of

conditions outside the vehicle.

Audio/video system operating

hints

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

233

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

For example, nearby buildings and terrain

can interfere with FM reception. Power

lines or telephone wires can interfere with

AM signals. And of course, radio signals

have a limited range. The farther you are

from a station, the weaker its signal will

be. In addition, reception conditions

change constantly as your vehicle moves.

Here are some common reception prob-

lems that probably do not indicate a prob-

lem with your radio:

Fading and drifting stations—Generally, the

effective range of FM is about 40 km (25

miles). Once outside this range, you may

notice fading and drifting, which increase

with the distance from the radio transmit-

ter. They are often accompanied by distor-

tion.

Multi−path—FM signals are reflective,

making it possible for two signals to reach

your antenna at the same time. If this

happens, the signals will cancel each oth-

er out, causing a momentary flutter or

loss of reception.

Static and fluttering—These occur when

signals are blocked by buildings, trees, or

other large objects. Increasing the bass

level may reduce static and fluttering.

Station swapping—If the FM signal you

are listening to is interrupted or weak-

ened, and there is another strong station

nearby on the FM band, your radio may

tune in the second station until the origi-

nal signal can be picked up again.

Fading—AM broadcasts are reflected by

the upper atmosphere–especially at night.

These reflected signals can interfere with

those received directly from the radio sta-

tion, causing the radio station to sound

alternately strong and weak.

Station interference—When a reflected sig-

nal and a signal received directly from a

radio station are very nearly the same

frequency, they can interfere with each

other, making it difficult to hear the broad-

cast.

Static—AM is easily affected by external

sources of electrical noise, such as high

tension power lines, lightening, or electri-

cal motors. This results in static.

FCC ID: BABBT010A

NOTE: This device complies with Part

15 of the FCC Rules. Operation is sub-

ject to the following two conditions, (1)

This device may not cause harmful in-

terference and (2) This device must ac-

cept any interference received, including

interference that may cause undesired

operation.

CAUTION

FCC WARNING:

Changes or modifications in construc-

tion not expressly approved by the

party responsible for compliance

could void the user’s authority to op-

erate the equipment.

Radio frequently exposure. This de-

vice is approved for Mobile Applica-

tion only and, to comply with applica-

ble FCC radio frequency exposure

regulations, must be used with a dis-

tance of at least 7.9in. (20cm) be-

tween the antenna and the body of

any person at all time during use.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

234

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

For vehicles sold in the U.S.A. (and

Canada)—

Part 15 of the FCC Rules

FCC Warning:

Any unauthorized changes or modifi-

cations to this equipment will void

the user’s authority to operate this

device.

Laser products

DDo not take this unit apart or at-

tempt to make any changes your-

self. This is an intricate unit that

uses a laser pickup to retrieve in-

formation from the surface of com-

pact discs. The laser is carefully

shielded so that its rays remain in-

side the cabinet. Therefore, never

try to disassemble the player or al-

ter any of its parts since you may

be exposed to laser rays and dan-

gerous voltages.

DThis product utilizes a laser. Use of

controls or adjustments or perfor-

mance of procedures other than

those specified herein may result in

hazardous radiation exposure.

CARING FOR YOUR COMPACT DISC

PLAYER, DVD PLAYER AND DISCS

DExtremely high temperatures can keep

your compact disc player and DVD

player from working. On hot days, use

the air conditioning to cool the vehicle

interior before you use the players.

DBumpy roads or other vibrations may

make your compact disc player and

DVD player skip.

DIf moisture gets into your compact disc

player and DVD player, the players

may not play even though they appear

to be working. Remove the disc from

the player and wait until it dries.

CAUTION

Compact disc players and DVD play-

ers use an invisible laser beam which

could cause hazardous radiation ex-

posure if directed outside the unit. Be

sure to operate the players correctly.

Compact disc player

Audio CDs

DUse only compact discs marked as

shown above. The following products

may not be playable on your compact

disc player.

SACD

dts−CD

Copy−protected CD

CD−ROM

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

235

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DVD player

Audio CDs

DVD video

discs

Video CDs

DUse only discs marked as shown

above. The following products may not

be playable on your DVD player.

SACD

Copy−protected CD

CD−R (CD−Recordable)

CD−RW (CD−Re−writable)

CD−ROM

DVD−R

DVD+R

DVD+RW

DVD−RW

DVD−ROM

DVD−RAM

Special shaped discs

Transparent/translucent discs

Low quality discs

Labeled discs

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

236

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

NOTICE

zDo not use special shaped, trans-

parent/translucent, low quality or la-

beled discs such as those shown in

the illustrations. The use of such

discs may damage the player or

changer, or it may be impossible to

eject the disc.

zThis system is not designed for use

of Dual Disc. Do not use Dual Disc

because it may cause damage to

the player or changer.

Correct Wrong

DHandle the discs carefully, especially

when you are inserting them. Hold

them on the edge and do not bend

them. Avoid getting fingerprints on

them, particularly on the shiny side.

DDirt, scratches, warping, pin holes, or

other disc damage could cause the

player to skip or to repeat a section of

a chapter or track. (To see a pin hole,

hold the disc up to the light.)

DRemove discs from the compact disc

player when you are not playing them.

Store them in their plastic cases away

from moisture, heat, and direct sun-

light.

To clean a disc: Wipe it with a soft, lint−

free cloth that has been dampened with

water. Wipe in a straight line from the

center to the edge of the disc (not in

circles). Dry it with another soft, lint−free

cloth. Do not use a conventional record

cleaner or anti−static device.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

237

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

MP3/WMA FILES

DMP3 (MPEG Audio Layer 3) and WMA

(Windows Media Audio) are audio com-

pression standards.

DThe MP3/WMA player can play MP3

and WMA files on CD−ROM, CD−R and

CD−RW discs.

The unit can play disc recordings com-

patible with ISO 9660 level 1 and level

2 and with the Romeo and Joliet file

system.

DWhen naming an MP3 or WMA file,

add the appropriate file extension (.mp3

or .wma).

DThe MP3/WMA player plays back files

with .mp3 or .wma file extensions as

MP3 or WMA files. To prevent noise

and playback errors, use the appropri-

ate file extensions.

DMulti−session compatible CDs can also

be played.

DMP3 files are compatible with the ID3

Tag Ver. 1.0, Ver. 1.1, Ver. 2.2, and

Ver. 2.3 formats. The unit cannot dis-

play disc title, track title and artist

name in other formats.

DWMA files can contain a WMA tag that

is used in the same way as an ID3

tag. WMA tags carry information such

as track title, artist name.

DThe emphasis function is available only

when playing MP3/WMA files recorded

at 32, 44.1 and 48 kHz. (The system

can play MP3 files with sampling fre-

quencies of 16, 22.05, and 24 kHz.

However, the emphasis function is not

available for files recorded at these fre-

quencies.)

DThe sound quality of MP3/WMA files

generally improves with higher bit

rates. In order to achieve a reasonable

level of sound quality, discs recorded

with a bit rate of at least 128 kbps are

recommended.

Playable bit rates

MP3 files:

MPEG1 LAYER3—64 to 320 kbps

MPEG2 LSF LAYER3—64 to 160 kbps

WMA files:

Ver. 7, 8 CBR—48 to 192 kbps

Ver. 9 CBR—48 to 320 kbps

DThe MP3/WMA player does not play

back MP3/WMA files from discs record-

er using packet write data transfer

(UDF format). Discs should be re-

corded using “pre−mastering” software

rather than packet−write software.

DM3u playlists are not compatible with

the audio player.

DMP3i (MP3 interactive) and MP3PRO

formats are not compatible with the au-

dio player.

DThe MP3 player is compatible with

VBR (Variable Bit Rate).

DWhen playing back files recorded as

VBR (Variable Bit Rate) files, the play

time will not be correctly displayed if

fast−forward or reverse operations are

used.

DIt is not possible to check folders that

do not include MP3/WMA files.

DMP3/WMA files in folders up to 8 lev-

els deep can be played. However, the

start of playback may be delayed when

using discs containing numerous levels

of folders. For this reason, we recom-

mend creating discs with no more than

two levels of folders.

DIt is possible to play up to 192 folders

or 255 files on one disc.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

238

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

001.mp3

002.wma

Folder 1

003.mp3

Folder 2

004.mp3

005.wma

Folder 3

006.mp3

DThe play order of the compact disc

with the structure shown on the left is

as follows:

CD−R and CD−RW discs

DCD−R/CD−RW discs that have not been

subject to the “finalizing process” (a

process that allows discs to be played

on a conventional CD player) cannot

be played.

DIt may not be possible to play

CD−R/CD−RW discs recorded on a mu-

sic CD recorder or a personal comput-

er because of disc characteristics,

scratches or dirt on the disc, or dirt,

condensation, etc. on the lens of the

unit.

DIt may not be possible to play discs

recorded on a personal computer de-

pending on the application settings and

the environment. Record with the cor-

rect format. (For details, contact the

appropriate application manufacturers of

the applications.)

DCD−R/CD−RW discs may be damaged

by direct exposure to sunlight, high

temperatures or other storage condi-

tions. The unit may be unable to play

some damaged discs.

DIf you insert a CD−RW disc into the

MP3/WMA player, playback will begin

more slowly than with a conventional

CD or CD−R disc.

DRecordings on CD−R/CD−RW cannot

be played using the DDCD (Double

Density CD) system.

TERMS

Packet write—

This is a general term that describes the

process of writing data on−demand to

CD−R, etc., in the same way that data is

written to floppy or hard discs.

ID3 Tag—

This is a method of embedding track−re-

lated information in an MP3 file. This em-

bedded information can include the track

title, the artist’s name, the album title, the

music genre, the year of production, com-

ments and other data. The contents can

be freely edited using software with ID3

tag editing functions. Although the tags

are restricted to the number of characters,

the information can be viewed when the

track is played back.

WMA Tag—

WMA files can contain a WMA tag that is

used in the same way as an ID3 tag.

WMA tags carry information such as track

title, artist name.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

239

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

ISO 9660 format—

This is the international standard for the

formatting of CD−ROM folders and files.

For the ISO 9660 format, there are two

levels of regulations.

Level 1:

The file name is in 8.3 format (8 charac-

ter file names, with a 3 character file

extension. File names must be composed

of one−byte capital letters and numbers.

The “_” symbol may also be included.)

Level 2:

The file name can have up to 31 charac-

ters (including the separation mark “.” and

file extension). Each folder must contain

fewer than 8 hierarchies.

m3u—

Playlists created using “WINAMP” software

have a playlist file extension (.m3u).

MP3—

MP3 is an audio compression standard

determined by a working group (MPEG) of

the ISO (International Standard Organiza-

tion). MP3 compresses audio data to

about 1/10 the size of that on convention-

al discs.

WMA—

WMA (Windows Media Audio) is an audio

compression format developed by

Microsoft. It compresses files into a size

smaller than that of MP3 files. The decod-

ing formats for WMA files are Ver. 7, 8,

and 9.

Phone Setup (see page 245)

DPair phone

To use the hands−free system, you

need to register your phone in the sys-

tem.

DChange name

The registered phone names can be

changed.

DDelete

The registered phones can be deleted.

DList phones

The registered phone names can be

checked.

DSelect phone

The registered phones can be selected.

DSet passkey

The passkey can be changed.

Hands−free phone system—

—Reference

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

240

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Security (see page 250)

DSet PIN

The PIN can be set or changed.

DPhone book lock

The phone book can be locked.

DPhone book unlock

The locked phone book can be un-

locked.

System Setup (see page 254)

DAdjust Guidance Volume

Guidance volume can be adjusted.

DInitialize

Phone Book (see page 254)

DAdd Entry

Phone numbers and voice tags can be

registered.

DChange Name

The registered names can be changed.

DDelete Entry

The registered names can be deleted.

DDelete Speed Dial

The registered speed dial can be de-

leted.

DList names

The registered names can be checked.

DSet Speed Dial

Speed dials can be set

Redial (see page 262)

Callback (see page 263)

Making a phone call (see page 265)

Receiving a phone call (see page 267)

Talking on the phone (see page 268)

—Some basics

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

241

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

This system supports Bluetoothr, a

wireless system that allows you to

make or receive calls without taking

your hands from the steering wheel and

without using cables to connect the

phone and system.

The phone must be paired to the system

before using the hands−free feature. If

your cellular phone does not support

Bluetoothr, this system will not function.

CAUTION

While you are driving, do not use a

cellular phone or connect the

Bluetoothr phone.

NOTICE

Do not leave your cellular phone in

the car. The temperature indoor may

be high and damage the phone.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing conditions and places:

DThe cellular phone is turned off.

DThe current position is outside the

communication area.

DThe cellular phone is not connected.

DThe cellular phone has a low battery.

DThe cellular phone is located behind

the seat or in the glove box and con-

sole box.

DThe cellular phone touches or is cov-

ered with metal materials.

This system supports the following ser-

vice.

DHFP (Hands Free Profile) Ver.1.0

DOPP (Object Push Profile) Ver.1.1

If your cellular phone does not support

HFP, you cannot enter the Bluetoothr

phone, and take OPP service individually.

Bluetooth is a trademark owned by

Bluetooth SIG. Inc.

When transferring ownership of the ve-

hicle:

A lot of personal data is registered

when you use the hands−free system.

When transferring ownership of the ve-

hicle, initialize the system.

If you initialize it, the former state will

never come back again. Pay much atten-

tion when initializing the data.

You can initialize the following data in the

system.

DPhone book data

DDialed numbers and received calls

DSpeed dial

DBluetoothr phone data

DSecurity code

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

242

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

FCC ID: BABBT010A

IC ID: 2024B−BT010A

MADE IN CHINA

This device complies with Part 15 of the

FCC Rules and RSS−210. Operation is

subject to the following two conditions:

(1) This device may not cause harmful

interference, and (2) This device must

accept any interference received, includ-

ing interference that may cause unde-

sired operation.

CAUTION

Changes or modifications not ex-

pressly approved by the party respon-

sible for compliance could void the

user’s authority to operate the equip-

ment.

NOTE: This equipment has been

tested and found to comply with the

limits for a Class B digital device,

pursuant to part 15 of the FCC Rules.

These limits are designed to provide

reasonable protection against harmful

interference in a residential installa-

tion. This equipment generates, uses

and can radiate radio frequency ener-

gy and, if not installed and used in

accordance with the instructions, may

cause harmful interference to radio

communications. However, there is no

guarantee that interference will not oc-

cur in a particular installation. If this

equipment does cause harmful inter-

ference to radio or television recep-

tion, which can be determined by turn-

ing the equipment off and on, the user

is encouraged to try to correct the

interference by one or more of the

following measures:

−Reorient or relocate the receiving an-

tenna.

−Increase the separation between the

equipment and receiver.

−Connect the equipment into an outlet

on a circuit different from that to

which the receiver is connected.

−Consult the dealer or an experienced

radio/TV technician for help.

CAUTION: Radio Frequency Radiation

Exposure

This equipment complies with FCC/IC

radiation exposure limits set forth for

uncontrolled equipment and meets the

FCC radio frequency (RF) Exposure

Guidelines in Supplement C to OET65

and RSS−102 of the IC radio frequen-

cy (RF) Exposure rules. This equip-

ment has very low levels of RF ener-

gy that it deemed to comply without

maximum permissive exposure evalua-

tion (MPE). But it is desirable that it

should be installed and operated with

at least 20 cm and more between the

radiator and person’s body (excluding

extremities: hands, wrists, feet and

legs).

Co−location: This transmitter must

not be co−located or operated in con-

junction with any other antenna or

transmitter.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

243

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Steering switches

Microphone

1. Volume control switch

To increase the volume: Push “+”.

To decrease the volume: Push “−”.

When driving at 80 km/h (50 mph) or

more, the volume automatically increases

without switch adjustment. When your

speed falls below 70 km/h (43 mph), the

volume automatically returns to its original

level.

Voice guidance volume cannot be changed

by pushing the volume control switch on

the steering wheel.

2. Talk switch

Pushing the talk switch turns the hands−

free system on and initiates the speech

command system.

3. On−hook switch

When the hands−free system is on, push-

ing the on−hook switch turns the hands−

free system off.

Pushing and holding the talk switch ends

the speech command system.

4. Off−hook switch

Pushing the off−hook switch turns the

hands−free system on.

When receiving a call, pushing the off−

hook switch allows you to talk on the

phone.

5. Microphone

The microphone is used when talking on

the phone or using the speech command

system.

—Control and features

"Steering switches and microphone

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

244

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Display

Displays such items as the reception lev-

el, a party’s name and phone number. See

“DISPLAY” described on the following

page for further details about the display.

2. “AUDIO CONTROL” knob

Turning the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob dis-

plays the menu items, names, numbers,

etc. to be selected. To select an item,

push the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob. Due to

safety concerns, the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob does not function while the vehicle

is in motion.

3. “TEXT” button

When the party’s name or phone number

is too long to be displayed, pushing and

holding the “TEXT” button displays the re-

maining characters.

4. Preset buttons

Pushing the preset button displays the

registered speed dial numbers.

"Audio unit

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

245

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DISPLAY

1. Bluetoothr display

Displays when a Bluetoothr connection is

made. If there is no display, the

Bluetoothr connection has not been made

and communication between the phone

and system is not possible. When using

the hands−free system, make sure that

[BT] is displayed. The display is updated

in real time.

2. Reception level display

Displays the cellular phone reception lev-

els. This may not match the display on

the cellular phone. The reception level of

some cellular phones may not be dis-

played.

The number of bars is greater when the

signal received is stronger.

3. Message display

Displays phone numbers, names, com-

ments, menu items, etc.

The phone setup menu includes the fol-

lowing:

DPair Phone

To use the hands−free system, you need

to register your phone in the system.

Once you have registered it, you can

make a hands−free call. Up to 6 phones

can be registered.

DSelect Phone

When the system connects to Bluetoothr,

the phone previously used is automatically

selected. Select a different phone if nec-

essary. Only the selected phone can be

used with the hands−free system.

DChange Name

The registered phone names can be

changed.

DList Phones

The registered phone names can be

checked.

The following can be performed during the

name playback:

DSelect phone

DChange name

DDelete

—Phone Setup

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

246

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DSet PassKey

The passkey can be changed. A 4 to 8

digit code can be input as a passkey.

DDelete

The registered phones can be deleted.

To enter the phone setup menu

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Setup] is displayed and push the knob.

[Setup. Please push the talk switch and

say security, or phone setup.] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Phone Setup] is displayed and push

the knob.

[Phone setup. Push the talk switch and

say pair phone, select phone, change

name, list phones, set passkey or delete.]

is heard.

[XXX (phone name) already selected.] is

heard and the phone name is displayed.

If no phone has been registered, the sys-

tem may not function properly.

To pair phones

1. Push the talk switch and say [Pair

phone], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Pair Phone] is displayed

and push the knob.

[Pair. Push the talk switch and say a

name for the phone.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Record Name] is displayed, push the

knob and say the desired phone name.

[Push the talk switch and say confirm.

Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[XXX (desired phone name) Ready for

phone pairing. Please use the phone to

connect it to the hands−free system. The

passkey for the phone is....] is heard.

After [HANDS FREE] is displayed, a pass-

key∗ is displayed and [Searching.] is

heard.

4. Input the displayed passkey into the

phone.

[The phone is paired and ready for use.

Returning to the main menu.] is heard and

[Paired] is displayed.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf 6 phones have already been regis-

tered.

DIf the vehicle is moving.

DIf the system cannot communicate with

the phone.

∗: Passkey is a password required to reg-

ister a phone to the system.

INFORMATION

DTo use the hands−free system, you

need to register your phone in the

system. Once you have registered

it, you can make a hands−free call.

Up to 6 phones can be registered.

DFor the operation of the phone, see

the manual that comes with your

cellular phone.

DThe passkey can be changed. See

page 249 for changing the passkey.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

247

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To select a phone

1. Push the talk switch and say [Select

phone], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Select Phone] is displayed

and push the knob.

[Select phone. Push the talk switch and

say the phone name or say list phones.]

is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the desired phone name is displayed

and push the knob.

When the phone is selected by a voice

command:

[XXX (phone name) Push the talk switch

and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]

is heard and the phone name is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [Con-

firm] is displayed and push the knob.

[XXX selected. Returning to the phone

setup.] is heard.

When the phone is selected by using

the knob:

[XXX selected. Returning to the phone

setup.] is heard.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf the phone is not found.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

To change a name

1. Push the talk switch and say [Change

name], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Change Name] is displayed

and push the knob.

[Change name. Push the talk switch and

say the phone name to change.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the phone name that you want to

change is displayed and push the

knob.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

248

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When the phone is selected by a voice

command:

[XXX (phone name) Push the talk switch

and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]

is heard and the phone name is displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Push the talk switch and say a new

name.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Record Name] is displayed, push the

knob and say the desired phone name.

[XXX Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Name changed. Returning to the phone

setup.] is heard and [Changed] is dis-

played.

When the phone is selected by using

the knob:

[XXX Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard

and the phone name is displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Push the talk switch and say a new

name.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Record Name] is displayed, push the

knob and say the desired phone name.

[XXX Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Name changed. Returning to the phone

setup.] is heard and [Changed] is dis-

played.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf no phone has been registered.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

To list phones

1. Push the talk switch and say [List

phones], or turn the “AUDIO CON-

TROL” knob until [List Phones] is dis-

played and push the knob.

[List phones. To select a name, push the

talk switch during the name playback.] is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions.

[Push the talk switch and say select

phone, change name, or delete.] is heard.

Select one of the following:

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

249

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Select phone

Push the talk switch and say [Select

phone], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Select Phone] is displayed and

push the knob.

For further details on selecting a phone,

see page 247.

Change name

Push the talk switch and say [Change

name], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Change Name] is displayed

and push the knob.

For further details on changing a name,

see page 247.

Delete

Push the talk switch and say [Delete], or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Delete] is displayed and push the knob.

For further details on deleting a phone,

see page 250.

If no phone has been registered, the sys-

tem may not function properly.

To set a passkey

1. Push the talk switch and say [Set

passkey], or turn the “AUDIO CON-

TROL” knob until [Set Passkey] is dis-

played and push the knob.

[Set Passkey. The passkey is required for

the phone pairing process. Push the talk

switch and say a new passkey.] is heard

and passkey is displayed.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to

select a number.

When using a voice command:

[XXXX (new passkey) Push the talk switch

and say confirm. Otherwise, continue add-

ing numbers, or say go back or delete.]

is heard and the new passkey is dis-

played.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.

[Passkey changed. Returning to the phone

setup.] is heard.

When using the knob:

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to

select a number. Push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob to set.

2. When the passkey is set, push the

“AUDIO CONTROL” knob.

[Passkey changed. Returning to the phone

setup.] is heard.

The system does not function in the fol-

lowing cases:

DIf the passkey has less than 4 digits.

DIf the passkey has more than 8 digits.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

250

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To delete a phone

1. Push the talk switch and say [Delete],

or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob

until [Delete] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Delete. Push the talk switch and say the

phone name to delete.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the phone name you want to delete is

displayed and push the knob.

When using a voice command:

[XXX (desired phone name) Push the talk

switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go

back.] is heard and the phone name is

displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until [Con-

firm] is displayed and push the knob.

[Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.] is

heard and $[Deleted]$ is displayed.

When using the knob:

[Deleted. Returning to the phone setup.] is

heard and [Deleted] is displayed.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf no phone has been registered.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

The security menu includes the following:

DSet PIN (Personal Identification Num-

ber)

The PIN can be set or changed.

DPhone book lock

The phone book can be locked.

When the phone book is locked, the fol-

lowing functions cannot be used:

DDial by name

DRedial

DCallback

DSpeed Dial

DPhone Book

DPhone book unlock

The locked phone book can be unlocked.

—Security

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

251

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To enter the security menu

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Setup] is displayed and push the knob.

[Setup. Please push the talk switch and

say security, or phone setup.] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Security] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Security. Push the talk switch and say

set PIN, phone book lock, or phone book

unlock.] is heard.

To set a PIN

Push the talk switch and say [Set PIN],

or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Set PIN] is displayed and push the knob.

[There is no PIN number set. Please reg-

ister a PIN number. Please push the talk

switch and say a four−digit PIN number.]

is heard.

When using a voice command:

1. Push the talk switch and say a new

PIN number.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[The PIN number has been set. Returning

to the security.] is heard and [Completed]

is displayed.

When using the knob:

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to

select a number. Push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob to set.

2. Repeat the above procedure until the

entire four−digit number is set.

3. When the PIN is set, push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob.

4. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[The PIN number has been set. Returning

to the security.] is heard and [Completed]

is displayed.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

252

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If the PIN is to be changed:

[There is a PIN number in place. Push the

talk switch and say the correct PIN num-

ber.] is heard and [Current PIN?] is dis-

played.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

use the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to

input the current PIN number.

[Please push the talk switch and say a

four−digit PIN number.] is heard.

2. Push the talk switch and say new PIN

number.

[The PIN number has been set. Returning

to the security.] is heard and [Completed]

is displayed.

If the current number is not correct, the

system does not function properly.

INFORMATION

Do not forget your PIN. If you forget

the PIN, initialization will be neces-

sary. For details about initialization,

see page 254.

To lock the phone book

1. Push the talk switch and say [Phone

book lock], or turn the “AUDIO CON-

TROL” knob until [Phbk Lock] is dis-

played and push the knob.

[There is a PIN number in place. Push the

talk switch and say the correct PIN num-

ber.] is heard and [Current PIN?] is dis-

played.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to

select a number.

When using a voice command:

[XXXX (PIN number) Push the talk switch

and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]

is heard and PIN number is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.

[PIN number accepted. The phone book is

now locked. Returning to the main menu.]

is heard and [Locked] is displayed.

When using the knob:

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to

select a number. Push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob to set.

2. When the PIN number is set, push the

“AUDIO CONTROL” knob.

[XXXX Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard

and PIN number is displayed.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[PIN number accepted. The phone book is

now locked. Returning to the main menu.]

is heard and [Locked] is displayed.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

253

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf the current number is not correct.

DIf the phone book has already been

locked.

DIf the PIN number does not exist.

To unlock the phone book

1. Push the talk switch and say [Phone

book unlock], or turn the “AUDIO CON-

TROL” knob until [Phbk Unlock] is dis-

played and push the knob.

[Phonebook unlock. There is a PIN num-

ber in place. Push the talk switch and say

the correct PIN number.] is heard and

[Current PIN?] is displayed.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to

select a number.

When using a voice command:

[XXXX (PIN number) Push the talk switch

and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]

is heard and the PIN number is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.

[PIN number accepted. The phone book is

now unlocked. Returning to the main

menu.] is heard and [Unlocked] is dis-

played.

When using the knob:

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to

select a number. Push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob to set.

2. When the PIN number is set, push the

“AUDIO CONTROL” knob.

[XXXX Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard

and the PIN number is displayed.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[PIN number accepted. The phone book is

now unlocked. Returning to the main

menu.] is heard and [Unlocked] is dis-

played.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf the current number is not correct.

DIf the phone book has already been

unlocked.

INFORMATION

A shortcut to each of the following

functions is available. Enter the

phone book menu, push the off−hook

switch, and say either of the follow-

ing:

DPhone book lock

DPhone book unlock

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

254

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The system setup menu includes the fol-

lowing:

DAdjust Guidance Volume

DInitialize

To enter the system setup menu

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Setup] is displayed and push the knob.

3. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[System Setup] is displayed and push

the knob.

[System setup. Please select guidance

volume or initialize.] is heard.

To adjust the guidance volume

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Guidance Vol] is displayed and push

the knob.

[Guidance will be at this volume] is heard

and the present volume level is displayed.

2. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to

adjust the volume and push the knob.

To initialize

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Initialize] is displayed and push the

knob.

[System initialization. This will erase all

user information in the hands free system;

including paired phones, phone book en-

tries, and call history. Select confirm to

initialize. Otherwise, select go back.] is

heard.

2. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[System initialization. This will erase all

user information in the hands free system;

including paired phones, phone book en-

tries, and call history. Select confirm to

initialize. Otherwise, select go back.] is

heard.

3. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Initialized. Returning to the main menu.]

is heard.

The phone book menu includes the follow-

ing:

DAdd Entry

Phone numbers and voice tags can be

registered.

DChange Name

The registered names can be changed.

DDelete Entry

The registered names can be deleted.

DDelete Speed Dial

The registered speed dial can be deleted.

DList Names

The registered names can be checked.

DSet Speed Dial

Speed dials can be set.

Up to 20 numbers can be registered in

the phone book.

—System Setup —Phone Book

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

255

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To enter the phone book menu

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Phonebook] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Phone book. Please push the talk switch

and say add entry, change name, delete

entry, list names, set speed dial or delete

speed dial.] is heard.

If the phone book is locked, the system

may not function properly.

To add entry

The add entry includes the following:

(a) By Voice

(b) By Phone

(d) Manual Input

Push the talk switch and say [Add entry],

or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Add Entry] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Add Entry. How will the number be en-

tered. Push the talk switch and say by

voice, by phone, or call history.] is heard.

(a) By Voice

1. Push the talk switch and say [By

voice], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [By Voice] is displayed and

push the knob.

[Voice entry. Push the talk switch and say

the number.] is heard.

2. Push the talk switch and say the dial

number that you want to register.

[To store, push the talk switch and say

confirm. Otherwise, continue adding num-

bers, or say go back, or delete.] is heard

and number is displayed.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

256

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If [Confirm] is said, then input a voice

tag.

[Push the talk switch and say a name.] is

heard.

1. Push the talk switch and say the name

of the dial number that you want to

[XXXX (phone number) Push the talk

switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go

back.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Stored. To register this as a speed dial

entry, push the talk switch and say set

speed dial. Otherwise, say confirm.] is

heard and [Stored] is displayed.

3. Select one of the following:

DConfirm

DSpeed Dial

Confirm

Push the talk switch and say [Confirm], or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.

[Returning to the phone book.] is heard.

Speed Dial

1. Push the talk switch and say [Set

speed dial], or turn the “AUDIO CON-

TROL” knob until [Speed Dial] is dis-

played and push the knob.

[Set speed dial. Push the preset button to

assign to XXXX] is heard.

2. Push and hold the desired preset but-

ton.

[preset... is now assigned. Returning to

the phone book.] is heard.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf the phone book is full.

DIf the dial number has more than 24

digits.

(b) By Phone

1. Push the talk switch and say [By

phone], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [By Phone] is displayed and

push the knob.

[Phone entry. Prepare to send the informa-

tion from the phone. When ready, push

the talk switch and say confirm.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Send the information at this time.] is

heard.

After the system has received the name

and phone number, [Push the talk switch

and say confirm. To select an alternate

number, say next or previous. Otherwise,

say go back.] is heard and the name and

phone number are displayed.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions,

push the talk switch and say [Confirm],

or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob

until the dial number that you want to

knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 255.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

257

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Push the talk switch and say [Call his-

tory], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Call History] is displayed

and push the knob.

[Call history. Push the talk switch and say

incoming or outgoing.] is heard and [Call

History] is displayed.

2. Select one of the following:

DIncoming

DOutgoing

Incoming

1. Push the talk switch and say [Incom-

ing], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Incoming] is displayed and

push the knob.

[Most recent incoming call was XXXX

(phone number)] is heard and the incom-

ing number is displayed.

[Push the talk switch and say confirm.

Otherwise, say previous, or go back.] is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to regis-

ter is displayed and push the knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 255.

Outgoing

1. Push the talk switch and say [Outgo-

ing], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Outgoing] is displayed and

push the knob.

[Most recent outgoing call was XXXX] is

heard and the outgoing number is dis-

played.

[Push the talk switch and say confirm.

Otherwise, say previous, or go back.] is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to regis-

ter is displayed and push the knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 255.

(d) Manual Input

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Manual Input] is displayed and push

the knob.

2. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob to

select a number. Push the “AUDIO

CONTROL” knob to set.

3. When the number is set, push the

“AUDIO CONTROL” knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 255.

INFORMATION

DThe system can recognize single

digits from zero to nine, #(pound),

*(star), and +(plus). Numbers that

are ten or greater are not recog-

nized.

DTo speed up input, it is a good idea

to group all digits into a continuous

string. However, you can enter each

digit individually or group digits to-

gether in preferred string lengths.

The display corresponding to each op-

eration appears on the screen as fol-

lows:

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

258

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Input operation—

You say: [Nine, nine, five]

Voice output: [995 to store push the

talk switch and say confirm. Other-

wise, continue adding numbers, or

say go back, or delete.]

Display: [995]

You say: [Seven, three, four]

Voice output: [734 to store push the

talk switch and say confirm. Other-

wise, continue adding numbers, or

say go back, or delete.]

Display: [995734]

Repeat the above procedure until the

entire number that you want to regis-

ter is input.

Go back operation—

You say: [Go back]

Voice output: [Go back. The last num-

bers said have been removed. Push

the talk switch and say the number.]

Display: [995]

Repeating the above operation deletes

the last digits in reverse order of in-

put.

Delete operation—

You say: [Delete]

Voice output: [Deleted. Push the talk

switch and say the number.]

Display: [Delete]

The display will return to the initial

screen that allows a number to be

input.

To list names

The voice tags can be edited during the

name playback.

1. Push the talk switch and say [List

names], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [List Names] is displayed

and push the knob.

[List names. To select a name, push the

talk switch during the name playback.] is

heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions.

[XXXX selected.] is heard and [Selected]

is displayed.

If you push the off−hook switch during the

name playback, you can dial the number

of the selected name.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

259

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Editing the voice tags

The following can be performed:

DDial

DChange Name

DDelete Entry

DSpeed Dial

[Push the talk switch and say dial, change

name, delete entry, or set speed dial.] is

heard and [Selected] is displayed.

Dial

Push the talk switch and say [Dial], or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

Change Name

Push the talk switch and say [Change

name], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Change Name] is displayed

and push the knob.

For further details, see page 260.

Delete Entry

Push the talk switch and say [Delete

entry], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Delete Entry] is displayed and

push the knob.

For further details, see page 259.

Speed dial

Push the talk switch and say [Set speed

dial], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob

until [Speed Dial] is displayed and push

the knob.

For further details, see page 261.

To delete entry

1. Push the talk switch and say [Delete

entry], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Delete Entry] is displayed

and push the knob.

[Delete entry. Push the talk switch and

say the name to delete.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the name that you want to delete is

displayed and push the knob.

When using a voice command:

[XXXX (name) Push the talk switch and

say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.] is

heard and the name is displayed.

Follow voice guidance instructions, or turn

the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the knob.

[Deleted. Returning to the phone book.] is

heard and [Deleted] is displayed.

When using the knob:

[Deleted. Returning to the phone book.] is

heard and [Deleted] is displayed.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf no name has been registered.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

260

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To delete speed dial

1. Push the talk switch and say [Delete

speed dial], or turn the “AUDIO CON-

TROL” knob until [Del Spd Dial] is dis-

played and push the knob.

[Delete speed dial. Push the preset button

to delete from speed dial.] is heard.

2. Select the preset button that you want

to delete.

[To delete preset... push the talk switch

and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]

is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Deleted.] is heard and [Deleted] is dis-

played.

[Returning to the phone book.] is heard.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf no speed dial has been registered.

DIf the preset button has not been as-

signed.

To change name

1. Push the talk switch and say [Change

name], or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL”

knob until [Change Name] is displayed

and push the knob.

[Change name. Push the talk switch and

say the name to change.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to

change is displayed and push the

knob.

When using a voice command:

[XXXX (phone number) Push the talk

switch and say confirm. Otherwise, say go

back.] is heard and the phone number is

displayed.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Push the talk switch and say a new

name.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Record Name] is displayed, push the

knob and say new name.

[XXXX Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Name changed. Returning to the phone

book.] is heard and [Changed] is dis-

played.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

261

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When using the knob:

[Push the talk switch and say a new

name.] is heard.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Record Name] is displayed, push the

knob and say new name.

[XXXX Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Name changed. Returning to the phone

book.] is heard and [Changed] is dis-

played.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf no name has been registered.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

To set speed dial

1. Push the talk switch and say [Set

Speed dial], or turn the “AUDIO CON-

TROL” knob until [Speed Dial] is dis-

played and push the knob.

[Set speed dial. Push the talk switch and

say a name.] is heard.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to regis-

ter is displayed and push the knob.

When using a voice command:

[XXXX (phone number) To register this as

a speed dial entry, push the talk switch

and say confirm. Otherwise, say go back.]

is heard and the phone number is dis-

played.

1. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Push the preset button to assign to

XXXX] is heard.

2. Push and hold the desired preset but-

ton.

[preset... is now assigned. Returning to

the phone book.] is heard.

When using the knob:

[Push the preset button to assign to

XXXX] is heard.

Push and hold the desired preset button.

[preset... is now assigned. Returning to

the phone book.] is heard.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf no name has been registered.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

262

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

INFORMATION

A shortcut to each of the following

functions is available. Push the off−

hook switch and talk switch, and say

one of the following:

DPhone book add entry

DPhone book change name

DPhone book delete entry

DPhone book delete speed dial

DPhone book list names

DPhone book set speed dial

The following can be performed:

DDial

DDelete

DStore

To enter the redial

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Redial] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Redial. Most recent outgoing call was

XXXX (phone number)] is heard and out-

going history is displayed.

[Please push the off−hook switch to dial.

Otherwise, push the talk switch and say

dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.]

is heard.

Dial

Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the number that you want to dial is dis-

played and push the knob. After that, do

the one of the following:

DPush the off−hook switch.

DPush the talk switch and say [dial].

DTurn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

Delete

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to delete

is displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say [Delete],

or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob

until [Delete] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Delete. Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Deleted.] is heard.

—Redial

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

263

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Store

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to regis-

ter is displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say [Store],

or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob

until [Store] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Store. Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 255.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf there is no outgoing history.

DIf the phone book is locked.

INFORMATION

DUp to five outgoing calls can be

stored in the system.

DWhen five outgoing calls are stored

in memory, the oldest outgoing call

is deleted to make room in memory

for new calls.

DOnly the latest outgoing call is

stored when the same telephone

number is dialed.

DA shortcut to “Redial” is available.

Push the off−hook switch and then

push the off−hook switch.

The following can be performed:

DDial

DDelete

DStore

To enter the callback

1. Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

2. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Callback] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Callback. Most recent incoming call was

XXXX (phone number)] is heard and in-

coming history is displayed.

[Please push the off−hook switch to dial.

Otherwise, push the talk switch and say

dial, previous, go back, store, or delete.]

is heard.

—Callback

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

264

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Dial

Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the number that you want to dial is dis-

played and push the knob. After that, do

the one of the following:

DPush the off−hook switch.

DPush the talk switch and say [Dial].

DTurn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

Delete

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to delete

is displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say [Delete],

or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob

until [Delete] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Delete. Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Deleted.] is heard.

Store

1. Turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

the dial number that you want to regis-

ter is displayed and push the knob.

2. Push the talk switch and say [Store],

or turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob

until [Store] is displayed and push the

knob.

[Store. Push the talk switch and say con-

firm. Otherwise, say go back.] is heard.

3. Follow voice guidance instructions, or

turn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Confirm] is displayed and push the

knob.

Next, input a voice tag.

For further details, see page 255.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf there is no incoming history.

DIf the phone book is locked.

INFORMATION

DUp to five incoming calls can be

stored in the system.

DWhen five incoming calls are stored

in memory, the oldest incoming call

is deleted to make room in memory

for new calls.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

265

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If the cellular phone is not registered, this

system cannot be used. See page 245 for

registering a cellular phone. Make sure

that [BT] is displayed and get the cellular

phone ready to use.

There are 3 ways to make a phone call

with this system.

DSpeed dial

A phone call can be made with a preset

button in which a phone number is regis-

tered. See page 261 for setting the preset

buttons.

DDial by Name

The system dials the numbers correspond-

ing to the spoken names registered in the

system.

DDial by Number

The system dials to the spoken numbers.

To make a phone call

Push the off−hook switch to turn the

hands−free system on.

To speed dial

1. Push the preset button where the de-

sired number is set. The name or tele-

phone number is displayed.

2. Push the off−hook switch to dial.

To dial by Name

1. Push the talk switch and say [Dial by

name].

[Dial by name. Please push the talk

switch and say the stored name, or say

list names.] is heard and [Dial by Name]

is displayed.

2. Push the talk switch and say the

phone name, or turn the “AUDIO CON-

TROL” knob until the name that you

want to dial is displayed and push the

knob.

When using a voice command:

[XXXX (phone number) Push the off−hook

switch to dial. Otherwise, push the talk

switch and say dial, or go back.] is heard.

After that, do the one of the following:

DPush the off−hook switch.

DPush the talk switch and say [Dial].

DTurn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

When using the knob:

It calls the number.

The system may not function in the follow-

ing cases:

DIf there is no number registered in the

preset button.

DIf the system does not recognize the

voice command.

—Making a phone call

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

266

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

INFORMATION

DThe phone numbers registered in

the phone book can be retrieved.

DThe system does not recognize that

the voice tag is not registered in

the registered cellular phone. For

details about voice tags, see “To

add entry” on page 255.

DA shortcut to [Dial by name] is

available. Push the talk switch and

say [Dial XXX (name you want to

dial)].

To dial by Number

1. Push the talk switch and say [Dial by

Number].

[Dial by number. Please push the talk

switch and say the number.] is heard and

[Dial by Num] is displayed.

2. Push talk switch and say the dial num-

ber.

[Push the off−hook switch to dial. Other-

wise, push the talk switch and say dial,

go back, or delete.] is heard.

To dial the number, do the one of the

following:

DPush the off−hook switch.

DPush the talk switch and say [Dial].

DTurn the “AUDIO CONTROL” knob until

[Dial] is displayed and push the knob.

If the number exceeds 24 digits, the sys-

tem may not function properly.

INFORMATION

DThe system can recognize single

digits from zero to nine, #(pound),

*(star), and +(plus). Numbers that

are ten or greater are not recog-

nized.

DTo speed up input, it is a good idea

to group all digits into a continuous

string. However, you can enter each

digit individually or group digits to-

gether in preferred string lengths.

The display corresponding to each op-

eration appears on the screen as fol-

lows:

Input operation—

You say: [Nine, nine, five]

Voice output: [995 push the off−hook

switch to dial. Otherwise, push the

talk switch and say dial, go back, or

delete.]

Display: [995]

You say: [Seven, three, four]

Voice output: [734 push the off−hook

switch to dial. Otherwise, push the

talk switch and say dial, go back, or

delete.]

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

267

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Display: [995734]

Repeat the above procedure until the

entire number that you want to dial is

input.

Go back operation—

You say: [Go back]

Voice output: [Go back, the last num-

bers entered have been removed.

Push the talk switch and continue

adding numbers otherwise say dial,

go back, or delete.]

Display: [995]

Repeating the above operation deletes

the last digits in reverse order of in-

put.

Delete operation—

You say: [Delete]

Voice output: [Deleted. The entire

number to dial has been deleted.

Please push the talk switch and say

the number.]

Display: [Dial by Num]

The display will return to the initial

screen that allows a number to be

input.

Cancel operation—

Do either one of the following:

DPush the on−hook switch at anytime

during the operation.

DPush the talk switch and say [Can-

cel] after the beep at anytime dur-

ing the operation except while a call

is connected.

When receiving a phone call, a ring tone

is audible and the system changes into

the telephone mode.

When receiving a phone call, the display

is as follows. The display differs depend-

ing on whether or not the vehicle is in

motion.

When the vehicle is stopped:

Number, name, or [Incoming] is displayed.

When the vehicle is in motion:

[Incoming] is displayed.

Do either one of the following:

DPushing the off−hook switch allows you

to talk on the phone.

DPushing the on−hook switch refuses

the call.

To adjust the ring volume, push “+” or “−”

on the steering volume controls. Volume

adjustment cannot be done using the au-

dio system.

Repeatedly pushing “−” on the steering

volume controls mutes the ring.

When receiving an international phone

call, the name of the party may not be

displayed correctly depending on the cellu-

lar phone.

—Receiving a phone call

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

268

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To transfer a call to the phone:

The received call can be transferred from

the hands−free system to the cellular

phone that is connected to Bluetoothr. For

details, refer to the user’s guide for the

cellular phone.

While talking on the phone, the display is

as follows. The display differs depending

on whether or not the vehicle is in motion.

When the vehicle is stopped:

Number is displayed.

When the vehicle is in motion:

[Talking] is displayed.

When the call is finished, push the on−

hook switch.

In the following situations, your voice may

not reach the party.

DTalk alternately with the other party on

the phone. If you talk at the same

time, the voice may not reach each

other. (It is not a malfunction.)

DKeep the volume of receiving voice

down. Otherwise, echo is coming up.

When you talk on the phone, speak

clearly towards the microphone.

DWhen driving on a rough road.

DWhen driving at high speeds.

DWhen the window is open.

DWhen the air conditioning vents face

the microphone.

DWhen the sound of the air conditioning

fan is loud.

The microphone can be muted by pushing

the talk switch and say [Mute].

To transfer a call from the phone:

Pushing the off−hook switch while talking

on the cellular phone that is connected to

Bluetoothr allows you to talk hands−free.

A call can also be transferred by pushing

the talk switch and say [Call transfer].

To transfer a call to the phone:

The call can be transferred from the

hands−free system to the phone that is

connected to Bluetoothr. For details, refer

to the user’s guide for the cellular phone.

—Talking on the phone

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

269

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Air conditioning system

Manual air conditioning system

Controls 270. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air flow selector settings 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating tips 273. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Automatic air conditioning system

Controls 276. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air flow selector settings 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operating tips 280. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Side vents 283. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Air conditioning filter 284. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 9

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

270

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Air flow selector

2. Fan speed selector

3. Temperature selector

4. “A/C” button

5. Air intake selector

Manual air conditioning system—

—Controls

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

271

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Fan speed selector

Turn the dial to adjust the fan speed—to

the right to increase, to the left to de-

crease.

Temperature selector

Turn the dial to adjust the temperature—to

the right to warm, to the left to cool.

Air flow selector

Turn the dial to select the vents used for

air flow.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the

instrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor

vents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield

vents.

Turning the air flow selector to the

floor/windshield position turns on the

defogging function with the purpose of

clearing the front view.

In this position, air intake selector

mode changes to FRESH automatically

to clean up the front view quickly. It is

not possible to return to RECIRCULATE

in this position.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears

the front view more quickly.

5. Windshield—Air flows mainly from the

windshield vents.

Turning the air flow selector to the

windshield position turns on the defog-

ging function with the purpose of clear-

ing the front view.

In this position, air intake selector

mode changes to FRESH automatically

to clean up the front view quickly. It is

not possible to return to RECIRCULATE

in this position.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears

the front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,

see “—Air flow selector settings” on page

273.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

272

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. RECIRCULATE—Recirculates the air in-

side the vehicle.

2. FRESH—Draws outside air into the

system.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,

the air intake mode may change automati-

cally to FRESH depending on the condi-

tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the

“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator

will come on. To turn the air conditioning

off, press the button again.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

273

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DTo cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes.

This vents the hot air, allowing the air

conditioning to cool the interior more

quickly.

DMake sure the air intake grilles in front

of the windshield are not blocked (by

leaves or snow, for example).

DKeep the area under the front (and

second) seats clear to allow air to cir-

culate throughout the vehicle.

DOn cold days, set the fan speed to

high for a minute to help clear the

intake ducts of snow or moisture. This

can reduce the amount of fogging on

the windows.

DWhen driving on dusty roads, close all

windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-

hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after

closing the windows, it is recommended

that the air intake selector be set to

FRESH and the fan speed selector to

any setting except “0”.

—Air flow selector settings

With third seats

—Operating tips

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

274

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DIf following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty

conditions, it is recommended that the

air intake selector be temporarily set to

RECIRCULATE, which will close off the

outside passage and prevent outside

air and dust from entering the vehicle

interior.

CAUTION

To prevent the windshield from fog-

ging up, do not use the windshield

air flow button during cool air opera-

tion in extremely humid weather. The

difference between the temperature of

the outside air and that of the wind-

shield can cause the outer surface of

the windshield to fog up, blocking

your vision.

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge, do not

leave the air conditioning system on

longer than necessary when the en-

gine is stopped.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “0”

Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—FLOOR

Air conditioning—OFF

DFor quick heating, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the

windows from fogging, select fresh af-

ter the vehicle interior has been

warmed.

DPress the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-

fied heating.

DChoose floor/windshield air flow to heat

the vehicle interior while defrosting or

defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “0”

Temperature—Tow a r ds COLD

(blue zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—ON

DFor quick cooling, turn the temperature

selector dial fully towards COLD and

change the air intake selector mode to

RECIRCULATE.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

275

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Ventilation

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “0”

Temperature—Towards COLD

(blue zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—OFF

Defogging

The inside of the windshield

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “0”

Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone) to heat;

COLD (blue zone) to

cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-

shield or floor/windshield position turns on

the defogging function with the purpose of

clearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-

shield or floor/windshield position, air in-

take selector mode changes to FRESH

automatically to clean up the front view

quickly. It is not possible to return to

RECIRCULATE in this position.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating or cooling. This setting clears the

front view more quickly.

DOn humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference be-

tween the outside and inside tempera-

tures could make the fogging worse.

Defrosting

The outside of the windshield

For best results, set controls to:

Fan speed—Any setting except “0”

Temperature—Towards WARM

(red zone)

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Turning the air flow selector to the wind-

shield or floor/windshield position turns on

the defrosting function with the purpose of

clearing the front view.

When turning the air flow selector to wind-

shield or floor/windshield position, air in-

take selector mode changes to FRESH

automatically to clean up the front view

quickly. It is not possible to return to

RECIRCULATE in this position.

Press the “A/C” button for dehumidified

heating. This setting clears the front view

more quickly.

DTo heat the vehicle interior while de-

frosting the windshield, choose

floor/windshield air flow.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

276

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. “TEMP” (driver side temperature

control) button

2. Air intake selector

3. Air flow selector

4. Air conditioning display

5. “A/C” button

6. “DUAL” button

7. “PASS TEMP” (front passenger side

temperature control) button

8. Micro dust and pollen filter button

9. Fan speed selector

10. Windshield air flow button

11. “OFF” button

12. “AUTO” button

Automatic air conditioning system—

—Controls

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

277

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

“AUTO” button

For automatic operation of the air condi-

tioning, push the “AUTO” button. An indi-

cator light will illuminate to show that the

automatic operation mode has been se-

lected.

In the automatic operation mode, the air

conditioning selects the most suitable fan

speed, air flow, air intake and on−off of

the air conditioning according to the tem-

perature. As a result, the following may

occur.

DThe system may switch automatically

to recirculated mode when the coolest

temperature setting is selected in sum-

mer.

DImmediately after the switch is

pressed, the fan may stop for a while

until warm or cool air is ready to flow.

DCool air may flow to the area around

the upper body when the heater is on.

You may use manual controls if you want

to select your own settings.

Fan speed selector

Push the “Ɯ” (increase) or “Ɲ” (decrease)

side of the button to adjust the fan speed.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to adjust the fan speed unless you desire

another fan speed mode.

“DUAL” button

Push the button to change the mode of

the temperature setting.

With the indicator on—Individual temper-

ature setting

With the indicator off—Simultaneous

temperature setting

“TEMP” (driver side temperature con-

trol) button

To increase the temperature, press the

“Ɯ” side. To decrease it, press the “Ɲ”

side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-

mum cooling, and “HI” appears when you

adjust to maximum warming.

With the “DUAL” button indicator on—This

button changes the temperature on the

driver side only.

With the “DUAL” button indicator off—This

button changes the temperature on the

driver side and front passenger side si-

multaneously.

This function will be cancelled when the

“PASS TEMP” button is pushed.

“PASS TEMP” (front passenger side

temperature control) button

To increase the temperature, press the

“Ɯ” side. To decrease it, press the “Ɲ”

side.

“LO” appears when you adjust to maxi-

mum cooling, and “HI” appears when you

adjust to maximum warming.

This button changes the temperature on

the front passenger side only.

“OFF” button

Push the “OFF” button to turn off the air

conditioning system.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

278

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Air flow selector

Push one of the buttons to select the

vents used for air flow.

In automatic operation, you do not have

to select the air flow unless you desire

another air flow mode.

1. Panel—Air flows mainly from the

instrument panel vents.

2. Bi−level—Air flows from both the floor

vents and the instrument panel vents.

3. Floor—Air flows mainly from the floor

vents.

4. Floor/Windshield—Air flows mainly

from the floor vents and windshield

vents.

This position allows the air intake to

select FRESH automatically. This is to

clean up the front view more quickly. It

is not possible to return to

RECIRCULATE in this position.

Pushing this button turns on the

defroster−linked air conditioning. This is

to clean up the front view more quickly.

For details about air flow selector settings,

see “—Air flow selector settings” on page

280.

Windshield air flow button

When this button is pressed, air flows

mainly from the windshield vents and

turns on the defogging function with the

purpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returns

the air flow mode to the last one used.

In this position, the air intake selector

mode changes to FRESH automatically to

clean up the front view quickly. It is not

possible to return to RECIRCULATE in

this position.

Pressing the windshield air flow button

turns on the defroster−linked air condition-

ing. This is to clean up the front view

more quickly.

To turn off the air conditioning alone,

press the “A/C” button once again.

When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,

pressing another air flow button turns off

the air conditioning.

For details about air flow selector settings,

see “—Air flow selector settings” on page

280.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

279

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Air intake selector

Press the button to select the air source.

1. RECIRCULATE (indicator light is

on)—Recirculates the air inside the ve-

hicle.

2. FRESH (indicator light is off)—Draws

outside air into the system.

To prevent fogging up of the windshield,

the air intake mode may change automati-

cally to FRESH depending on the condi-

tion of the air conditioning system.

“A/C” button

To turn on the air conditioning, press the

“A/C” button. The “A/C” button indicator

will come on. To turn the air conditioning

off, press the button again.

Micro dust and pollen filter button

Push the button to remove the airborne

pollen and micro dust from the cabin as

soon as possible. An indicator will come

on.

The air intake mode will switch to

RECIRCULATE mode. The air will flow to

the upper part of the body of the

occupants and pollen and micro dust will

be removed. After about 3 minutes have

elapsed, the operation stops, and the air

conditioning system automatically returns

to the settings prior to the button being

pushed.

To stop the operation, do one of the fol-

lowing:

DPress the micro dust and pollen filter

button again.

DPress the “AUTO” button.

DPress one of the air flow selector but-

tons or the windshield air flow button.

When the ambient temperature is low, the

following may occur:

DAir intake mode does not switch to

RECIRCULATE.

DThe air conditioning system operates

automatically.

DThe operation is cancelled after 1 min-

ute.

In rainy weather, the windows may fog up.

Press the windshield air flow button.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

280

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DTo cool off your Toyota after it has

been parked in the hot sun, drive with

the windows open for a few minutes.

This vents the hot air, allowing the air

conditioning to cool the interior more

quickly.

DMake sure the air intake grilles in front

of the windshield are not blocked (by

leaves or snow, for example).

DKeep the area under the front (and

second) seats clear to allow air to cir-

culate throughout the vehicle.

DOn cold days, set the fan speed to

high for a minute to help clear the

intake ducts of snow or moisture. This

can reduce the amount of fogging on

the windows.

DWhen driving on dusty roads, close all

windows. If dust thrown up by the ve-

hicle is still drawn into the vehicle after

closing the windows, it is recommended

that the air intake selector be set to

FRESH and the fan speed selector to

any setting except off.

—Air flow selector settings

With third seats

—Operating tips

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

281

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DIf following another vehicle on a dusty

road, or driving in windy and dusty

conditions, it is recommended that the

air intake selector be temporarily set to

RECIRCULATE, which will close off the

outside passage and prevent outside

air and dust from entering the vehicle

interior.

CAUTION

To prevent the windshield from fog-

ging up, do not use the windshield

air flow button during cool air opera-

tion in extremely humid weather. The

difference between the temperature of

the outside air and that of the wind-

shield can cause the outer surface of

the windshield to fog up, blocking

your vision.

NOTICE

To prevent battery discharge, do not

leave the air conditioning system on

longer than necessary when the en-

gine is stopped.

Heating

For best results, set controls to:

—For automatic operation

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—To the desired

temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—OFF

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards high temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—FLOOR

Air conditioning—OFF

DFor quick heating, select recirculated

air for a few minutes. To keep the

windows from fogging, select fresh af-

ter the vehicle interior has been

warmed.

DPress the “A/C” button on for dehumidi-

fied heating.

DChoose floor/windshield air flow to heat

the vehicle interior while defrosting or

defogging the windshield.

Air conditioning

For best results, set controls to:

—For automatic operation

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—To the desired

temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—ON

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards low temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—ON

DFor quick cooling, select recirculated

air.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

282

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Ventilation

For best results, set controls to:

—For automatic operation

Press in the “AUTO” button.

Temperature—Towards low temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air conditioning—OFF

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards low temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—PANEL

Air conditioning—OFF

Defogging and defrosting

—The inside of the windshield

For best results, set controls to:

—For automatic operation

Temperature—Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperature

to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards high temperature

to heat; low temperature

to cool

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow button

turns on the defogging function with the

purpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returns

the air flow mode to the last one used.

In this position, the air intake selector

mode changes to FRESH automatically to

clean up the front view quickly. It is not

possible to return to RECIRCULATE in

this position.

Pressing the windshield air flow button

turns on the defroster−linked air condition-

ing. This is to clean up the front view

more quickly.

To turn off the air conditioning alone,

press the “A/C” button once again.

When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,

pressing another air flow button turns off

the air conditioning.

DOn humid days, do not blow cold air

on the windshield—the difference be-

tween the outside and inside tempera-

tures could make the fogging worse.

—The outside of the windshield

For best results, set controls to:

—For automatic operation

Temperature—Towards high temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

—For manual operation

Fan speed—To the desired fan speed

Temperature—Towards high temperature

Air intake—FRESH (outside air)

Air flow—WINDSHIELD

Pressing the windshield air flow button

turns on the defogging function with the

purpose of clearing the front view.

Pressing this button once again returns

the air flow mode to the last one used.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

283

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

In this position, the air intake selector

mode changes to FRESH automatically to

clean up the front view quickly. It is not

possible to return to RECIRCULATE in

this position.

Pushing this button turns on the defroster−

linked air conditioning. This is to clean up

the front view more quickly.

To turn off the air conditioning alone,

press the “A/C” button once again.

When the “A/C” button is not pressed in,

pressing another air flow button turns off

the air conditioning.

DTo heat the vehicle interior while de-

frosting the windshield, choose

floor/windshield air flow.

Open

If air flow control is not satisfactory, check

the side vents. The side vents may be

opened or closed as shown.

You can change air flow direction by turn-

ing the side vents.

Side vents

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

284

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The air conditioning filter information

label is placed in the glove box as

shown and indicates that a filter has

been installed.

The air conditioning filter prevents dust

from entering the vehicle through the air

conditioning vent.

The air conditioning filter is behind the

glove box.

The air conditioning filter may clog af-

ter long use. The filter may need to be

replaced if the air flow of the air condi-

tioning and heater experiences extreme

reductions in operating efficiency, or if

the windows begin to fog up easily in

FRESH mode.

To maintain the air conditioning efficiency,

inspect and replace the air conditioning

filter according to the maintenance sched-

ule. In dusty areas or areas with heavy

traffic flow, such as inner city or desert

areas, early replacement may be required.

(For scheduled maintenance information,

please refer to the “Scheduled Mainte-

nance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment”.)

Air conditioning filter—

—Checking and replacing the

air conditioning filter

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

285

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Open the glove box. Slide off the

damper as shown.

2. Push in each side of the glove box

to disconnect the claws.

3. Remove the filter cover as shown in

the illustration.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

286

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

4. Pull the filter out of the filter outlet.

Inspect the filter on the surface.

If it is dirty, it should be replaced.

When inserting the filter in the filter

outlet, keep the arrow pointing up.

INFORMATION

The air filter should be installed prop-

erly in position. The use of air condi-

tioning with the air filter removed

may cause deteriorated dustproof per-

formance and then affect air condi-

tioning performance.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

287

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OPERATION OF INSTRUMENTS AND

CONTROLS

Other equipment

Clock 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Power outlets 288. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Glove box 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Auxiliary box 291. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage storage boxes 292. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear console box 293. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Front cup holders 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear cup holders 294. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Bottle holders 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tie−down hooks 295. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Grocery bag hooks 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Luggage cover 296. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear cargo net 300. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Roof luggage carrier 303. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Floor mat 304. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 1− 10

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

288

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Manual air conditioning system

Automatic air conditioning system

To reset the hour: Push the “H” button.

To reset the minutes: Push the “M” button.

If quick adjustment to a full hour is de-

sired, push the “:00” button.

For example, if the “:00” button is de-

pressed when the time is between

1:01—1:29, the time will change to 1:00.

If the time is between 1:30—1:59, the

time will change to 2:00.

The engine switch must be in the “ACC”

or “ON” position.

If the electrical power source has been

disconnected from the clock, the time dis-

play will automatically be set to 1:00 (one

o’clock).

Instrument panel

Rear console box

Clock Power outlets (12 VDC)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

289

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Luggage compartment

The power outlets are designed for

power supply for car accessories.

The engine switch must be in the “ACC”

or “ON” position for the power outlets to

be used.

NOTICE

zTo prevent the fuse from being

blown, do not use the electricity

over the total vehicle capacity of 12

V/120W (front and rear outlets to-

gether).

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlets longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

zClose the power outlet lids when

the power outlets are not in use.

Inserting anything other than an ap-

propriate plug that fits the outlet,

or allowing any liquid to get into

the outlet may cause electrical fail-

ure or short circuits.

This power outlet is designed for use

as a power supply for electric ap-

pliances in the vehicle.

The engine switch must be in the “ON”

position for the power outlet to be used.

The maximum capacity for this power out-

let is 115 VAC/100W. If you attempt to

use an appliance that requires more than

115 VAC or 100W, the protection circuit

will activate and cut the power supply.

The power supply will restart automatically

when you use an appliance that operates

within the 115 VAC/100W limits.

Power outlet (115 VAC)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

290

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To use the power outlet, push the main

switch on the instrument panel.

An indicator light will illuminate to indicate

that the power outlet is ready for use.

Push the main switch once again to turn

the power outlet off. When the power out-

let is not in use, make sure that the main

switch is turned off.

NOTICE

zTo prevent the battery from being

discharged, do not use the power

outlet longer than necessary when

the engine is not running.

zClose the power outlet lid when the

power outlet is not in use. Inserting

anything other than an appropriate

plug that fits the outlet may cause

electrical failure or short circuits.

The power outlet is not designed for

the following electric appliances even

though their power consumption is un-

der 115 VAC/100W. These appliances

may not operate properly.

DAppliances with high initial peak watt-

age: cathode−ray tube type televisions,

compressor−driven refrigerators, electric

pumps, electric tools, etc.

DMeasuring devices which process pre-

cise data: medical equipment, measur-

ing instruments, etc.

DOther appliances requiring an extremely

stable power supply: microcomputer−

controlled electric blankets, touch sen-

sor lamps, etc.

Certain electrical appliances may cause

radio noise.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

291

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To use the glove box:

Open by pulling the lever.

Lock by inserting the master key and turn-

ing it clockwise.

Unlock by inserting the master key and

turning it counterclockwise.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the glove box door

closed while driving.

To use the box, open it as shown

above.

CAUTION

DTo reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden

stop, always keep the auxiliary box

closed while driving.

DAs this holder is designed for hold-

ing light objects such as eye-

glasses, do not place objects heavi-

er than 0.2 kg (0.4 lb.) in it. Heavy

objects may cause the holder to

open and the contents to fly out

resulting in injuries.

NOTICE

During hot weather, the interior of the

vehicle becomes very hot. Do not

leave anything flammable or deform-

able such as a lighter, glasses, etc.

inside.

Glove box

Auxiliary box

(overhead console)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

292

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To open the box, push the “OPEN

CLOSE” button.

To close the box, push the “OPEN

CLOSE” button again.

Do not attempt to open the box forcibly

when your vehicle is on a steep downhill.

Move your vehicle to flat road and open

the box by pushing the button.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the auxiliary box closed

while driving.

Front

Rear (type A)

Rear (type B)

To use the box, do the following.

Front: Remove the deck board.

Rear (type A): Open the deck board by

pulling up the strap.

Rear (type B): Fold up the deck board.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the luggage storage

boxes closed while driving.

Auxiliary box

(instrument panel) Luggage storage boxes

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

293

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

UPPER TRAY

To access the upper tray, raise the con-

sole box lid without touching the lock

release lever.

CONSOLE BOX

To access the rear console box, pull up

the lock release lever while raising the

rear console box lid.

CAUTION

To reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or a sudden stop,

always keep the console box closed

while driving.

Rear console box

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

294

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink−cans securely.

A detachable adapter is provided for each

cup holder. Installing the adapter allows a

smaller cup or drink−can to be securely

held in the holder.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than

cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,

as such items may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jure people in the vehicle during sud-

den braking or in an accident.

For rear/second seats

For third seats

The cup holders are designed for hold-

ing cups or drink−cans securely.

For the rear/second seat cup holder: To

use the holder, push down the armrest by

pulling the strap forward.

CAUTION

Do not place anything else other than

cups or drink−cans in the cup holder,

as such items may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jure people in the vehicle during sud-

den braking or in an accident.

Front cup holders Rear cup holders

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

295

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Front door

Rear door

The bottle holders are designed to hold

bottles securely.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to use the holder for

any other purpose for which it was

intended. Inappropriately sized or

shaped objects may be thrown about

in the compartment and possibly in-

jure people in the vehicle during a

sudden braking or an accident.

NOTICE

Do not put a cup or open bottle in

the bottle holder because the con-

tents may spill when the door opens

or closes.

To secure your luggage, use the tie−down

hooks as shown above.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 336

in Section 2 for precautions when loading

luggage.

Vehicles with third seat: When using the

tie−down hooks, stow the third seat (For

detailed information, see “—Stowing third

seats for luggage space” on page 47 in

Section 1−3).

CAUTION

To avoid personal injury, keep the tie−

down hooks stored when not in use.

Bottle holders Tie−down hooks

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

296

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

This hook is designed to hang things

such as grocery bags.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the hook, avoid

hanging heavy load on it.

BEFORE USING LUGGAGE COVER

Move the rear/second seats to the rear−

most lock position.

Grocery bag hooks Luggage cover

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

297

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

USING LUGGAGE COVER

To use the luggage cover:

1. Attach the front hooks of the lug-

gage cover to the head restraint.

2. Pull out the rear luggage cover and

hook it on the anchors.

CAUTION

DDo not place anything on the lug-

gage cover. Such items may be

thrown about and possibly injure

people in the vehicle during sudden

braking or a collision.

DTo reduce the chance of death or

serious injury in case of an acci-

dent or sudden stop, make sure the

luggage cover is secured in place.

If the front hooks cannot be attached to

the head restraint, push down the

rear/second seatback.

REMOVING LUGGAGE COVER

Compress the end of the luggage cover

and lift the cover up.

After you remove the luggage cover, stow

it under deck board as described below.

This will prevent passengers from injury in

the event of a sudden stop or accident.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

298

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

STOWING LUGGAGE COVER (without

third seats)

1. Open the deck board.

2. Remove the deck side cover.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

299

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

3. Insert the right end of the luggage

cover into the hole in the luggage

storage box as shown.

4. Compress the left end of the lug-

gage cover, and fit it into the hollow

on the other side of the luggage

storage box.

CAUTION

Make sure the luggage cover is surely

stowed.

When you stow the rear cargo net and

luggage cover together, stow the rear

cargo net first and then the luggage

cover. (See “Rear cargo net” on page

300 in this section.)

Place the front portion of the luggage

cover (2) on the stowed rear cargo net

and then place the rear portion of the

luggage cover (1) over the rear cargo

net. Otherwise, the deck board may not

close securely.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

300

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To secure your luggage, use the rear

cargo net. You can also put loads on

the net.

See “—Stowage precautions” on page 336

in Section 2 for precautions when loading

luggage.

CAUTION

DTo reduce the chance of injury in

case of an accident or sudden stop,

make sure the net is secured in

place.

DDo not climb on or hang on the

net.

DTo prevent cargo and luggage from

sliding forward during braking, do

not place anything on the net high-

er than the rear seatbacks. Other-

wise, such items may be thrown

about and possibly injure people in

the vehicle during sudden braking

or an accident.

NOTICE

zDo not place breakable items on the

net.

zDo not place anything heavier than

10 kg (22.1 lb.) on the net.

Rear cargo net

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

301

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

USING CARGO NET

To use the net, insert the right end of the

pipe into the hole.

Compress the left end of the pipe, and fit

it into the hole on the other side of the

luggage compartment.

Vehicles with third seat: When sitting in

the third seat, you cannot use the rear

cargo net. Make sure to remove the rear

cargo net.

When using the rear cargo net, stow the

third seat (For detailed information, see

“—Stowing third seats for luggage space”

on page 47 in Section 1−3).

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

302

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

STOWING REAR CARGO NET (without

third seat)

1. Open the deck board.

2. Remove the deck side cover. 3. Insert the right end of the rear cargo

net into the luggage storage box as

shown.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

303

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

4. Compress the left end of the rear

cargo net, and fit it into the other

side of the luggage storage box.

CAUTION

Make sure the rear cargo net is sure-

ly stowed.

When you stow the rear cargo net and

luggage cover together, stow the rear

cargo net first and then the luggage

cover. (See “Luggage cover” on page

296 in this section.)

Place the front portion of the luggage

cover (2) on the stowed rear cargo net

and then place the rear portion of the

luggage cover (1) over the rear cargo

net. Otherwise, the deck board may not

close securely.

The roof luggage carrier consists of

roof rails (1) attached to the roof and

sliding cross rails (2).

To adjust the positions of cross rails, do

this.

1. Turn the knobs counterclockwise to

loosen the cross rails.

2. Slide the cross rails to the desired

position for loading the luggages of

various sizes.

3. After adjusting, be sure to tighten the

cross rails by turning knobs clockwise.

Follow the manufacture’s instructions and

precautions when installing the attach-

ments or their equivalent.

Roof luggage carrier

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

304

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

When you load cargo on the roof lug-

gage carrier, observe the following:

DPlace the cargo so that its weight

is distributed evenly between the

front and rear axles.

DIf loading long or wide cargo, never

exceed the vehicle overall length or

width. (See “Dimensions and

weights” on page 428 in Section 8

for information on your vehicle

overall length and width.)

DBefore driving, make sure the cargo

is securely fastened on the roof

luggage carrier.

DLoading cargo on the roof luggage

carrier will make the center of the

vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high

speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,

sudden braking or abrupt maneu-

vers, otherwise it may result in loss

of control or vehicle rollover due to

failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly.

DIf driving for a long distance, on

rough roads, or at high speeds,

stop the vehicle now and then dur-

ing the trip to make sure the cargo

remains in its place.

DDo not exceed 46.2 kg (102.6 lb.)

cargo weight on the roof luggage

carrier.

NOTICE

When loading the luggages, be careful

not to scratch the surface of the

moon roof. Use a floor mat of the correct size.

If the vehicle carpet and floor mat have

2 holes, then they are designed for use

with locking clips. Attach the floor mat to

the vehicle carpet using the clips. Lock

the clips into the holes in the vehicle

carpet.

Floor mat

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

305

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Observe the following precautions.

Failure to do so may result in the

floor mat slipping and interfering with

the movement of the pedals during

driving, resulting in an accident.

DMake sure the floor mat is properly

placed on the vehicle carpet and

the correct side faces upward.

DDo not place floor mats on top of

existing mats.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

306

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

307

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

INFORMATION BEFORE DRIVING YOUR

TOYOTA

Information before driving your Toyota

Utility vehicle precautions 308. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Break−in period 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel pump shut off system 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Operation in foreign countries 311. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Three−way catalytic converters 312. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine exhaust cautions 313. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Facts about engine oil consumption 314. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Iridium−tipped spark plugs 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake system 315. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Brake pad wear limit indicators 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Electric power steering system 319. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rear step bumper 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Your Toyota’s identification 321. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Theft prevention labels 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Suspension and chassis 323. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tire information 324. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Vehicle load limits 335. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cargo and luggage 336. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Types of tires 338. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 2

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

308

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

This vehicle belongs to the utility ve-

hicle class, which has higher ground

clearance and narrower tread in relation

to the height of its center of gravity to

make it capable of performing in a wide

variety of off−road applications. Specific

design characteristics give it a higher

center of gravity than ordinary passen-

ger cars. This vehicle design feature

causes this type of vehicle to be more

likely to rollover. And, utility vehicles

have a significantly higher rollover rate

than other types of vehicles. An advan-

tage of the higher ground clearance is

a better view of the road allowing you

to anticipate problems. It is not de-

signed for cornering at the same

speeds as ordinary passenger cars any

more than low−slung sports cars de-

signed to perform satisfactorily under

off−road conditions. Therefore, sharp

turns at excessive speeds may cause

rollover.

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-

tions to minimize the risk of serious

personal injury or damage to your ve-

hicle:

DIn a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Therefore, the driver and all

passengers should fasten their seat

belts whenever the vehicle is mov-

ing.

DAvoid sharp turns or abrupt maneu-

vers, if at all possible. Failure to

operate this vehicle correctly may

result in loss of control or vehicle

rollover causing death or serious

injury.

DLoading cargo on the roof luggage

carrier will make the center of the

vehicle gravity higher. Avoid high

speeds, sudden starts, sharp turns,

sudden braking or abrupt maneu-

vers, otherwise it may result in loss

of control or vehicle rollover due to

failure to operate this vehicle cor-

rectly.

Utility vehicle precautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

309

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DAlways slow down in gusty cross-

winds. Because of its profile and

higher center of gravity, your ve-

hicle is more sensitive to side

winds than an ordinary passenger

car. Slowing down will allow you to

have better control.

DWhen driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns,

strike objects, etc. This may cause

loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You

are also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension and

chassis.

DDo not drive horizontally across

steep slopes. Driving straight up or

straight down is preferred. Your ve-

hicle (or any similar off−road ve-

hicle) can tip over sideways much

more easily than forward or back-

ward.

Drive gently and avoid high speeds.

Your vehicle does not need an elaborate

break−in. But following a few simple tips

for the first 1600 km (1000 miles) can add

to the future economy and long life of

your vehicle:

DAvoid full throttle acceleration when

starting and driving.

DAvoid racing the engine.

DTry to avoid hard stops during the first

300 km (200 miles).

DDo not drive for a long time at any

single speed, either fast or slow.

DDo not tow a trailer during the first 800

km (500 miles).

FUEL TYPE

Your new vehicle must use only un-

leaded gasoline.

To help prevent gas station mix−ups, your

Toyota has a smaller fuel tank opening.

The special nozzle on pumps with un-

leaded fuel will fit it, but the larger stan-

dard nozzle on pumps with leaded gas will

not.

At a minimum, the gasoline you use

should meet the specifications of ASTM

D4814 in the U.S.A. and CGSB 3.5−M93

in Canada.

NOTICE

Do not use leaded gasoline. Use of

leaded gasoline will cause the three−

way catalytic converter to lose its ef-

fectiveness and the emission control

system to function improperly. Also,

this can increase maintenance costs.

Break−in period Fuel

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

310

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

OCTANE RATING

Select octane rating 87 (Research

Octane Number 91) or higher.

Use of unleaded gasoline with an octane

rating lower than 87 may result in engine

knocking. Persistent knocking can lead to

engine damage.

If your engine knocks...

If you detect heavy knocking even when

using the recommended fuel, or if you

hear steady knocking while holding a

steady speed on level roads, consult your

Toyota dealer.

However, occasionally, you may notice

light knocking for a short time while accel-

erating or driving up hills. This is normal

and there is no need for concern.

GASOLINE CONTAINING DETERGENT

ADDITIVES

Toyota recommends the use of gasoline

that contains detergent additives to

avoid build−up of engine deposits.

However, all gasoline sold in the U.S.

contains detergent additives to keep clean

and/or clean intake systems.

QUALITY GASOLINE

Automotive manufacturers in the U.S.,

Europe and Japan have developed a

specification for quality fuel named

World−Wide Fuel Charter (WWFC) that

is expected to be applied world wide.

The WWFC consists of four categories

that depend on required emission lev-

els. In the U.S., category 4 has been

adopted. The WWFC improves air quali-

ty by providing for better emissions in

vehicle fleets, and customer satisfaction

through better vehicle performance.

CLEANER BURNING GASOLINE

Cleaner burning gasoline, including re-

formulated gasoline that contains oxy-

genates such as ethanol or MTBE is

available in many areas.

Toyota recommends the use of cleaner

burning gasoline and appropriately blended

reformulated gasoline. These types of gas-

oline provide excellent vehicle perfor-

mance, reduce vehicle emissions, and im-

prove air quality.

OXYGENATES IN GASOLINE

Toyota allows the use of oxygenate

blended gasoline where the oxygenate

content is up to 10% ethanol or 15%

MTBE. If you use gasohol in your

Toyota, be sure that it has an octane

rating no lower than 87.

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline containing methanol.

GASOLINE CONTAINING MMT

Some gasoline contain an octane en-

hancing additive called MMT (Methylcy-

clopentadienyl Manganese Tricarbonyl).

Toyota does not recommend the use of

gasoline that contains MMT. If fuel con-

taining MMT is used, your emission con-

trol system may be adversely affected.

The Malfunction Indicator Lamp on the in-

strument cluster may come on. If this hap-

pens, contact your Toyota dealer for ser-

vice.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

311

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

GASOLINE QUALITY

In a very few cases, you may experience

driveability problems caused by the partic-

ular gasoline that you are using. If you

continue to have unacceptable driveability,

try changing gasoline brands. If this does

not rectify your problem, then consult your

Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

zDo not use gasohol other than

stated above. It will cause fuel sys-

tem damage or vehicle performance

problems.

zIf driveability problems occur (poor

hot starting, vaporizing, engine

knock, etc.), discontinue the use.

zTake care not to spill gasohol dur-

ing refueling. Gasohol may cause

paint damage.

FUEL TANK CAPACITY

60 L (15.9 gal., 13.2 Imp. gal.)

The fuel pump shut off system stops sup-

plying fuel to the engine to minimize the

risk of fuel leakage when the engine stalls

or an airbag inflates upon collision. To

restart the engine after the fuel pump shut

off system activates, turn the engine

switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK” position

once and start it.

CAUTION

Inspect the ground under the vehicle

before restarting the engine. If you

find that fuel has leaked onto the

ground, the fuel system has been

damaged and is in need of repair. In

this case, do not restart the engine.

If you plan to drive your Toyota in

another country...

First, comply with the vehicle registration

laws.

Second, confirm the availability of the cor-

rect fuel (unleaded and minimum octane

number).

Fuel pump shut off system Operation in foreign countries

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

312

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The three−way catalytic converter is an

emission control device installed in the

exhaust system.

The purpose is to reduce pollutants in the

exhaust gas.

CAUTION

DKeep people and combustible mate-

rials away from the exhaust pipe

while the engine is running. The

exhaust gas is very hot.

DDo not idle or park your vehicle

over anything that might burn easi-

ly such as grass, leaves, paper or

rags.

NOTICE

A large amount of unburned gases

flowing into the three−way catalytic

converter may cause it to overheat

and create a fire hazard. To prevent

this and other damage, observe the

following precautions:

zUse only unleaded gasoline.

zDo not drive with an extremely low

fuel level; running out of fuel could

cause the engine to misfire, creat-

ing an excessive load on the three−

way catalytic converter.

zDo not allow the engine to run at

idle speed for more than 20 min-

utes.

zAvoid racing the engine.

zDo not push−start or pull−start your

vehicle.

zDo not turn off the engine while the

vehicle is moving.

zKeep your engine in good running

order. Malfunctions in the engine

electrical system, electronic ignition

system/distributor ignition system

or fuel systems could cause an ex-

tremely high three−way catalytic

converter temperature.

zIf the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, take your

vehicle in for a check−up as soon

as possible. Remember, your Toyota

dealer knows your vehicle and its

three−way catalytic converter sys-

tem best.

zTo ensure that the three−way cata-

lytic converter and the entire emis-

sion control system operate proper-

ly, your vehicle must receive the

periodic inspections required by the

Toyota Maintenance Schedule. For

scheduled maintenance information,

refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment”.

Three−way catalytic converters

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

313

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DExhaust gases include harmful car-

bon monoxide (CO) that is colorless

and odorless. Inhaling exhaust

gases may lead to death or a seri-

ous health hazard.

DThe exhaust should be checked

occasionally. If there is a hole or

crack caused by corrosion, damage

to a joint or abnormal exhaust

noise, be sure to have the vehicle

inspected and repaired by your

Toyota dealer. Failure to do so may

allow exhaust gases to enter the

vehicle, resulting in death or a

serious health hazard.

DIf the vehicle is in a poorly venti-

lated area, turn the engine off. In a

closed area, such as a garage, ex-

haust gases may collect and enter

the vehicle. This may lead to death

or a serious health hazard.

DDo not remain for a long time in a

parked vehicle with the engine run-

ning. If it is unavoidable, however,

do so only in an unconfined area

and adjust the heating or cooling

system to force outside air into the

vehicle.

DKeep the back door closed while

driving. An open or unsealed back

door may cause exhaust gases to

be drawn into the vehicle.

DTo allow proper operation of your

vehicle’s ventilation system, keep

the inlet grilles in front of the wind-

shield clear of snow, leaves, or oth-

er obstructions.

DIf the smell of exhaust is noticed

inside the vehicle, open the win-

dows. Large amounts of exhaust in

the vehicle can cause driver drowsi-

ness and an accident, resulting in

death or a serious health hazard.

Have the vehicle inspected by your

Toyota dealer immediately.

DDo not leave the engine running in

an area with snow build−up, or

where it is snowing. If snowbanks

build up around the vehicle while

the engine is running, exhaust

gases may collect and enter the ve-

hicle. This may lead to death or a

serious health hazard.

DWhen taking a nap in the vehicle,

always turn the engine off. Other-

wise, you may accidentally move

the shift lever or depress the accel-

erator pedal, which could cause an

accident or fire due to engine over-

heating. Additionally, if the vehicle

is parked in a poorly ventilated

area, exhaust gases may collect and

enter the vehicle, leading to death

or a serious health hazard.

Engine exhaust cautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

314

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

FUNCTIONS OF ENGINE OIL

Engine oil has the primary functions of

lubricating and cooling the inside of the

engine, and plays a major role in main-

taining the engine in proper working order.

ENGINE OIL CONSUMPTION

It is normal that an engine should con-

sume some engine oil during normal

engine operation. The causes of oil

consumption in a normal engine are as

follows.

DOil is used to lubricate pistons, piston

rings and cylinders. A thin film of oil

is left on the cylinder wall when a pis-

ton moves downwards in the cylinder.

High negative pressure generated when

the vehicle is decelerating sucks some

of this oil into the combustion chamber.

This oil as well as some part of the oil

film left on the cylinder wall is burned

by the high temperature combustion

gases during the combustion process.

DOil is also used to lubricate the stems

of the intake valves. Some of this oil

is sucked into the combustion chamber

together with the intake air and is

burned along with the fuel. High tem-

perature exhaust gases also burn the

oil used to lubricate the exhaust valve

stems.

The amount of engine oil consumed de-

pends on the viscosity of the oil, the

quality of the oil and the conditions the

vehicle is driven under.

More oil is consumed by high−speed driv-

ing and frequent acceleration and decel-

eration.

A new engine consumes more oil, since

its pistons, piston rings and cylinder walls

have not become conditioned.

Oil consumption: Max. 1.0 L per 1000

km (1.1 qt./600 miles, 0.9 Imp. qt./600

miles)

When judging the amount of oil con-

sumption, note that the oil may become

diluted and make it difficult to judge

the true level accurately.

As an example, if a vehicle is used for

repeated short trips, and consumes a nor-

mal amount of oil, the dipstick may not

show any drop in the oil level at all, even

after 1000 km (600 miles) or more. This

is because the oil is gradually becoming

diluted with fuel or moisture, making it

appear that the oil level has not changed.

The diluting ingredients evaporate out

when the vehicle is then driven at high

speeds, as on an expressway, making it

appear that oil is excessively consumed

after driving at high speeds.

IMPORTANCE OF ENGINE OIL LEVEL

CHECK

One of the most important points in prop-

er vehicle maintenance is to keep the en-

gine oil at the optimum level so that oil

function will not be impaired. Therefore, it

is essential that the oil level be checked

regularly. Toyota recommends that the oil

level be checked every time you refuel

the vehicle.

NOTICE

Failure to check the oil level regularly

could lead to serious engine trouble

due to insufficient oil.

For detailed information on oil level check,

see “Checking the engine oil level” on

page 404 in Section 7−2.

Facts about engine oil

consumption

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

315

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped

spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only iridium−tipped spark plugs.

Do not adjust gaps for engine perfor-

mance or smooth driveability.

Your engine is fitted with iridium−tipped

spark plugs.

NOTICE

Use only Toyota genuine iridium−

tipped spark plugs. Do not adjust

gaps for engine performance or

smooth driveability.

For details about the spark plug type, see

“Service specifications” on page 429 in

Section 8.

The tandem master cylinder brake system

is a hydraulic system with two separate

sub−systems. If either sub−system should

fail, the other will still work. However, the

pedal will be harder to press, and your

stopping distance will increase. Also, the

brake system warning light may come on.

CAUTION

Do not drive your vehicle with only a

single brake system. Have your

brakes fixed immediately.

BRAKE BOOSTER

The brake booster uses engine vacuum to

power−assist the brakes. If the engine

should quit while you are driving, you can

bring the vehicle to a stop with normal

pedal pressure. There is enough reserved

vacuum for one or two stops—but no

more!

Iridium−tipped spark plugs

(2.4 L 4−cylinder [2AZ−FE]

engine)

Iridium−tipped spark plugs

(3.5 L V6 [2GR−FE] engine) Brake system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

316

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DDo not pump the brake pedal if the

engine stalls. Each push on the

pedal uses up your reserved vacu-

um.

DEven if the power assist is com-

pletely lost, the brakes will still

work. But you will have to push the

pedal hard, much harder than nor-

mal. And your braking distance will

increase.

ANTI−LOCK BRAKE SYSTEM

The anti−lock brake system is designed

to help prevent lock−up of the wheels

during a sudden braking or braking on

slippery road surfaces. This assists in

providing directional stability and steer-

ing performance of the vehicle under

these circumstances.

Effective way to press the ABS brake

pedal: When the anti−lock brake system

function is in action, you may feel the

brake pedal pulsating and hear a noise.

In this situation, to let the anti−lock

brake system work for you, just hold the

brake pedal down more firmly. Do not

pump the brake in a panic stop. This

will result in reduced braking performan-

ce.

The anti−lock brake system becomes op-

erative after the vehicle has accelerated

to a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

Depressing the brake pedal on slippery

road surfaces such as on a manhole cov-

er, a steel plate at a construction site,

joints in a bridge, etc. on a rainy day

tends to activate the anti−lock brake sys-

tem.

A sound may be heard from the engine

compartment for a few seconds when the

engine is started or just after the vehicle

begins to move. This means that the anti−

lock brake system is in the self−check

mode. This sound does not indicate a

malfunction.

When the anti−lock brake system is ac-

tivated, the following conditions may

occur. They do not indicate a malfunc-

tion of the system:

DYou may hear the anti−lock brake sys-

tem operating and feel the brake pedal

pulsating and the vibrations of the ve-

hicle body and steering wheel. You

may also hear the motor sound in the

engine compartment even after the ve-

hicle is stopped.

DAt the end of the anti−lock brake sys-

tem activation, the brake pedal may

move a little forward.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

317

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Do not overestimate the anti−lock

brake system: Although the anti−lock

brake system assists in providing ve-

hicle control, it is still important to

drive with all due care and maintain

a moderate speed and safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you, be-

cause there are limits to the vehicle

stability and effectiveness of steering

wheel operation even with the anti−

lock brake system on.

If tire grip performance exceeds its

capability, or if hydroplaning occurs

during high speed driving in the rain,

the anti−lock brake system does not

provide vehicle control.

Anti−lock brake system is not de-

signed to shorten the stopping dis-

tance: Always drive at a moderate

speed and maintain a safe distance

from the vehicle in front of you.

Compared with vehicles without an

anti−lock brake system, your vehicle

may require a longer stopping dis-

tance in the following cases:

DDriving on rough, gravel or snow−

covered roads.

DDriving with tire chains installed.

DDriving over the steps such as the

joints on the road.

DDriving on roads where the road

surface is pitted or has other differ-

ences in surface height.

Install all 4 tires of specified size at

appropriate pressure: The anti−lock

brake system detects vehicle speeds

using the speed sensors for respec-

tive wheels’ turning speeds. The use

of tires other than specified may fail

to detect the accurate turning speed

resulting in a longer stopping dis-

tance.

For the U.S.A.

For Canada

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

318

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

“ABS” warning light

The light comes on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position. If

the anti−lock brake system and the brake

assist system work properly, the light

turns off after a few seconds. Thereafter,

if the system malfunctions, the light

comes on again.

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

following systems do not operate, but the

brake system still operates conventionally.

DAnti−lock brake system

DBrake assist system

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DEnhanced vehicle stability control sys-

tem

DDownhill assist control system

DHill−start assist control system

When the “ABS” warning light is on (and

the brake system warning light is off), the

anti−lock brake system does not operate

so that the wheels could lock up during

a sudden braking or braking on slippery

road surfaces.

If either of the following conditions

occurs, this indicates a malfunction

somewhere in the components moni-

tored by the warning light. Contact your

Toyota dealer as soon as possible to

service the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position, or remains on.

DThe light comes on while you are driv-

ing.

A warning light turning on briefly during

operation does not indicate a problem.

CAUTION

If the “ABS” warning light remains on

together with the brake system warn-

ing light, immediately stop your ve-

hicle at a safe place and contact your

Toyota dealer.

In this case, not only the anti−lock

brake system will fail but also the

vehicle will become extremely unsta-

ble during braking.

DRUM−IN−DISC TYPE PARKING BRAKE

SYSTEM

Your vehicle has a drum−in−disc type

parking brake system. This type of brake

system needs bedding−down of the brake

shoes periodically or whenever the parking

brake shoes and/or drums are replaced.

Have your Toyota dealer perform the bed-

ding−down.

BRAKE ASSIST SYSTEM

When you slam the brakes on, the

brake assist system judges as an emer-

gency stop and provides more powerful

braking for a driver who cannot hold

down the brake pedal firmly.

When you slam the brakes on, more pow-

erful braking will be applied. At this time,

you may hear a sound in the engine

compartment and feel the vibrations of the

brake pedal. This does not indicate a mal-

function.

The brake assist system becomes opera-

tive after the vehicle has accelerated to

a speed in excess of approximately 10

km/h (6 mph). It stops operating when the

vehicle decelerates to a speed below

approximately 5 km/h (3 mph).

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

319

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

For an explanation of this system’s warn-

ing light, see “Service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers” on page 129 in Sec-

tion 1−6.

The brake pad wear limit indicators on

your disc brakes give a warning noise

when the brake pads are worn to where

replacement is required.

If you hear a squealing or scraping noise

while driving, have the brake pads

checked and replaced by your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible. Expensive ro-

tor damage can result if the pads are not

replaced when necessary.

The electric power steering system, us-

ing an electric motor, assists the turn-

ing of the steering wheel.

In the following cases, you may feel the

steering becomes heavy. However, the

electric power steering system warning

light does not come on. (Because it is

not a malfunction.)

DWhen maneuvering or turning frequently

over a long time

The power steering effect will be re-

duced to prevent the system from over-

heating. Avoid turning the steering

wheel, or stop the vehicle and turn the

engine switch to the “ACC” or “LOCK”

position. The system will become cool

in about 10 minutes.

NOTICE

Frequent maneuvering and turning

over a long time may cause damage

to the system in which the mecha-

nism prevents overheating of the elec-

tric power steering system.

Brake pad wear limit

indicators Electric power steering system

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

320

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DWhen the battery is discharged

Check the battery’s condition. If neces-

sary, recharge or replace the battery.

For details, see “Checking battery con-

dition” on page 418 in Section 7−3.

Electric power steering system warning

light

The light comes on when the engine

switch is turned to the “ON” position. If

the electric power steering system works

properly, the light turns off after a few

seconds. If the system has malfunctions,

the light comes on again.

If the following conditions occur, this

indicates a malfunction somewhere in

the components monitored by the warn-

ing light system. Contact your Toyota

dealer as soon as possible to service

the vehicle.

DThe light does not come on when the

engine switch is turned to the “ON”

position or remains on.

DThe light stays on while you are driv-

ing.

CAUTION

If the electric power steering system

warning light comes on, take your ve-

hicle to your Toyota dealer as soon

as possible. In this case, more effort

is required for the steering wheel to

turn than usual. Drive your vehicle

while firmly gripping the steering

wheel.

INFORMATION

When the steering wheel is turned, a

motor operating sound (whining

sound) may be heard. This occurs

when the power steering motor works

and is not defective.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

321

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The rear step bumper is for rear end

protection and easier step−up loading.

To get on the rear step bumper, use the

shaded area between the arrows in the

illustration.

CAUTION

DDo not allow more than one person

to get on the rear step bumper at

a time. It is designed for only one

person.

DNever drive the vehicle with anyone

on the rear step bumper.

Under the right front seat

Top left of the instrument panel

The vehicle identification number (VIN)

is the legal identifier for your vehicle.

This number is stamped under the right

front seat and top left of the instrument

panel where it can be seen through the

windshield from the outside.

This is the primary identification number

for your Toyota. It is used in registering

the ownership of your vehicle.

Rear step bumper

Your Toyota’s identification—

—Vehicle identification

number

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

322

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The vehicle identification number (VIN) is

also on the Certification Label.

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

The engine number is stamped on the

engine block as shown.

—Engine number

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

323

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Your new vehicle carries theft preven-

tion labels which are approximately 47

mm (1.85 in.) by 12 mm (0.47 in.).

The purpose of these labels is to reduce

the incidence of vehicle thefts by facilitat-

ing the tracing and recovery of parts from

stolen vehicles. The label is designed so

that once it is applied to a surface, any

attempt to remove it will result in destroy-

ing the integrity of the label. Transferring

these labels intact from one part to anoth-

er, will be impossible.

NOTICE

You should not attempt to remove the

theft prevention labels as it may vio-

late certain state or federal laws.

CAUTION

Do not modify the suspension/chassis

with lift kits, spacers, springs, etc. It

can cause dangerous handling charac-

teristics, resulting in loss of control.

Theft prevention labels

(except for Canada) Suspension and chassis

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

324

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

This illustration indicates typical tire

symbols.

1. Tire size—For details, see “—Tire

size” on page 326.

2. DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)—For details, see

“—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)” on page 325.

3. Uniform tire quality grading—

For details, see “—Uniform tire

quality grading” that follows.

4. The location of the treadwear

indicators—For details, see

“Checking and replacing tires” on

page 410.

5. Tire ply composition and mate-

rials—Plies mean a layer of rub-

ber−coated parallel cords. Cords

mean the strands forming the plies

in the tire.

6. Radial tire or bias−ply tires—A

radial tire has “RADIAL” on the

sidewall. A tire not marked with

“RADIAL” is a bias−ply tire.

Tire information—

—Tire symbols

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

325

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

7. “TUBELESS” or “TUBE

TYPE”—A tubeless tire does not

have a tube inside the tire and air

is directly filled in the tire. A tube

type tire has a tube inside the tire

and the tube maintains the air

pressure.

8. Load limit at maximum cold tire

inflation pressure—For details,

see “Checking and replacing tires”

on page 410.

9. Maximum cold tire inflation

pressure—This means the pres-

sure to which a tire may be in-

flated. For details about recom-

mended cold tire inflation

pressure, see “Tires” on page 433.

10.Summer tire or all season

tire—An all season tire has “M+S”

on the sidewall. The tire not

marked with “M+S” is a summer

tire. For details, see “Types of

tires” on page 338.

This illustration indicates typical DOT

and Tire Identification Number (TIN).

1. “DOT” symbol

2. Tire Identification Number (TIN)

3. Tire manufacturer’s identification

mark

4. Tire size code

5. Manufacturer’s optional tire type

code (3 or 4 letters)

6. Manufacturing week

7. Manufacturing year

The “DOT” symbol certifies that the

tire conforms to applicable Federal

Motor Vehicle Safety Standards.

—DOT and Tire Identification

Number (TIN)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

326

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

This illustration indicates typical tire

size.

1. Tire use (P=Passenger car,

T=Temporary use)

2. Section width (in millimeters)

3. Aspect ratio (tire height to section

width)

4. Tire construction code (R=Radial,

D=Diagonal)

5. Wheel diameter (in inches)

6. Load index (2 digits or 3 digits)

7. Speed symbol (alphabet with one

letter)

1. Section width

2. Tire height

3. Wheel diameter

1. Bead

2. Sidewall

3. Shoulder

4. Tread

5. Belt

6. Inner liner

7. Reinforcing rubber

8. Carcass

9. Rim lines

10.Bead wires

11.Chafer

—Tire size —Name of each section of tire

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

327

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

This information has been prepared

in accordance with regulations issued

by the National Highway Traffic Safe-

ty Administration of the U.S. Depart-

ment of Transportation. It provides

the purchasers and/or prospective

purchasers of Toyota vehicles with in-

formation on uniform tire quality grad-

ing.

Your Toyota dealer will help answer

any questions you may have as you

read this information.

DOT quality grades—All passenger

vehicle tires must conform to Fed-

eral Safety Requirements in addi-

tion to these grades. Quality

grades can be found where appli-

cable on the tire sidewall between

tread shoulder and maximum sec-

tion width. For example: Treadwear

200 Traction AA Temperature A

Treadwear—The treadwear grade is

a comparative rating based on the

wear rate of the tire when tested un-

der controlled conditions on a speci-

fied government test course. For ex-

ample, a tire graded 150 would wear

one and a half (1−1/2) times as well

on the government course as a tire

graded 100. The relative performance

of tires depends upon the actual

conditions of their use, however, and

may depart significantly from the

norm due to variations in driving hab-

its, service practices and differences

in road characteristics and climate.

Traction AA, A, B, C—The traction

grades, from highest to lowest, are

AA, A, B, and C, and they represent

the tire’s ability to stop on wet pave-

ment as measured under controlled

conditions on specified government

test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.

A tire marked C may have poor trac-

tion performance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned

to this tire is based on braking

(straight ahead) traction tests and

does not include cornering (turning)

traction.

—Uniform tire quality grading

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

328

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Temperature A, B, C—The tempera-

ture grades are A (the highest), B,

and C, representing the tire’s resis-

tance to the generation of heat and

its ability to dissipate heat when

tested under controlled conditions on

a specified indoor laboratory test

wheel. Sustained high temperature

can cause the material of the tire to

degenerate and reduce tire life, and

excessive temperature can lead to

sudden tire failure. The grade C cor-

responds to a level of performance

which all passenger car tires must

meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle

Safety Standard No.109. Grades B

and A represent higher levels of per-

formance on the laboratory test wheel

than the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grades for

this tire are established for a tire that

is properly inflated and not over-

loaded. Excessive speed, underinfla-

tion, or excessive loading, either sep-

arately or in combination, can cause

heat buildup and possible tire failure.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

329

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Tire related term Meaning

Cold tire inflation pressure

tire inflation pressure when the vehicle has been parked for at least 3

hours or more, or it has not been driven more than 1.5 km or 1 mile

under that condition

Maximum inflation pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated and it

is shown on the sidewall of the tire

Recommended inflation pressure cold tire inflation pressure recommended by a manufacturer

Accessory weight

the combined weight (in excess of those standard items which may be

replaced) of automatic transmission, power steering, power brakes, power

windows, power seats, radio, and heater, to the extent that these items

are available as factory−installed equipment (whether installed or not)

Curb weight

the weight of a motor vehicle with standard equipment including the

maximum capacity of fuel, oil, and coolant, and, if so equipped, air

conditioning and additional weight optional engine

Maximum loaded vehicle weight

the sum of—

(a) curb weight;

(b) accessory weight;

(d) production options weight

Normal occupant weight 68 kg (150 lb.) times the number of occupants specified in the second

column of Table 1 that follows

Occupant distribution distribution of occupants in a vehicle as specified in the third column of Table

1 that follows

—Glossary of tire terminology

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

330

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Tire related term Meaning

Production options weight

the combined weight of those installed regular production options weighing

over 2.3 kg (5 lb.) in excess of those standard items which they replace,

not previously considered in curb weight or accessory weight, including

heavy duty brakes, ride levelers, roof rack, heavy duty battery, and special

trim

Rim a metal support for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads

are seated

Rim diameter (Wheel diameter) nominal diameter of the bead seat

Rim size designation rim diameter and width

Rim type designation the industry of manufacturer’s designation for a rim by style or code

Rim width nominal distance between rim flanges

Vehicle capacity weight

(Total load capacity)

the rated cargo and luggage load plus 68 kg (150 lb.) times the vehicle’s desig-

nated seating capacity

Vehicle maximum load on the tire the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the maximum loaded vehicle weight and dividing by two

Vehicle normal load on the tire

the load on an individual tire that is determined by distributing to each axle

its share of the curb weight, accessory weight, and normal occupant weight

(distributed in accordance with Table 1 that follows) and dividing by two

Weather side the surface area of the rim not covered by the inflated tire

Bead the part of the tire that is made of steel wires, wrapped or reinforced by ply

cords and that is shaped to fit the rim

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

331

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Tire related term Meaning

Bead separation a breakdown of the bond between components in the bead

Bias ply tire a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at

alternate angles substantially less than 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Carcass the tire structure, except tread and sidewall rubber which, when inflated, bears

the load

Chunking the breaking away of pieces of the tread or sidewall

Cord the strands forming the plies in the tire

Cord separation the parting of cords from adjacent rubber compounds

Cracking any parting within the tread, sidewall, or innerliner of the tire extending to cord

material

a pneumatic tire with an inverted flange tire and rim system in which the rim

is designed with rim flanges pointed radially inward and the tire is designed

to fit on the underside of the rim in a manner that encloses the rim flanges

inside the air cavity of the tire

Extra load tire a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures

than the corresponding standard tire

Groove the space between two adjacent tread ribs

Innerliner the layer(s) forming the inside surface of a tubeless tire that contains the inflat-

ing medium within the tire

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

332

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Tire related term Meaning

Innerliner separation the parting of the innerliner from cord material in the carcass

Intended outboard sidewall

(A) the sidewall that contains a whitewall, bears white lettering or bears

manufacturer, brand, and/or model name molding that is higher or

deeper than the same molding on the other sidewall of the tire, or

(B) the outward facing sidewall of an asymmetrical tire that has a particular

side that must always face outward when mounted on a vehicle

Light truck (LT) tire a tire designated by its manufacturer as primarily intended for use on lightweight

trucks or multipurpose passenger vehicles

Load rating the maximum load that a tire is rated to carry for a given inflation pressure

Maximum load rating the load rating for a tire at the maximum permissible inflation pressure for that

tire

Maximum permissible inflation

pressure the maximum cold inflation pressure to which a tire may be inflated

Measuring rim the rim on which a tire is fitted for physical dimension requirements

Open splice any parting at any junction of tread, sidewall, or innerliner that extends to cord

material

Outer diameter the overall diameter of an inflated new tire

Overall width the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire,

including elevations due to labeling, decorations, or protective bands or ribs

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

333

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Tire related term Meaning

Passenger car tire

a tire intended for use on passenger cars, multipurpose passenger vehicles,

and trucks, that have a gross vehicle weight rating (GVWR) of 10,000 lb. or

less.

Ply a layer of rubber−coated parallel cords

Ply separation a parting of rubber compound between adjacent plies

Pneumatic tire

a mechanical device made of rubber, chemicals, fabric and steel or other mate-

rials, that, when mounted on an automotive wheel, provides the traction and

contains the gas or fluid that sustains the load

Radial ply tire a pneumatic tire in which the ply cords that extend to the beads are laid at

substantially 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread

Reinforced tire a tire designed to operate at higher loads and at higher inflation pressures

than the corresponding standard tire

Section width the linear distance between the exteriors of the sidewalls of an inflated tire,

excluding elevations due to labeling, decoration, or protective bands

Sidewall that portion of a tire between the tread and bead

Sidewall separation the parting of the rubber compound from the cord material in the sidewall

Snow tire

a tire that attains a traction index equal to or greater than 110, compared to

the ASTM E−1136 Standard Reference Test Tire, when using the snow traction

test as described in ASTM F−1805−00, Standard Test Method for Single Wheel

Driving Traction in a Straight Line on Snow−and Ice−Covered Surfaces, and

which is marked with an Alpine Symbol ( ) on at least one sidewall

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

334

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Tire related term Meaning

Test rim the rim on which a tire is fitted for testing, and may be any rim listed as appropri-

ate for use with that tire

Tread that portion of a tire that comes into contact with the road

Tread rib a tread section running circumferentially around a tire

Tread separation pulling away of the tread from the tire carcass

Treadwear indicators (TWI) the projections within the principal grooves designed to give a visual indication

of the degrees of wear of the tread

Wheel−holding fixture the fixture used to hold the wheel and tire assembly securely during testing

Table 1—Occupant loading and distribution for vehicle normal load for various designated seating capacities

Designated seating capacity,

number of occupants

Vehicle normal load, number of

occupants

Occupant distribution in a normally

loaded vehicle

2 through 4 22 in front

5 through 10 32 in front, 1 in second seat

11 through 15 52 in front, 1 in second seat, 1 in third

seat, 1 in fourth seat

16 through 20 72 in front, 2 in second seat, 2 in third

seat, 1 in fourth seat

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

335

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Vehicle load limits include total load

capacity, seating capacity, towing ca-

pacity and cargo capacity. Follow the

load limits shown below. Total load ca-

pacity and seating capacity are also

described on the tire and loading in-

formation label. For location of the tire

and loading information label, see

“Checking tire inflation pressure” on

page 408.

Total load capacity:

Without third seat

375 kg (825 lb.)

With third seat

525 kg (1155 lb.)

Total load capacity means combined

weight of occupants, cargo and lug-

gage. Tongue load is included when

trailer towing.

Seating capacity:

Without third seat

Total 5 (Front 2, Rear 3)

With third seat

Total 7 (Front 2, Rear 5)

Seating capacity means the maximum

number of occupants whose esti-

mated average weight is 68 kg (150

lb.) per person. Depending on the

weight of each person, the seating ca-

pacity given may exceed the total

load capacity.

NOTICE

Even if the number of occupants

are within the seating capacity,

do not exceed the total load ca-

pacity.

Towing capacity:

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

680 kg (1500 lb.)

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

Without towing package

907 kg (2000 lb.)

With towing package

1588 kg (3500 lb.)

Towing capacity means the maximum

gross trailer weight (trailer weight plus

its cargo weight) that your vehicle is

able to tow.

Cargo capacity

Cargo capacity may increase or de-

crease depending on the size (weight)

and the number of occupants. For de-

tails, see “Capacity and distribution”

that follows.

CAUTION

Do not apply the load more than

each load limit. That may cause

not only damage to the tires, but

also deterioration to the steering

ability and braking ability, which

may cause an accident.

Vehicle load limits

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

336

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When stowing cargo and luggage in

the vehicle, observe the following:

DPut cargo and luggage in the lug-

gage compartment when at all

possible. Be sure all items are se-

cured in place.

DBe careful to keep the vehicle bal-

anced. Locating the weight as far

forward as possible helps maintain

balance.

DFor better fuel economy, do not

carry unneeded weight.

CAUTION

DTo prevent cargo and luggage

from sliding forward during

braking, do not stack anything

in the luggage compartment

higher than the seatbacks.

Keep cargo and luggage low,

as close to the floor as pos-

sible.

DNever allow anyone to ride in

the luggage compartment. It is

not designed for passengers.

They should ride in their seats

with their seat belts properly

fastened. Otherwise, they are

much more likely to suffer

death or serious bodily injury,

in the event of sudden braking

or a collision.

DDo not place anything on the

flattened seat, or it may slide

forward during braking.

DDo not place anything on the

luggage cover. Such items may

be thrown about and possibly

injure people in the vehicle

during sudden braking or an

accident. Secure all items in a

safe place.

DTo prevent cargo and luggage

from sliding forward during

braking, do not place anything

on the net higher than the rear

seatbacks. Otherwise, such

items may be thrown about and

possibly injure people in the

vehicle during sudden braking

or an accident.

DDo not drive with objects left

on top of the instrument panel.

They may interfere with the

driver’s field of view. Or they

may move during sharp vehicle

acceleration or turning, and im-

pair the driver’s control of the

vehicle. In an accident they

may injure the vehicle occu-

pants.

Cargo and luggage—

—Stowage precautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

337

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Cargo capacity depends on the to-

tal weight of the occupants.

(Cargo capacity) = (Total load capac-

ity) – (Total weight of occupants)

Steps for Determining Correct

Load Limit—

(1) Locate the statement “The com-

bined weight of occupants and

cargo should never exceed XXX

kg or XXX lbs.” on your vehicle’s

placard.

(2) Determine the combined weight

of the driver and passengers that

will be riding in your vehicle.

(3) Subtract the combined weight of

the driver and passengers from

XXX kg or XXX lbs.

(4) The resulting figure equals the

available amount of cargo and

luggage load capacity. For exam-

ple, if the “XXX” amount equals

1400 lbs. and there will be five

150 lb passengers in your ve-

hicle, the amount of available

cargo and luggage load capacity

is 650 lbs. (1400–750

(5x150)=650 lbs.)

(5) Determine the combined weight

of luggage and cargo being

loaded on the vehicle. That

weight may not safely exceed the

available cargo and luggage load

capacity calculated in Step 4.

(6) If your vehicle will be towing a

trailer, load from your trailer will

be transferred to your vehicle.

Consult this manual to determine

how this reduces the available

cargo and luggage load capacity

of your vehicle.

For details about trailer towing, see

page 348.

Cargo

capacity

Total load

capacity

Example on Your Vehicle

In case that 2 people with the com-

bined weight of 166 kg (366 lb.) are

riding in your vehicle, the available

amount of cargo and luggage load ca-

pacity will be as follows:

Without third seat

Total load capacity: 375 kg (825 lb.)

375 kg – 166 kg = 209 kg.

(825 lb. – 366 lb. = 459 lb.)

With third seat

Total load capacity: 525 kg (1155 lb.)

525 kg – 166 kg = 359 kg.

(1155 lb. – 366 lb. = 789 lb.)

—Capacity and distribution

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

338

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

From this condition, if 3 more passen-

gers with the combined weight of 176

kg (388 lb.) get on, the available car-

go and luggage load will be reduced

as follows:

Without third seat

209 kg – 176 kg = 33 kg.

(459 lb. – 388 lb. = 71 lb.)

With third seat

359 kg – 176 kg = 183 kg.

(789 lb. – 388 lb. = 401 lb.)

As shown in the above example, if the

number of occupants increases, the

cargo and luggage load equaling the

combined weight of occupants who

got on later must be reduced. In other

words, if the increase in the number

of occupants causes the excess of

the total load capacity (combined

weight of occupants plus cargo and

luggage load), you have to reduce the

cargo and luggage on your vehicle.

For details about total load capacity,

see “Vehicle load limits” on page 335.

CAUTION

Even if the total load of occu-

pant’s weight and the cargo load

is less than the total load capac-

ity, do not apply the load uneven-

ly. That may cause not only dam-

age to the tire but also deteriora-

tion to the steering ability due to

unbalance of the vehicle, causing

an accident.

Determine what kind of tires your

vehicle is originally equipped with.

1. Summer tires

Summer tires are high−speed capabil-

ity tires best suited to highway driving

under dry conditions.

Since summer tires do not have the

same traction performance as snow

tires, summer tires are inadequate for

driving on snow−covered or icy roads.

For driving on snow−covered or icy

roads, we recommend using snow

tires. If installing snow tires, be sure

to replace all four tires.

2. All season tires

All season tires are designed to pro-

vide better traction in snow and to be

adequate for driving in most winter

conditions, as well as for use all year

round.

Types of tires

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

339

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

All season tires, however, do not have

adequate traction performance

compared with snow tires in heavy or

loose snow. Also, all season tires fall

short in acceleration and handling

performance compared with summer

tires in highway driving.

The details about how to distinguish

summer tires from all season tires are

described on page 324.

CAUTION

DDo not mix summer and all sea-

son tires on your vehicle as

this can cause dangerous han-

dling characteristics, resulting

in loss of control.

DDo not use tire other than the

manufacturer’s designated

tires, and never mix tires or

wheels of the sizes different

from the originals.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

340

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

341

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

STARTING AND DRIVING

Starting and driving

Before starting the engine 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to start the engine 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tips for driving in various conditions 343. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Driving in the rain 344. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Off−road driving precautions 345. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Winter driving tips 346. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Dinghy towing 347. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Trailer towing 348. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

How to save fuel and make your vehicle last longer 353. . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 3

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

342

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Check the area around the vehicle be-

fore entering it.

2. Adjust seat position, seatback angle,

seat cushion height, head restraint

height, steering wheel angle and steer-

ing column length.

3. Adjust the inside and outside rear view

mirrors.

4. Lock all doors.

5. Fasten seat belts.

1. Apply the parking brake firmly.

2. Turn off unnecessary lights and acces-

sories.

3. Put the selector lever in “P”. If you

need to restart the engine while the

vehicle is moving, put the selector le-

ver in “N”. A starter safety device will

prevent the starter from operating if the

selector lever is in any drive position.

4. Depress the brake pedal and hold it to

the floor until driving off.

Before starting the engine, be sure to fol-

low the instructions in “(a) Before crank-

ing”.

Normal starting procedure

The multiport fuel injection system/sequen-

tial multiport fuel injection system in your

engine automatically controls the proper

air−fuel mixture for starting. You can start

a cold or hot engine as follows:

With your foot off the accelerator pedal,

crank the engine by turning the engine

switch to the “START” position. Release it

when the engine starts.

Engine should be warmed up by driving,

not in idle. For warming up, drive with

smoothly turning engine until engine cool-

ant temperature is within normal range.

If the engine stalls...

Simply restart it, using the correct proce-

dure given in normal starting.

If the engine will not start...

See “If your vehicle will not start” on page

356 in Section 4.

Before starting the engine

How to start the engine—

(a) Before cranking (b) Starting the engine

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

343

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

NOTICE

zDo not crank for more than 30 se-

conds at a time. This may overheat

the starter and wiring systems.

zDo not race a cold engine.

zIf the engine becomes difficult to

start or stalls frequently, have the

engine checked immediately.

DAlways slow down in gusty crosswinds.

This will allow you much better control.

DDrive slowly onto curbs and, if pos-

sible, at a right angle. Avoid driving

onto high, sharp−edged objects and

other road hazards. Failure to do so

can lead to severe tire damage such

as a tire burst.

Drive slowly when passing over bumps

or travelling on a bumpy road. Other-

wise the impact could cause severe

damage to the tires and/or wheels.

DWhen parking on a hill, turn the front

wheels until they touch the curb so

that the vehicle will not roll. Apply the

parking brake, and place the transmis-

sion in “P”. If necessary, block the

wheels.

DWashing your vehicle or driving through

deep water may get the brakes wet. To

see whether they are wet, check that

there is no traffic near you, and then

press the pedal lightly. If you do not

feel a normal braking force, the brakes

are probably wet. To dry them, drive

the vehicle cautiously while lightly

pressing the brake pedal with the park-

ing brake applied. If they still do not

work safely, pull to the side of the road

and call a Toyota dealer for assistance.

CAUTION

DBefore driving off, make sure that

the parking brake is fully released

and the parking brake reminder

light is off.

DDo not leave your vehicle unat-

tended while the engine is running.

DDo not rest your foot on the brake

pedal while driving. It can cause

dangerous overheating, needless

wear, and poor fuel economy.

DTo drive down a long or steep hill,

reduce your speed and downshift.

Remember, if you ride the brakes

excessively, they may overheat and

not work properly.

DBe careful when accelerating, up-

shifting, downshifting or braking on

a slippery surface. Sudden accelera-

tion or engine braking, could cause

the vehicle to skid or spin.

Tips for driving in various

conditions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

344

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DDo not drive in excess of the speed

limit. Even if the legal speed limit

permits it, do not drive over 140

km/h (85 mph) unless your vehicle

has high−speed capability tires.

Driving over 140 km/h (85 mph) may

result in tire failure, loss of control

and possible injury. Be sure to con-

sult a tire dealer to determine

whether the tires on your vehicle

are high−speed capability tires or

not before driving at such speeds.

DDo not continue normal driving

when the brakes are wet. If they are

wet, your vehicle will require a

longer stopping distance, and it

may pull to one side when the

brakes are applied. Also, the park-

ing brake will not hold the vehicle

securely.

Driving on a slippery road surface

Drive carefully when it is raining, because

visibility will be reduced, the windows may

become fogged−up, and the road will be

slippery.

DDrive carefully when it starts to rain,

because the road surface will be espe-

cially slippery.

DRefrain from high speeds when driving

on an expressway in the rain, because

there may be a layer of water between

the tires and the road surface,

preventing the steering and brakes

from operating properly.

CAUTION

DSudden braking, acceleration and

steering when driving on a slippery

road surface may cause tire slip-

page and reduce your ability to

control the vehicle, resulting in an

accident.

DSudden changes in engine speed,

such as sudden engine braking,

may cause the vehicle to skid, re-

sulting in an accident.

DAfter driving through a puddle,

lightly depress the brake pedal to

make sure that the brakes are func-

tioning properly. Wet brake pads

may prevent the brakes from func-

tioning properly. If the brakes on

only one side are wet and not func-

tioning properly, steering control

may be affected, resulting in an ac-

cident.

Driving in the rain

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

345

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When encountering flooded roads

Do not drive on a road that has flooded

after heavy rain etc. Doing so may cause

serious damage to the vehicle.

NOTICE

Driving on a flooded road may cause

the engine to stall as well as cause

serious vehicle malfunctions such as

shorts in electrical components and

engine damage from water immersion.

In the event that you drive on a

flooded road and the vehicle is

flooded, be sure to have your Toyota

dealer check brake function, changes

in quantity and quality of oil and fluid

used for the engine, transaxle, trans-

fer (four−wheel drive models), differ-

ential, etc. and lubricant condition for

the propeller shaft (four−wheel drive

models), bearings and suspension

joints (where possible) and the func-

tion of all joints and bearings.

When driving your vehicle off−road, please

observe the following precautions to en-

sure your driving enjoyment and to help

prevent the closure of areas to off−road

vehicles.

a. Drive your vehicle only in areas where

off−road vehicles are permitted to trav-

el.

b. Respect private property. Get owner’s

permission before entering private prop-

erty.

c. Do not enter areas that are closed.

Honor gates, barriers and signs that re-

strict travel.

d. Stay on established roads. When condi-

tions are wet, driving techniques should

be changed or travel delayed to pre-

vent damage to roads.

For owners in U.S. mainland, Hawaii and

Puerto Rico:

To obtain additional information pertaining

to driving your vehicle off−road, consult

the following organizations.

DState and Local Parks and Recreation

Departments

DState Motor Vehicle Bureau

DRecreational Vehicle Clubs

DU.S. Forest Service and Bureau of

Land Management

CAUTION

Always observe the following precau-

tions to minimize the risk of death or

serious personal injury or damage to

your vehicle:

DDrive carefully when off the road.

Do not take unnecessary risks by

driving in dangerous places.

DDo not grip the steering wheel

spokes when driving off−road. A

bad bump could jerk the wheel and

injure your hands. Keep both hands

and especially your thumbs on the

outside of the rim.

DAlways check your brakes for effec-

tiveness immediately after driving in

sand, mud, water or snow.

DAfter driving through tall grass,

mud, rock, sand, water, etc., check

that there is no grass, bush, paper,

rags, stone, sand, etc. adhering or

trapped on the underbody. Clear off

any such matter from the under-

body. If the vehicle is used with

these materials trapped or adhering

to the underbody, a breakdown or

fire could occur.

Off−road driving precautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

346

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DIn a rollover crash, an unbelted per-

son is significantly more likely to

die than a person wearing a seat

belt. Therefore, the driver and all

passengers should fasten their seat

belts whenever the vehicle is mo-

ving.

DWhen driving off−road or in rugged

terrain, do not drive at excessive

speeds, jump, make sharp turns,

strike objects, etc. This may cause

loss of control or vehicle rollover

causing death or serious injury. You

are also risking expensive damage

to your vehicle’s suspension and

chassis.

NOTICE

zIf driving through water, such as

when crossing shallow streams,

first check the depth of the water

and the bottom of the stream for

firmness. Drive slowly and avoid

deep water.

zTake all necessary safety measures

to ensure that water damage to the

engine or other components does

not occur.

Water entering the engine air intake

will cause severe engine damage.

Water entering the automatic trans-

mission will cause deterioration in

shift quality, looking up of your

transmission accompanied by vibra-

tion, and ultimately damage.

Water can wash the grease from

wheel bearings, causing rusting and

premature failure, and may also en-

ter the differentials, transmission

and transfer case, reducing the gear

oil’s lubricating qualities.

zSand and mud that has accumulated

around brake discs may affect brak-

ing efficiency and may damage

brake system components.

zAlways perform a maintenance in-

spection after each day of off−road

driving that has taken you through

rough terrain, sand, mud, or water.

For scheduled maintenance informa-

tion, refer to the “Scheduled Main-

tenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement”.

Make sure your coolant is properly pro-

tected against freezing.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,

and non−borate coolant with long−life

hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant

with long−life hybrid organic acid

technology is a combination of low

phosphates and organic acids.)

See “Checking the engine coolant level”

on page 406 in Section 7−2 for details of

coolant type selection.

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −35_C

(−31_F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −42_C

(−44_F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Winter driving tips

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

347

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Check the condition of the battery and

cables.

Cold temperatures reduce the capacity of

any battery, so it must be in top shape to

provide enough power for winter starting.

Section 7−3 tells you how to visually in-

spect the battery. Your Toyota dealer and

most service stations will be pleased to

check the level of charge.

Make sure the engine oil viscosity is

suitable for the cold weather.

See page 404 in Section 7−2 for recom-

mended viscosity. Leaving a heavy sum-

mer oil in your vehicle during winter

months may cause harder starting. If you

are not sure about which oil to use, call

your Toyota dealer–they will be pleased to

help.

Keep the door locks from freezing.

Squirt lock de−icer or glycerine into the

locks to keep them from freezing.

Use a washer fluid containing an anti-

freeze solution.

This product is available at your Toyota

dealer and most auto parts stores. Follow

the manufacturer’s directions for how

much to mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

Do not use your parking brake when

there is a possibility it could freeze.

When parking, put the transmission into

“P” and block the rear wheels. Do not use

the parking brake, or snow or water accu-

mulated in and around the parking brake

mechanism may freeze, making it hard to

release.

Keep ice and snow from accumulating

under the fenders.

Ice and snow built up under your fenders

can make steering difficult. During bad

winter driving, stop and check under the

fenders occasionally.

Depending on where you are driving,

we recommend you carry some emer-

gency equipment.

Some of the things you might put in the

vehicle are tire chains, window scraper,

bag of sand or salt, flares, small shovel,

jumper cables, etc.

Your vehicle is not designed to be

dinghy towed (with four wheels on the

ground) behind a motorhome.

NOTICE

Do not tow your vehicle with four

wheels on the ground. This may

cause serious damage to your vehicle.

Dinghy towing

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

348

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Your vehicle is designed primarily as a

passenger−carrying vehicle. Towing a

trailer will have an adverse effect on

handling, performance, braking, durability

and driving economy (fuel consumption,

etc.). Your safety and satisfaction depend

on the proper use of correct equipment

and cautious driving habits. For your

safety and the safety of others, you must

not overload your vehicle or trailer. Toyota

warranties do not apply to damage or

malfunction caused by towing a trailer for

commercial purposes. Ask your local

Toyota dealer for further details before

towing.

NOTICE

When towing a trailer, be sure to con-

sult your Toyota dealer for further in-

formation on additional requirements

such as a towing kit, etc.

WEIGHT LIMITS

Before towing, make sure the total trail-

er weight, gross combination weight,

gross vehicle weight, gross axle weight

and trailer tongue load are all within

the limits.

The total trailer weight and tongue load

can be measured with platform scales

found at a highway weighing station, build-

ing supply company, trucking company,

junk yard, etc.

CAUTION

DThe total trailer weight (trailer

weight plus its cargo load) must

not exceed the following. Exceeding

this weight is dangerous.

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

680 kg (1500 lb.)

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

Without towing package

907 kg (2000 lb.)

With towing package

1588 kg (3500 lb.)

If towing a trailer and cargo weigh-

ing over 907 kg (2000 lb.), it is

necessary to use a sway control

device with sufficient capacity.

DThe gross combination weight (sum

of your vehicle weight plus its load

and the total trailer weight) must

not exceed the following.

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

Without third seat

2689 kg (5930 lb.)

With third seat

2825 kg (6230 lb.)

Four−wheel drive models

Without third seat

2737 kg (6035 lb.)

With third seat

2887 kg (6365 lb.)

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

Two−wheel drive models

Without third seat

Without towing package

3048 kg (6720 lb.)

With towing package

3729 kg (8220 lb.)

With third seat

Without towing package

3182 kg (7015 lb.)

With towing package

3862 kg (8515 lb.)

Trailer towing

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

349

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Four−wheel drive models

Without third seat

Without towing package

2994 kg (6600 lb.)

With towing package

3674 kg (8100 lb.)

With third seat

Without towing package

3128 kg (6895 lb.)

With towing package

3808 kg (8395 lb.)

DTrailer hitch assemblies have differ-

ent weight capacities established by

the hitch manufacturer. Even though

the vehicle may be physically capa-

ble of towing a higher weight, the

operator must determine the maxi-

mum weight rating of the particular

hitch assembly and never exceed

the maximum weight rating speci-

fied for the trailer−hitch. Exceeding

the maximum weight rating set by

the trailer hitch manufacturer can

cause an accident resulting in seri-

ous personal injuries.

DThe gross vehicle weight must not

exceed the Gross Vehicle Weight

Rating (GVWR) indicated on the

Certification Label. The gross ve-

hicle weight is the sum of weights

of the unloaded vehicle, driver, pas-

sengers, luggage, hitch and trailer

tongue load. It also includes the

weight of any special equipment

installed on your vehicle.

DThe load on either the front or rear

axle resulting from distribution of

the gross vehicle weight on both

axles must not exceed the Gross

Axle Weight Rating (GAWR) listed

on the Certification Label.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

350

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Total trailer weight Tongue load

Tongue load

Total trailer weight

100 = 9 to 11%

DThe trailer cargo load should be

distributed so that the tongue load

is 9 to 11% of the total trailer

weight, not exceed the following.

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

68 kg (150 lb.)

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

Without towing package

90 kg (200 lb.)

With towing package

158 kg (350 lb.)

Never load the trailer with more

weight in the back than in the

front. About 60% of the trailer load

should be in the front half of the

trailer and the remaining 40% in the

rear.

HITCHES

DUse only a weight carrying hitch

designed for the total trailer weight.

Toyota does not recommend using a

weight distribution (load equalizing)

hitch.

DThe hitch must be bolted securely to

the vehicle frame and installed accord-

ing to the hitch manufacturer’s instruc-

tions.

DThe hitch ball should have a light coat

of grease.

DToyota recommends that the trailer

hitch be removed when not towing to

prevent injury and/or damage by the

hitch in event of a rear end collision.

After removing the hitch, the installa-

tion area should be sealed to prevent

entry of exhaust fumes and mud.

NOTICE

Do not use an axle−mounting hitch as

it may cause damage to the axle

housing, wheel bearings, wheels and/

or tires.

BRAKES AND SAFETY CHAINS

DToyota recommends trailers with

brakes that conform to any applica-

ble federal and state/provincial regu-

lations.

DA safety chain must always be used

between the towing vehicle and the

trailer. Leave sufficient slack in the

chain for turns. The chain should

cross under the trailer tongue to

prevent the tongue from dropping to

the ground in case it becomes dam-

aged or separated. For correct safety

chain procedures, follow the hitch or

trailer manufacturer’s recommenda-

tions.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

351

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DIf the total trailer weight exceeds

272 kg (600 lb.), trailer brakes are

required.

DNever tap into your vehicle’s hy-

draulic system as it would lower its

braking effectiveness.

DNever tow a trailer without using a

safety chain securely attached to

both the trailer and the vehicle. If

damage occurs to the coupling unit

or hitch ball, there is danger of the

trailer wandering over into another

lane.

TIRES

DEnsure that your vehicle’s tires are

properly inflated. See page 408 Section

7−2 and page 433 in Section 8 for

instructions.

DThe trailer tires should be inflated to

the pressure recommended by the trail-

er manufacturer in respect to the total

trailer weight.

TRAILER LIGHTS

DTrailer lights must comply with federal,

state/provincial and local regulations.

See your local recreational vehicle

dealer or rental agency for the correct

type of wiring and relays for your trail-

er. Check for correct operation of the

turn signals and stop lights each time

you hitch up. Direct splicing may dam-

age your vehicle’s electrical system

and cause a malfunction of your lights.

BREAK−IN SCHEDULE

DToyota recommends that you do not

tow a trailer with a new vehicle or a

vehicle with any new power train com-

ponent (engine, transmission, differen-

tial, wheel bearing, etc.) for the first

800 km (500 miles) of driving.

MAINTENANCE

DIf you tow a trailer, your vehicle will

require more frequent maintenance due

to the additional load. For this informa-

tion, please refer to the scheduled

maintenance information in the “Sched-

uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement”.

DRetighten all fixing bolts of the towing

ball and bracket after approximately

1000 km (600 miles) of trailer driving.

PRE−TOWING SAFETY CHECK

DCheck that your vehicle remains level

when a loaded or unloaded trailer is

hitched. Do not drive if the vehicle has

an abnormal nose−up or nose−down

condition, and check for improper

tongue load, overload, worn suspension

or other possible causes.

DMake sure the trailer cargo is securely

loaded so that it cannot shift.

DCheck that your rear view mirrors con-

form to any applicable federal, state/

provincial or local regulations. If not,

install the rear view mirrors required

for towing purpose.

TRAILER TOWING TIPS

When towing a trailer, your vehicle will

handle differently than when not tow-

ing. The three main causes of vehicle−

trailer accidents are driver error, exces-

sive speed and improper trailer loading.

Keep these in mind when towing:

DBefore starting out, check operation of

the lights and all vehicle−trailer connec-

tions. After driving a short distance,

stop and recheck the lights and con-

nections. Before actually towing a trail-

er, practice turning, stopping and back-

ing with a trailer in an area away from

traffic until you learn the feel.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

352

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DBecause stopping distance may be in-

creased, vehicle−to−vehicle distance

should be increased when towing a

trailer. For each 16 km/h (10 mph) of

speed, allow at least one vehicle and

trailer length between you and the ve-

hicle ahead. Avoid sudden braking as

you may skid, resulting in jackknifing

and loss of control. This is especially

true on wet or slippery surfaces.

DAvoid jerky starts or sudden accelera-

tion.

DAvoid jerky steering and sharp turns.

The trailer could hit your vehicle in a

tight turn. Slow down before making a

turn to avoid the necessity of sudden

braking.

DBacking with a trailer is difficult and

requires practice. Grip the bottom of

the steering wheel and move your hand

to the left to move the trailer to the

left. Move your hand to the right to

move the trailer to the right. (This pro-

cedure is generally opposite to that

when backing without a trailer.) Also,

just turn the steering wheel a little at

a time, avoiding sharp or prolonged

turning. Have someone guide you when

backing to reduce the risk of an acci-

dent.

DRemember that when making a turn,

the trailer wheels will be closer than

the vehicle wheels to the inside of the

turn. Therefore, compensate for this by

making a larger than normal turning

radius with your vehicle.

DCrosswinds and rough roads will ad-

versely affect handling of your vehicle

and trailer, causing sway. Pay attention

to the rear from time to time to pre-

pare yourself for being passed by large

trucks or buses, which may cause your

vehicle and trailer to sway. If swaying

happens, firmly grip the steering wheel

and reduce speed immediately but

gradually. Never increase speed. Steer

straight ahead. If you make no extreme

correction with the steering or brakes,

the vehicle and trailer will stabilize.

DBe careful when passing other ve-

hicles. Passing requires considerable

distance. After passing a vehicle, do

not forget the length of your trailer and

be sure you have plenty of room be-

fore changing lanes.

DIn order to maintain engine braking effi-

ciency, do not place the transmission

in “D”.

DBecause of the added load of the trail-

er, your vehicle’s engine may overheat

on hot days (at temperatures over

30_C [85_F]) when going up a long or

steep grade with a trailer. If the engine

coolant temperature gauge indicates

overheating, immediately turn off the air

conditioning (if in use), pull off the road

and stop in a safe spot. Refer to “If

your vehicle overheats” on page 360 in

Section 4.

DAlways place wheel blocks under both

the vehicle and trailer wheels when

parking. Apply the parking brake firmly.

Put the transmission in “P”. Avoid park-

ing on a slope with a trailer, but if it

cannot be avoided, do so only after

performing the following:

1. Apply the brakes and hold.

2. Have someone place wheel blocks un-

der both the vehicle and trailer wheels.

3. When the wheel blocks are in place,

release your brakes slowly until the

blocks absorb the load.

4. Apply the parking brake firmly.

5. Shift into “P” and turn off the engine.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

353

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When restarting out after parking on a

slope:

1. With the transmission in “P” position,

start the engine. Be sure to keep the

brake pedal depressed.

2. Shift into gear.

3. Release the parking brake and brake

pedal. Slowly pull or back away from

the wheel blocks. Stop and apply your

brakes.

4. Have someone retrieve the blocks.

CAUTION

DDo not exceed 72 km/h (45 mph) or

the posted towing speed limit,

whichever is lower. Because insta-

bility (swaying) of a towing vehicle−

trailer combination usually in-

creases as the speed increases, ex-

ceeding 72 km/h (45 mph) may

cause loss of control.

DSlow down and downshift before

descending steep or long downhill

grades. Do not make sudden down-

shifts.

DAvoid holding the brake pedal down

too long or too frequently. This

could cause the brakes to overheat

and result in reduced braking effi-

ciency.

Improving fuel economy is easy—just take

it easy. It will help make your vehicle last

longer, too. Here are some specific tips

on how to save money on both fuel and

repairs:

DKeep your tires inflated at the cor-

rect pressure. Underinflation causes

tire wear and wastes fuel. See page

408 in Section 7−2 for instructions.

DDo not carry unneeded weight in

your vehicle. Excess weight puts a

heavier load on the engine, causing

greater fuel consumption.

DAvoid lengthy warm−up idling. Once

the engine is running smoothly, begin

driving—but gently. Remember, howev-

er, that on cold winter days this may

take a little longer.

DPut the selector lever into the “D”

when engine braking is not required.

Driving with the select lever in “3”

(4−speed) or “4” (5−speed) will reduce

the fuel economy. (For details, see

“Automatic transmission” on page 143

or 147 in Section 1−7.)

DAccelerate slowly and smoothly.

Avoid jackrabbit starts. Get into high

gear as quickly as possible.

How to save fuel and make

your vehicle last longer

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

354

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DAvoid long engine idling. If you have

a long wait and you are not in traffic,

it is better to turn off the engine and

start again later.

DAvoid engine lugging or over−rev-

ving. Use a gear position suitable for

the road on which you are travelling.

DAvoid continuous speeding up and

slowing down. Stop−and−go driving

wastes fuel.

DAvoid unnecessary stopping and

braking. Maintain a steady pace. Try

to time the traffic signals so you only

need to stop as little as possible or

take advantage of through streets to

avoid traffic lights. Keep a proper dis-

tance from other vehicles to avoid sud-

den braking. This will also reduce wear

on your brakes.

DAvoid heavy traffic or traffic jams

whenever possible.

DDo not rest your foot on the brake

pedal. This causes premature wear,

overheating and poor fuel economy.

DMaintain a moderate speed on high-

ways. The faster you drive, the greater

the fuel consumption. By reducing your

speed, you will cut down on fuel con-

sumption.

DKeep the front wheels in proper

alignment. Avoid hitting the curb and

slow down on rough roads. Improper

alignment not only causes faster tire

wear but also puts an extra load on

the engine, which, in turn, wastes fuel.

DKeep the bottom of your vehicle free

from mud, etc. This not only lessens

weight but also helps prevent corro-

sion.

DKeep your vehicle tuned−up and in

top shape. A dirty air cleaner, improp-

er valve clearance, dirty plugs, dirty oil

and grease,brakes not adjusted, etc. all

lower engine performance and contrib-

ute to poor fuel economy. For longer

life of all parts and lower operating

costs, keep all maintenance work on

schedule, and if you often drive under

severe conditions, see that your vehicle

receives more frequent maintenance.

(For scheduled maintenance informa-

tion, please refer to the “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manu-

al Supplement”.)

CAUTION

Never turn off the engine to coast

down hills. Your power steering and

brake booster will not function with-

out the engine running. Also, the

emission control system operates

properly only when the engine is run-

ning.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

355

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

IN CASE OF AN EMERGENCY

In case of an emergency

If your vehicle will not start 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your engine stalls while driving 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot increase engine speed 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle overheats 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you have a flat tire 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle becomes stuck 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If your vehicle needs to be towed 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

If you cannot shift automatic transmission selector lever 378. . . . . . . .

If you lose your keys 379. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 4

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

356

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Before making these checks, make sure

you have followed the correct starting pro-

cedure given in “How to start the engine”

on page 342 in Section 3 and that you

have sufficient fuel. If your vehicle is

equipped with the engine immobilizer sys-

tem, also check whether the other keys

will start the engine. If they work, your

key may be broken. Have the key

checked at your Toyota dealer. If none of

your keys work, there may be a malfunc-

tion in the immobilizer system. Call your

Toyota dealer. (See “Keys (with engine

immobilizer system)” on page 12 in Sec-

tion 1−2.)

If the engine is not turning over or is

turning over too slowly—

1. Check that the battery terminals are

tight and clean.

2. If the battery terminals are O.K., switch

on the interior light.

3. If the light is out, dim or goes out

when the starter is cranked, the battery

is discharged. You may try jump start-

ing. See “(c) Jump starting” on page

357 for further instructions.

If the light is O.K., but the engine still will

not start, it needs adjustment or repair.

Call a Toyota dealer or qualified repair

shop.

If the engine turns over at its normal

speed but will not start—

1. Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position and try starting the

engine again.

2. If the engine will not start, the engine

may be flooded because of repeated

cranking. See “(b) Starting a flooded

engine” on page 356 for further instruc-

tions.

3. If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota

dealer or qualified repair shop.

If the engine will not start, your engine

may be flooded because of repeated

cranking.

If this happens, turn the engine switch to

the “START” position with the accelerator

pedal fully depressed. Keep the key and

accelerator pedal in these positions for 15

seconds and release them. Then try start-

ing the engine with your foot off the accel-

erator pedal.

If the engine does not start after 15 se-

conds of cranking, release the key, wait

a few minutes and try again.

If the engine still will not start, it needs

adjustment or repair. Call a Toyota dealer

or qualified repair shop for assistance.

NOTICE

Do not crank for more than 30 se-

conds at a time. This may overheat

the starter and wiring systems.

If your vehicle will not start—

(a) Simple checks (b) Starting a flooded engine

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

357

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To avoid serious personal injury and

damage to your vehicle which might re-

sult from battery explosion, acid burns,

electrical burns, or damaged electronic

components, these instructions must be

followed precisely.

The engine cannot be started by push−

starting.

If you are unsure about how to follow this

procedure, we strongly recommend that

you seek the help of a competent me-

chanic or towing service.

CAUTION

DBatteries contain sulfuric acid

which is poisonous and corrosive.

Wear protective safety glasses when

jump starting, and avoid spilling

acid on your skin, clothing, or ve-

hicle.

DIf you should accidentally get acid

on yourself or in your eyes, remove

any contaminated clothing and flush

the affected area with water im-

mediately. Then get immediate medi-

cal attention. If possible, continue

to apply water with a sponge or

cloth while en route to the medical

office.

DThe gas normally produced by a

battery will explode if a flame or

spark is brought near. Use only

standardized jumper cables and do

not smoke or light a match while

jump starting.

NOTICE

The battery used for boosting must

be 12 V. Do not jump start unless you

are sure that the booster battery is

correct.

JUMP STARTING PROCEDURE

1. If the booster battery is installed in

another vehicle, make sure the vehicles

are not touching. Turn off all unneces-

sary lights and accessories.

When boosting, use the battery of

matching or higher quality. Any other

battery may be difficult to jump start

with.

If jump starting is difficult, charge the

battery for several minutes.

2. If required, remove all the vent plugs

from the booster and discharged batter-

ies. Lay a cloth over the open vents

on the batteries. (This helps reduce the

explosion hazard, personal injuries and

burns.)

3. If the engine in the vehicle with the

booster battery is not running, start it

and let it run for a few minutes. During

jump starting, run the engine at about

2000 rpm with the accelerator pedal

lightly depressed.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

358

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Jumper cable

Discharged

battery

Positive

terminal

(“+” mark) Booster

battery

Positive

terminal

(“+” mark)

4. Make the cable connections in the or-

der a, b, c, d.

a. Connect the clamp of the positive

(red) jumper cable to the positive (+)

terminal on the discharged battery.

b. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the positive (red) jumper cable to

the positive (+) terminal on the booster

battery.

Discharged

battery

Jumper cable

Negative terminal

(“−” mark)

Booster

battery

c. Connect the clamp of the negative

(black) cable to the negative (−) termi-

nal on the booster battery.

d. Connect the clamp at the other end

of the negative (black) jumper cable to

a solid, stationary, unpainted, metallic

point of the vehicle with the discharged

battery.

The recommended connecting point is

shown in the following illustration:

Connecting point

Do not connect the cable to or near

any part that moves when the engine

is cranked.

CAUTION

When making the connections, to

avoid serious injury, do not lean over

the battery or accidentally let the

jumper cables or clamps touch any-

thing except the correct battery termi-

nals or the ground.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

359

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

5. Start your engine in the normal way.

After starting, run it at about 2000 rpm

for several minutes with the accelerator

pedal lightly depressed.

6. Carefully disconnect the cables in the

exact reverse order: the negative cable

and then the positive cable.

7. Carefully dispose of the battery cover

cloths—they may now contain sulfuric

acid.

8. If removed, replace all the battery vent

plugs.

If the cause of your battery discharging is

not apparent (for example, lights left on),

you should have it checked at your Toyota

dealer.

If the first start attempt is not success-

ful...

Check that the clamp on the jumper

cables are tight. Recharge the discharged

battery with the jumper cables connected

for several minutes and restart your en-

gine in the normal way.

If the another attempt is not successful,

the battery may be depleted. Have it ch-

ecked at your Toyota dealer.

If your engine stalls while driving...

1. Reduce your speed gradually, keeping

a straight line. Move cautiously off the

road to a safe place.

2. Turn on your emergency flashers.

3. Turn the engine switch to the “ACC” or

“LOCK” position, and try starting the

engine again.

If the engine will not start, see “If your

vehicle will not start” on page 356 in this

Section.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-

er assist for the brakes and steering

will not work so steering and braking

will be much harder than usual.

If engine speed does not increase when

the accelerator pedal is depressed, there

may be a problem somewhere in the elec-

tronic throttle control system.

At this time, vibration may occur. Howev-

er, if you depress the accelerator pedal

more firmly and slowly, you can drive your

vehicle at low speeds. Have your vehicle

checked by your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible.

Even if the abnormality of the electronic

throttle control system is corrected during

low speed driving, the system may not be

recovered until the engine is stopped and

the engine switch is turned to the “ACC”

or “LOCK” position.

CAUTION

Be especially careful to prevent erro-

neous pedal operation.

If your engine stalls while

driving

If you cannot increase engine

speed

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

360

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If your engine coolant temperature

gauge indicates overheating, if you ex-

perience a loss of power, or if you hear

a loud knocking or pinging noise, the

engine has probably overheated. You

should follow this procedure...

1. Pull safely off the road, stop the ve-

hicle and turn on your emergency

flashers. Put the transmission in “P”

and apply the parking brake. Turn off

the air conditioning if it is being used.

2. If coolant or steam is boiling out of the

radiator or reservoir, stop the engine.

Wait until the steam subsides before

opening the hood. If there is no coolant

boiling over or steam, leave the engine

running and make sure the electric

cooling fan is operating. If it is not,

turn the engine off.

CAUTION

To help avoid personal injury, keep

the hood closed until there is no

steam. Escaping steam or coolant is

a sign of very high pressure.

3. Look for obvious coolant leaks from the

radiator, hoses, and under the vehicle.

However, note that water draining from

the air conditioning is normal if it has

been used.

CAUTION

When the engine is running, keep

hands and clothing away from the

moving fan and engine drive belts.

4. If the coolant is leaking, stop the en-

gine immediately. Call a Toyota dealer

for assistance.

5. If there are no obvious leaks, check

the coolant reservoir. If it is dry, add

coolant to the reservoir while the en-

gine is running. Fill it about half full.

For the coolant type, see “Coolant type

selection” on page 406 in Section 7−2.

CAUTION

Do not attempt to remove the coolant

reservoir cap when the engine and

radiator are hot. Serious injury could

result from scalding hot fluid and

steam blown out under pressure.

6. After the engine coolant temperature

has cooled to normal, again check the

coolant level in the reservoir. If neces-

sary, bring it up to half full again. Seri-

ous coolant loss indicates a leak in the

system. You should have it checked as

soon as possible at your Toyota dealer.

If your vehicle overheats

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

361

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Reduce your speed gradually,

keeping a straight line. Move cau-

tiously off the road to a safe place

well away from the traffic. Avoid

stopping on the center divider of

a highway. Park on a level spot

with firm ground.

2. Stop the engine and turn on your

emergency flashers.

3. Firmly set the parking brake and

put the transmission in “P”.

4. Have everyone get out of the ve-

hicle on the side away from traffic.

5. Read the following instructions

thoroughly.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe

the following to reduce the possi-

bility of death or serious injury:

DFollow jacking instructions.

DDo not put any part of your

body under the vehicle sup-

ported by the jack. Otherwise,

personal injury may occur.

DDo not start or run the engine

while your vehicle is supported

by the jack.

DStop the vehicle on a level firm

ground, firmly set the parking

brake and put the transmission

in “P”. Block the wheel diago-

nally opposite to the one being

changed if necessary.

DMake sure to set the jack prop-

erly in the jack point. Raising

the vehicle with jack improper-

ly positioned will damage the

vehicle or may allow the ve-

hicle to fall off the jack and

cause personal injury.

DNever get under the vehicle

when the vehicle is supported

by the jack alone.

DUse the jack only for lifting

your vehicle during wheel

changing.

DDo not raise the vehicle with

someone in the vehicle.

DWhen raising the vehicle, do

not place any objects on top

of or underneath the jack.

DRaise the vehicle only high

enough to remove and change

the tire.

If you have a flat tire—

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

362

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

NOTICE

Do not continue driving with a

deflated tire. Driving even a

short distance can damage a

tire and wheel beyond repair.

Tool bag

Jack

1. Get the required tools and

spare tire on the back door.

To prepare yourself for an emergency,

you should familiarize yourself with

the use of the jack, each of the tools

and their storage locations.

—Required tools and spare

tire

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

363

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To remove the jack, turn the jack joint

by hand.

To remove: Turn the joint in direction

1 until the jack is free.

To store: Turn the joint in direction 2

until the jack is firmly secured to pre-

vent it flying forward during a collision

or sudden braking.

To remove the spare cover:

1. Open the back door. Unhook the

latch handle which on the bottom

of the spare tire cover.

The latch handle can be released only

when the back door is opened.

2. Close the back door. Remove the

spare tire cover.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

364

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To remove the spare tire, turn the

hold−down nuts counterclockwise

with the wheel nut wrench and re-

move them.

When stowing the spare tire, put it in

place and secure it to prevent it from

flying forward during a collision or

sudden braking.

2. Block the wheel diagonally op-

posite the flat tire to keep the

vehicle from rolling when it is

jacked up.

When blocking the wheel, place a

wheel block in front of one of the front

wheels or behind one of the rear

wheels.

Type A

Type B

—Blocking the wheel —Removing wheel ornament

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

365

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

3. Remove the wheel ornament.

Pry off the wheel ornament, using the

beveled end of the wheel nut wrench

as shown.

CAUTION

Do not try to pull off the orna-

ment by hand. Take due care in

handling the ornament to avoid

unexpected personal injury.

4. Loosen all the wheel nuts.

Always loosen the wheel nuts before

raising the vehicle.

Turn the wheel nuts counterclockwise

to loosen. To get maximum leverage,

fit the wrench to the nut so that the

handle is on the right side, as shown

above. Grab the wrench near the end

of the handle and pull up on the han-

dle. Be careful that the wrench does

not slip off the nut.

Do not remove the nuts yet—just un-

screw them about one−half turn.

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. The nuts may loose

and the wheels may fall off,

which could cause a serious ac-

cident.

—Loosening wheel nuts

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

366

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

5. Position the jack at the correct

jack point as shown.

Make sure the jack is positioned on

a level and solid place.

6. After making sure that no one

is in the vehicle, raise it high

enough so that the spare tire

can be installed.

Remember you will need more ground

clearance when putting on the spare

tire than when removing the flat tire.

To raise the vehicle, insert the jack

handle into the jack (it is a loose fit)

and turn it clockwise. As the jack

touches the vehicle and begins to lift,

double−check that it is properly posi-

tioned.

CAUTION

Never get under the vehicle when

the vehicle is supported by the

jack alone.

—Positioning the jack —Raising your vehicle

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

367

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

7. Remove the wheel nuts and

change tires.

Lift the flat tire straight off and put it

aside.

Roll the spare wheel into position and

align the holes in the wheel with the

bolts. Then lift up the wheel and get

at least the top bolt started through

its hole. Wiggle the tire and press it

back over the other bolts.

Before putting on wheels, remove any

corrosion on the mounting surfaces

with a wire brush or such. Installation

of wheels without good metal−to−met-

al contact at the mounting surface can

cause wheel nuts to loosen and

eventually cause a wheel to come off

while driving.

8. Reinstall all the wheel nuts fin-

ger tight.

Reinstall the wheel nuts (tapered end

inward) and tighten them as much as

you can by hand. Press back on the

tire back and see if you can tighten

them more.

—Changing wheels —Reinstalling wheel nuts

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

368

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Never use oil or grease on the

bolts or nuts. Doing so may lead

to overtightening the nuts and

damaging the bolts. The nuts

may loose and the wheels may

fall off, which could cause a seri-

ous accident. If there is oil or

grease on any bolt or nut, clean

it.

9. Lower the vehicle completely

and tighten the wheel nuts.

Turn the jack handle counterclock-

wise to lower the vehicle.

Use only the wheel nut wrench and

turn it clockwise to tighten the nuts.

Do not use other tools or any addition-

al leverage other than your hands,

such as a hammer, pipe or your foot.

Make sure the wrench is securely en-

gaged over the nut.

Tighten each nut a little at a time in

the order shown. Repeat the process

until all the nuts are tight.

CAUTION

DWhen lowering the vehicle,

make sure all portions of your

body and all other persons

around will not be injured as

the vehicle is lowered to the

ground.

DHave the wheel nuts tightened

with torque wrench to 103 N·m

(10.5 kgf·m, 76 ft·lbf), as soon

as possible after changing

wheels. Otherwise, the nuts

may loosen and the wheels

may fall off, which could cause

a serious accident.

—Lowering your vehicle

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

369

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

10.Install the flat tire and spare tire

cover on the back door.

CAUTION

Make sure flat tire and spare tire

cover are securely in place in

their storage location to reduce

the possibility of personal injury

during a collision or sudden

braking.

On vehicles with aluminum wheels

and a steel wheel for the spare, re-

move the rubber rings from the wheel

nuts of the spare tire carrier before

stowing a flat tire. Be careful not to

lose the rubber rings after removing

them.

CAUTION

Make sure that the rubber rings

are not installed to the wheel

nuts for aluminum wheel. Other-

wise, the nuts may become loose

and the wheel may fall off, which

may cause a serious accident.

After repairing the flat tire, be sure

to reinstall the rubber rings to the

wheel nuts before stowing the spare

tire. If the steel wheel is stowed with-

out reinstalling the rubber rings to the

wheel nuts, the spare tire carrier may

produce abnormal noise when the ve-

hicle is driven.

—Stowing flat tire

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

370

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

On some models—Before stowing the

flat tire, remove the center wheel or-

nament by pushing from the reverse

side.

Be careful not to lose the wheel orna-

ment.

Guides

To install the spare tire cover:

1. Insert the hooks under the guides

to the upper slots and lower the

cover.

2. Attach the cover by hooking the

2 inner protrusions.

Check that the cover is securely at-

tached.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

371

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

3. Open the back door. Lock the

latch handle which is on the bot-

tom of the cover.

4. Close the back door.

Check that the cover is securely in

place.

Type A

Type B

Type C

11.Reinstall the wheel ornament.

Type A and B—

1. Put the wheel ornament into posi-

tion.

Type A only: Align the cutout of

the wheel ornament with the valve

stem as shown.

2. Then firmly tap the outer edge of

the wheel cap with the side or heel

of your hand to snap into place.

—Reinstalling wheel ornament

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

372

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Type C—

Push the wheel ornament into the

center hole.

With a spare tire of different wheel

type from the installed tires, the wheel

ornament can not be installed into the

spare tire. After repairing the flat tire,

reinstall the wheel ornament.

CAUTION

DTake due care in handling the

ornament to avoid unexpected

personal injury.

DDo not attach a heavily dam-

aged plastic wheel ornament.

It may fly off the wheel and

cause accidents while the ve-

hicle is moving.

12.Check the air pressure of the re-

placed tire.

Adjust the air pressure to the specifi-

cation designated on page 433 in

Section 8. If the pressure is lower,

drive slowly to the nearest service

station and fill to the correct pressure.

Do not forget to reinstall the tire infla-

tion valve cap as dirt and moisture

could get into the valve core and

possibly cause air leakage. If the cap

is missing, have a new one put on as

soon as possible.

13.Restow all the tools and jack se-

curely.

As soon after changing wheels as

possible, tighten the wheel nuts to the

torque specified on page 433 in Sec-

tion 8 with a torque wrench. Have a

technician repair the flat tire.

CAUTION

Before driving, make sure all the

tools and jack are securely in

place in their storage location to

reduce the possibility of person-

al injury during a collision or

sudden braking.

—After changing wheels

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

373

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If your vehicle becomes stuck in snow,

mud, sand, etc., then you may attempt

to rock the vehicle free by moving it

forward and backward.

You can use the “AUTO LSD” switch

(two−wheel drive models) or four−wheel

drive lock switch (four−wheel drive

models) in this situation. (For details,

see ““AUTO LSD” system” on page 153

or “Active torque control 4WD system”

on page 150 in Section 1−7.)

CAUTION

Do not attempt to rock the vehicle

free by moving it forward and back-

ward if people or objects are any-

where near the vehicle. During the

rocking operation the vehicle may

suddenly move forward or backward

as it becomes unstuck, causing injury

or damage to nearby people or ob-

jects.

NOTICE

If you rock your vehicle, observe the

following precautions to prevent dam-

age to the transmission and other

parts.

zDo not depress the accelerator ped-

al while shifting the selector lever

or before the transmission is com-

pletely shifted to forward or reverse

gear.

zDo not race the engine and avoid

spinning the wheels.

zIf your vehicle remains stuck after

rocking the vehicle several times,

consider other ways such as tow-

ing.

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Two−wheel drive models

If your vehicle becomes stuck

If your vehicle needs to be

towed—

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

374

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck—

—From front

—From rear

(b) Using flat bed truck

Four−wheel drive models

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota

dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-

vice. In consultation with them, have

your vehicle towed using either (a) or

(b).

Only when you cannot receive a towing

service from a Toyota dealer or com-

mercial tow truck service, tow your ve-

hicle carefully in accordance with the

instructions given in “—Emergency tow-

ing” on page 375 in this Section.

Proper equipment will help ensure that

your vehicle is not damaged while being

towed. Commercial operators are generally

aware of the state/provincial and local

laws pertaining to towing.

Your vehicle can be damaged if it is

towed incorrectly. Although most operators

know the correct procedure, it is possible

to make a mistake. To avoid damage to

your vehicle, make sure the following pre-

cautions are observed. If necessary, show

this page to the tow truck driver.

TOWING PRECAUTIONS:

Use a safety chain system for all towing,

and abide by the state/provincial and local

laws. The wheels and axle on the ground

must be in good condition. If they are

damaged, use a towing dolly.

Two−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

From front—Release the parking brake.

NOTICE

When lifting wheels, take care to en-

sure adequate ground clearance for

towing at the opposite end of the

raised vehicle. Otherwise, the bumper

and/or underbody of the towed vehicle

will be damaged during towing.

From rear—

Use a towing dolly under the front wheels.

NOTICE

Never tow a vehicle with an automatic

transmission from the rear with the

front wheels on the ground, as this

may cause serious damage to the

transmission.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

375

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

(b) Using flat bed truck

Four−wheel drive models—

(a) Towing with wheel lift type truck

Use a towing dolly under the wheels not

lifted by the truck.

(b) Using flat bed truck

type truck

All models—

NOTICE

Do not tow with sling type truck, ei-

ther from the front or rear. This may

cause body damage.

If towing is necessary, we recommend

you to have it done by your Toyota

dealer or a commercial tow truck ser-

vice.

If towing service is not available in an

emergency, your vehicle may be tempo-

rarily towed by a cable or chain se-

cured to the emergency towing eyelets

on the front of the vehicle. Use extreme

caution when towing vehicle.

To install the front towing eyelet, see

“—Installing front towing eyelet” described

below.

—Emergency towing

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

376

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

NOTICE

zOnly use specified towing eyelet;

otherwise your vehicle may be dam-

aged.

zNever tow a vehicle from the rear

with four wheels on the ground.

This may cause serious damage to

the transmission.

A driver must be in the vehicle to steer

it and operate the brakes.

Towing in this manner may be done only

on hard−surfaced roads for a short dis-

tance and at low speeds. Also, the

wheels, axles, drive train, steering and

brakes must all be in good condition.

CAUTION

Use extreme caution when towing ve-

hicles. Avoid sudden starts or erratic

driving maneuvers which would place

excessive stress on the emergency

towing eyelet and towing cable or

chain. The eyelet and towing cable or

chain may break and cause serious

injury or damage.

NOTICE

Use only a cable or chain specifically

intended for use in towing vehicles.

Securely fasten the cable or chain to

the towing eyelet provided.

Before towing, release the parking brake

and put the transmission in “N”. The en-

gine switch must be in the “ACC” (engine

off) or the “ON” (engine running) position.

CAUTION

If the engine is not running, the pow-

er assist for the brakes and steering

will not work so steering and braking

will be much harder than usual.

1. Remove the front towing eyelet cover

on the front bumper, using a flathead

screwdriver which is wrapped with a

cloth.

—Installing front towing eyelet

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

377

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2. Use the front towing eyelet in the tool

bag. Secure it to the hole on the

bumper by turning clockwise. (For the

tool bag location, see “—Required tools

and spare tire” on page 362 in this

Section.)

3. Tighten the front towing eyelet securely

by a wheel nut wrench.

CAUTION

When installing the eyelet on the ve-

hicle, be sure to tighten the front

eyelet securely. If the eyelet is loose,

it may come off when being towed

and result in death or serious injury.

DBefore emergency towing, check that

the eyelet is not broken or damaged

and that the installation bolts are not

loose.

DFasten the towing cable or chain se-

curely to the eyelet.

DDo not jerk the eyelet. Apply steady

and even force.

DTo avoid damaging the eyelet, do not

pull from the side or at a vertical

angle. Always pull straight ahead.

—Emergency towing eyelet

precautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

378

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

If the emergency towing eyelet is

used to get out when your vehicle

becomes struck in mud, sand or oth-

er condition from which the vehicle

cannot be driven out under its own

power, make sure to observe the pre-

cautions mentioned below. Otherwise,

excessive stress will be put on the

eyelet and the towing cable or chain

may break, causing serious injury or

damage.

DIf the towing vehicle can hardly

move, do not forcibly continue the

towing. Contact your Toyota dealer

or a commercial tow truck service

for assistance.

DTow the vehicle as straight ahead

as possible.

DKeep away from the vehicle during

towing.

The following methods are effective to get

out when your vehicle is struck in mud,

sand or other condition from which the

vehicle cannot be driven out under its own

power. Use extreme caution when towing

vehicles. In addition, keep away from the

vehicles and towing cable or chain when

towing.

DRemove the soil and sand in the front

and the back of the tires.

DPlace a stone or wood under the tires.

If you cannot shift the selector lever

out of “P” position to other positions

even though the brake pedal is de-

pressed, use the shift lock override but-

ton as follows:

1. Turn the engine switch to the

“LOCK” position. Make sure the

parking brake is applied.

2. Pry up the cover with a flathead

screwdriver or equivalent.

—Tips for towing a stuck

vehicle

If you cannot shift automatic

transmission selector lever

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

379

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

3. Insert your finger into the hole to

push down the shift lock override

button. You can shift out of “P”

position only while pushing the but-

ton.

4. Shift into “N” position.

5. Insert the cover.

6. Start the engine. For your safety,

keep the brake pedal depressed.

Be sure to have the system checked by

your Toyota dealer as soon as possible.

You can purchase a new key at your

Toyota dealer if you can give them the

key number. If your vehicle is equipped

with the engine immobilizer system, the

dealer will also need your master key.

Vehicles with engine immobilizer system—

Even if you lose only one key, contact

your Toyota dealer to make a new key. If

you lose all your master keys, you cannot

make new keys; the whole engine immobi-

lizer system must be replaced.

See the suggestion given in “Keys (with

engine immobilizer system)” on page 12 in

Section 1−2.

You can use the wireless remote control

system with the new key. Contact your

Toyota dealer for detailed information.

If your keys are locked in the vehicle and

you cannot get a duplicate, many Toyota

dealers can still open the door for you,

using their special tools. If you must

break a window to get in, we suggest

breaking the smallest side window be-

cause it is the least expensive to replace.

Be extremely cautious to avoid cuts from

the glass.

If you lose your keys

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

380

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

381

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CORROSION PREVENTION AND

APPEARANCE CARE

Corrosion prevention and appearance care

Protecting your Toyota from corrosion 382. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Washing and waxing your Toyota 383. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Cleaning the interior 386. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 5

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

382

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Toyota, through the diligent research, de-

sign and use of the most advanced

technology available, helps prevent corro-

sion and provides you with the finest qual-

ity vehicle construction. Now, it is up to

you. Proper care of your Toyota can help

ensure long−term corrosion prevention.

The most common causes of corrosion

to your vehicle are:

DThe accumulation of road salt, dirt and

moisture in hard−to−reach areas under

the vehicle.

DChipping of paint, or undercoating

caused by minor accidents or by

stones and gravel.

Care is especially important if you live

in particular areas or operate your ve-

hicle under certain environmental condi-

tions:

DRoad salt or dust control chemicals will

accelerate corrosion, as will the pres-

ence of salt in the air near the sea−

coast or in areas of industrial pollution.

DHigh humidity accelerates corrosion es-

pecially when temperatures range just

above the freezing point.

DWetness or dampness to certain parts

of your vehicle for an extended period

of time, may cause corrosion even

though other parts of the vehicle may

be dry.

DHigh ambient temperatures can cause

corrosion to those components of the

vehicle which do not dry quickly due to

lack of proper ventilation.

The above signifies the necessity to keep

your vehicle, particularly the underside, as

clean as possible and to repair any dam-

age to paint or protective coatings as

soon as possible.

To help prevent corrosion on your

Toyota, follow these guidelines:

Wash your vehicle frequently. It is, of

course, necessary to keep your vehicle

clean by regular washing, but to prevent

corrosion, the following points should be

observed:

DIf you drive on salted roads in the

winter or if you live near the ocean,

you should hose off the undercarriage

at least once a month to minimize cor-

rosion.

DHigh pressure water or steam is effec-

tive for cleaning the vehicle’s underside

and wheel housings. Pay particular

attention to these areas as it is difficult

to see all the mud and dirt. It will do

more harm than good to simply wet the

mud and debris without removing. The

lower edge of doors, rocker panels and

frame members have drain holes which

should not be allowed to clog with dirt

as trapped water in these areas can

cause corrosion.

DWash the underside of the vehicle thor-

oughly when winter is over.

See “Washing and waxing your Toyota” on

page 383 for more tips.

Check the condition of your vehicle’s

paint and trim. If you find any chips or

scratches in the paint, touch them up im-

mediately to prevent corrosion from start-

ing. If the chips or scratches have gone

through the bare metal, have a qualified

body shop make the repair.

Protecting your Toyota from

corrosion

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

383

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Check the interior of your vehicle. Wa-

ter and dirt can accumulate under the

floor mats and could cause corrosion. Oc-

casionally check under the mats to make

sure the area is dry. Be particularly care-

ful when transporting chemicals, cleans-

ers, fertilizers, salt, etc; these should be

transported in proper containers. If a spill

or leak should occur, immediately clean

and dry the area.

Use mud shields on your wheels. If you

drive on salted or gravel roads, mud

shields help protect your vehicle. Full−size

shields, which come as near to the ground

as possible, are the best. We recommend

that the fittings and the area where the

shields are installed be treated to resist

corrosion. Your Toyota dealer will be

happy to assist in supplying and installing

the shields if they are recommended for

your area.

Keep your vehicle in a well ventilated

garage or a roofed place. Do not park

your vehicle in a damp, poorly venti-

lated garage. If you wash your vehicle in

the garage, or if you drive it covered with

water or snow, your garage may be so

damp as to cause corrosion. Even if your

garage is heated, a wet vehicle can cor-

rode if the ventilation is poor.

Washing your Toyota

Keep your vehicle clean by regular

washing.

The following cases may cause weakness

to the paint or corrosion to the body and

parts. Wash your vehicle as soon as pos-

sible.

DWhen driving in a coastal area

DWhen driving on a road sprinkled with

antifreeze

DWhen exposed to coal tar, tree sap,

bird droppings and carcass of an insect

DWhen driving in areas where there is

a lot of smoke, soot, dust, iron dust or

chemical substances

DWhen the vehicle becomes remarkably

dirty with dust and mud

Hand−washing your Toyota

Work in the shade and wait until the

vehicle body is not warm to the touch.

CAUTION

DWhen cleaning under floor or chas-

sis, be careful not to injure your

hands.

DExhaust gases cause the exhaust

pipe to become quite hot. When

washing the vehicle, be careful not

to touch the pipe until it has cooled

sufficiently, as touching a hot ex-

haust pipe can cause burns.

NOTICE

When the front wiper arms need to be

lifted away from the windshield to

wash the vehicle, raise the arm on

the driver side first. Conversely, when

returning the wipers to their original

positions, fold down the arm on the

front passenger side first. Failure to

perform the operations in the correct

order results in damage.

Washing and waxing your

Toyota

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

384

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Rinse off loose dirt with a hose. Re-

move any mud or road salt from the

underside of the vehicle or the wheel

wells.

2. Wash with a mild car−wash soap,

mixed according to the manufacturer’s

instructions. Use a soft cotton mitt and

keep it wet by dipping it frequently into

the wash water. Do not rub hard—let

the soap and water remove the dirt.

Fuel filler door: Do not apply water (high−

pressure car wash, for example) at or

near the fuel tank inlet with the fuel filler

door opened. If the water enters the air

vent, you may experience trouble with re-

fueling or rough engine idling.

Plastic wheel ornaments: The plastic

wheel ornaments are damaged easily by

organic substances. If any organic sub-

stances splashes an ornament, be sure to

wash them off with water and check if the

ornament is damaged.

Aluminum wheels: Use only a mild soap

or neutral detergent.

NOTICE

zDo not use corrosive chemical−

based cleaners on your wheels.

(Example: hydrofluoric acid)

zDo not use steam cleaners or the

chemicals therein to clean your

wheels.

zDo not use scouring pads, wire

brushes, or coarse abrasives to

clean your wheels.

zDo not use alcohol, solvents, gaso-

line, or other non−neutral deter-

gents, because they may alter the

wheel’s appearance and resistance

to corrosion.

Plastic bumpers: Wash carefully. Do not

scrub with abrasive cleaners. The bumper

faces are soft.

Exterior lights: Wash carefully. Do not use

organic substances or scrub them with a

hard brush. This may damage the sur-

faces of the lights.

Road tar: Remove with turpentine or

cleaners that are marked safe for painted

surfaces.

3. Rinse thoroughly—dried soap can

cause streaking. In hot weather you

may need to rinse each section right

after you wash it.

4. To prevent water spots, dry the vehicle

using a clean soft cotton towel. Do not

rub or press hard—you might scratch

the paint.

NOTICE

zDo not use organic substances

(gasoline, kerosene, benzine or

strong solvents), which may be tox-

ic or cause damage.

zDo not scrub any part of the ve-

hicle with a hard brush, which may

cause damage.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

385

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Automatic car wash

Your vehicle may be washed in an auto-

matic car wash, but remember that the

paint can be scratched by some types of

brushes, unfiltered washing water, or the

washing process itself. Scratching reduces

paint durability and gloss, especially on

darker colors. The manager of the car

wash should be able to advise you wheth-

er the process is safe for the paint on

your vehicle.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the antenna,

make sure it is removed before driv-

ing your Toyota through an automatic

car wash.

Waxing your Toyota

Polishing and waxing is recommended

to maintain the original beauty of your

Toyota’s finish.

Apply wax once a month or if the vehicle

surface does not repel water well.

1. Always wash and dry the vehicle be-

fore you begin waxing, even if you are

using a combined cleaner and wax.

2. Use a good quality polish and wax. If

the finish has become extremely weath-

ered, use a car−cleaning polish, fol-

lowed by a separate wax. Carefully fol-

low the manufacturer’s instructions and

precautions. Be sure to polish and wax

the chrome trim as well as the paint.

Windshield washer nozzles: Make sure

that the nozzles do not become blocked

when waxing. If a nozzle becomes

blocked, contact your Toyota dealer to

have the vehicle serviced.

NOTICE

If a nozzle becomes blocked, do not

try to clear it with a pin or other

object. The nozzle will be damaged.

Exterior lights: Do not apply wax on the

surfaces of the lights. Wax may cause

damage to the lenses. If you accidentally

put wax on the light surfaces, wipe or

wash it off.

3. Wax the vehicle again when water

does not bead but remains on the sur-

face in large patches.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

386

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DVehicles with side airbags and cur-

tain shield airbags:

Be careful not to splash water or

spill liquid on the floor. This may

prevent the side airbag and curtain

shield airbag from activating cor-

rectly, resulting in serious injury.

DDo not wash the vehicle floor with

water, or allow water to get onto

the floor when cleaning the vehicle

interior or exterior. Water may get

into audio components or other

electrical components above or un-

der the floor carpet (or mat) and

cause a malfunction; and it may

cause body corrosion.

Vinyl interior

The vinyl upholstery may be easily

cleaned with a mild soap or detergent

and water.

First vacuum over the upholstery to re-

move loose dirt. Then, using a sponge or

soft cloth, apply the soap solution to the

vinyl. After allowing it to soak in for a few

minutes to loosen the dirt, remove the dirt

and wipe off the soap with a clean damp

cloth. If all the dirt do not come off, re-

peat the procedure. Commercial foaming−

type vinyl cleaners are also available

which work well. Follow the manufacturer’s

instructions.

NOTICE

Do not use solvent, thinner, gasoline

or window cleaner on the interior.

Carpets

Use a good foam−type shampoo to

clean the carpets.

Begin by vacuuming thoroughly to remove

as much dirt as possible. Several types of

foam cleaners are available; some are in

aerosol cans and others are powders or

liquids which you mix with water to pro-

duce a foam. To shampoo the carpets,

use a sponge or brush to apply the foam.

Rub in overlapping circles.

Do not apply water—the best results are

obtained by keeping the carpet as dry as

possible. Read the shampoo instructions

and follow them closely.

Seat belts

The seat belts may be cleaned with

mild soap and water or with lukewarm

water.

Use a cloth or sponge. As you are clean-

ing, check the belts for excessive wear,

fraying, or cuts.

NOTICE

zDo not use dye or bleach on the

belts—it may weaken them.

zDo not use the belts until they be-

come dry.

Windows

The windows may be cleaned with any

household window cleaner.

NOTICE

When cleaning the inside of the rear

window, be careful not to scratch or

damage the heater wires or connec-

tors.

Cleaning the interior

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

387

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Air conditioning control panel, audio

panel, instrument panel, console panel,

and switches

Use a soft damp cloth for cleaning.

Soak a clean soft cloth in water or luke-

warm water then lightly wipe off dirt.

NOTICE

zDo not use organic substances (sol-

vents, kerosene, alcohol, gasoline,

etc.) or alkaline or acidic solutions.

These chemicals can cause discol-

oring, staining or peeling of the

surface.

zIf you use cleaners or polishing

agents, make sure their ingredients

do not include the substances men-

tioned above.

zIf you use a liquid car freshener, do

not apply the liquid onto the ve-

hicle’s interior surfaces. It may con-

tain the ingredients mentioned

above. Immediately clean any spill

using the method mentioned above.

Leather interior

The leather upholstery may be cleaned

with neutral detergent for wool.

Remove dirt using a soft cloth dampened

with 5% solution of neutral detergent for

wool. Then thoroughly wipe off all traces

of detergent with a clean damp cloth.

After cleaning or whenever any part of the

leather gets wet, dry with a soft clean

cloth. Allow the leather to dry in a venti-

lated shaded area.

NOTICE

zIf a stain should fail to come out

with a neutral detergent, apply a

cleaner that does not contain an

organic solvent.

zNever use organic substances such

as benzine, alcohol or gasoline, or

alkaline or acid solutions for clean-

ing the leather as these could

cause discoloring.

zUse of a nylon brush or synthetic

fiber cloth, etc. may scratch the

fine grained surface of the leather.

zMildew may develop on soiled leath-

er upholstery. Be especially careful

to avoid oil spots. Try to keep your

upholstery always clean.

zLong exposure to direct sunlight

may cause the leather surface to

harden and shrink. Keep your ve-

hicle in a shaded area, especially in

the summer.

zThe interior of your vehicle is apt

to heat up on hot summer days, so

avoid placing on the upholstery

items made of vinyl or plastic or

containing wax as these tend to

stick to leather when warm.

zImproper cleaning of the leather up-

holstery could result in discolor-

ation or staining.

If you have any questions about the

cleaning of your Toyota, your local

Toyota dealer will be pleased to answer

them.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

388

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

389

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

VEHICLE MAINTENANCE AND CARE

Vehicle maintenance and care

Maintenance requirements 390. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General maintenance 391. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Does your vehicle need repairing? 393. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Emissions Inspection and Maintenance (I/M) programs 394. . . . . . . . .

For scheduled maintenance information, please refer to the “Sched-

uled Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

SECTION 6

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

390

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Your Toyota vehicle has been designed for

fewer maintenance requirements with long-

er service intervals to save both your time

and money. However, each regular mainte-

nance, as well as day−to−day care, is

more important than ever before to ensure

smooth, trouble−free, safe, and economical

driving.

It is the owner’s responsibility to make

sure the specified maintenance, including

general maintenance service, is performed.

Note that both the new vehicle and emis-

sion control system warranties specify that

proper maintenance and care must be per-

formed. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” for complete warranty information.

General maintenance

General maintenance items are those day−

to−day care practices that are important to

your vehicle for proper operation. It is the

owner’s responsibility to ensure that the

general maintenance items are performed

regularly.

These checks or inspections can be done

either by yourself or a qualified technician,

or if you prefer, your Toyota dealer will be

pleased to do them at a nominal cost.

Scheduled maintenance

The scheduled maintenance items listed in

the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement” are those

required to be serviced at regular inter-

vals.

For details of your maintenance schedule,

read the “Scheduled Maintenance Guide”

or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

It is recommended that any replacement

parts used for maintenance or for the

repair of the emission control system

be Toyota supplied.

The owner may elect to use non−Toyot a

supplied parts for replacement pur-

poses without invalidating the emission

control system warranty. However, use

of replacement parts which are not of

equivalent quality may impair the effec-

tiveness of the emission control sys-

tems.

You may also elect to have mainte-

nance, replacement, or repair of the

emission control devices and system

performed by any automotive repair es-

tablishment or individual without invali-

dating this warranty. See “Owner’s War-

ranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s

Manual Supplement” for complete war-

ranty information.

Where to go for service?

Toyota technicians are well−trained spe-

cialists and are kept up to date with the

latest service information through technical

bulletins, service tips, and in−dealership

training programs. They learn to work on

Toyotas before they work on your vehicle,

rather than while they are working on it.

You can be confident that your Toyota

dealer’s service department performs the

best job to meet the maintenance require-

ments on your vehicle—reliably and eco-

nomically.

Your copy of the repair order is proof that

all required maintenance has been per-

formed for warranty coverage. If any prob-

lems should arise with your vehicle while

under warranty, your Toyota dealer will

promptly take care of it. Again, be sure

to keep a copy of the repair order for any

service performed on your Toyota.

What about do−it−yourself maintenance?

Many of the maintenance items are easy

to do yourself if you have a little mechani-

cal ability and a few basic automotive

tools. Simple instructions for how to per-

form them are presented on page 395 in

Section 7.

Maintenance requirements

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

391

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If you are a skilled do−it−yourself mechan-

ic, the Toyota service manuals are recom-

mended. Please be aware that do−it−your-

self maintenance can affect your warranty

coverage. See “Owner’s Warranty Informa-

tion Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment” for the details.

Listed below are the general maintenance

items that should be performed as fre-

quently as specified. In addition to check-

ing the items listed, if you notice any

unusual noise, smell or vibration, you

should investigate the cause or take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer or a quali-

fied service shop immediately. It is recom-

mended that any problem you notice be

brought to the attention of your dealer or

the qualified service shop for their advice.

CAUTION

Make these checks only with ade-

quate ventilation if you run the en-

gine.

IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT

Items listed below should be checked

from time to time, e.g. each time when

refueling.

Washer fluid

Make sure there is sufficient fluid in the

tank. See page 422 in Section 7−3 for

additional information.

Engine coolant level

Make sure the coolant level is between

the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the see−

through reservoir when the engine is cold.

See page 406 in Section 7−2 for addition-

al information.

Radiator, condenser and hoses

Check that the front of the radiator and

condenser are clean and not blocked with

leaves, dirt, or insects. See page 407 in

Section 7−2 for additional information.

Battery electrolyte level

Check the battery condition by the indica-

tor color. See page 418 in Section 7−3 for

additional information.

Brake fluid level

Make sure the brake fluid level is correct.

See page 407 in Section 7−2 for addition-

al information.

Engine oil level

Check the level on the dipstick with the

engine turned off and the vehicle parked

on a level spot. See page 404 in Section

7−2 for additional information.

General maintenance

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

392

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Exhaust system

If you notice any change in the sound of

the exhaust or smell exhaust fumes, have

the cause located and corrected immedi-

ately. (See “Engine exhaust cautions” on

page 313 in Section 2.)

INSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be checked

regularly, e.g. while performing periodic

services, cleaning the vehicle, etc.

Lights

Make sure the headlights, stop lights, tail

lights, turn signal lights, and other lights

are all working.

Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers

Check that all service reminder indicators

and warning buzzers function properly.

Steering wheel

Check that it has the specified free play.

Be alert for changes in steering condition,

such as hard steering or strange noise.

Seats

Check that all seat controls such as seat

adjusters, seatback recliner, etc. operate

smoothly and that all latches lock securely

in any position. For folding−down rear

seatbacks, check that the latches lock se-

curely.

Seat belts

Check that the seat belt system such as

buckles, retractors and anchors operate

properly and smoothly. Make sure the belt

webbing is not cut, frayed, worn or dam-

aged.

Accelerator pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

uneven pedal effort or catching.

Brake pedal

Check the pedal for smooth operation and

that the pedal has the proper clearance.

Check the brake booster function.

Brakes

In a safe place, check that the brakes do

not pull to one side when applied.

Parking brake

Check that the lever has the proper travel

and that, on a safe incline, your vehicle

is held securely with only the parking

brake applied.

Automatic transmission “Park” mecha-

nism

On a safe incline, check that your vehicle

is held securely with the selector lever in

“P” position and all brakes released.

OUTSIDE THE VEHICLE

Items listed below should be performed

from time to time, unless otherwise

specified.

Fluid leaks

Check underneath for leaking fuel, oil, wa-

ter or other fluid after the vehicle has

been parked for a while. If you smell fuel

fumes or notice any leak, have the cause

found and corrected immediately.

Doors and engine hood

Check that all doors and back door oper-

ate smoothly and all latches lock securely.

Make sure the engine hood secondary

latch secures the hood from opening when

the primary latch is released.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

393

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Tire inflation pressure

Check the pressure with a gauge ev-

ery two weeks, or at least once a

month. See page 408 in Section 7−2

for additional information.

Tire surface and wheel nuts

Check the tires carefully for cuts,

damage or excessive wear. See page

410 in Section 7−2 for additional in-

formation. When checking the tires,

make sure no nuts are missing, and

check the nuts for looseness. Tighten

them if necessary.

Tire rotation

Rotate the tires according to the

maintenance schedule. (For sched-

uled maintenance information, please

refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supple-

ment”.) See page 412 in Section 7−2

for additional information.

Be on the alert for changes in perfor-

mance, sounds, and visual tip−offs that

indicate service is needed. Some impor-

tant clues are as follows:

DEngine missing, stumbling, or pinging

DAppreciable loss of power

DStrange engine noises

DA leak under the vehicle (However, wa-

ter dripping from the air conditioning

after use is normal.)

DChange in exhaust sound (This may

indicate a dangerous carbon monoxide

leak. Drive with the windows open and

have the exhaust system checked im-

mediately.)

DFlat−looking tire; excessive tire squeal

when cornering; uneven tire wear

DVehicle pulls to one side when driving

straight on a level road

DStrange noises related to suspension

movement

DLoss of brake effectiveness; spongy

feeling brake pedal; pedal almost

touches floor; vehicle pulls to one side

when braking

DEngine coolant temperature continually

higher than normal

If you notice any of these clues, take your

vehicle to your Toyota dealer as soon as

possible. It probably needs adjustment or

repair.

CAUTION

Do not continue driving with the ve-

hicle unchecked. It could result in se-

rious vehicle damage and possibly

personal injury.

Does your vehicle need

repairing?

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

394

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Some states have vehicle emission in-

spection programs which include OBD

(On−Board Diagnostics) checks.

The OBD system monitors the operation

of the emission control system. When the

OBD system determines that a problem

exists somewhere in the emission control

system, the malfunction indicator lamp

comes on. In this case, your vehicle may

not pass the I/M test and need to be

repaired. Contact your Toyota dealer to

service the vehicle.

Even if the malfunction indicator lamp

does not come on, your vehicle may not

pass the I/M test as readiness codes

have not been set in the OBD system.

Readiness codes are automatically set

during ordinary driving. However, when the

battery is disconnected or run down, the

codes are erased. Also, depending on

your driving habits, the codes may not be

completely set.

Also, if the malfunction indicator lamp had

come on recently due to temporary mal-

function such as a loose fuel tank cap,

your vehicle may not pass the I/M test.

The malfunction indicator lamp will go off

after taking several driving trips, but the

error code in the OBD system will not be

cleared unless about 40 trips or more are

taken.

If your vehicle does not pass the I/M test

even the malfunction indicator lamp does

not come on, contact your Toyota dealer

to prepare the vehicle for re−testing.

Emissions Inspection and

Maintenance (I/M) programs

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

395

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Introduction

Engine compartment overview 396. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuse locations 398. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Do−it−yourself service precautions 399. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Parts and tools 400. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Positioning a floor jack 401. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 1

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

396

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Fuse blocks

2. Engine coolant reservoir

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Battery

6. Radiator

7. Condenser

8. Electric cooling fans

9. Engine oil level dipstick

10. Windshield and rear window washer

fluid tank

Engine compartment overview

"2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

397

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

1. Fuse blocks

2. Engine coolant reservoir

3. Engine oil filler cap

4. Brake fluid reservoir

5. Battery

6. Radiator

7. Condenser

8. Electric cooling fans

9. Engine oil level dipstick

10. Windshield and rear window washer

fluid tank

"3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

398

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Spare fuses

Fuse locations

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

399

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If you perform maintenance by yourself,

be sure to follow the correct procedure

given in this Section.

You should be aware that improper or in-

complete servicing may result in operating

problems.

Performing do−it−yourself maintenance

during the warranty period may affect your

warranty coverage. Read the separate

Toyota Warranty statement for details and

suggestions.

This Section gives instructions only for

those items that are relatively easy for an

owner to perform. As explained in Section

6, there are still a number of items that

must be done by a qualified technician

with special tools.

For information on tools and parts for do−

it−yourself maintenance, see “Parts and

tools” on page 400 in this Section.

Utmost care should be taken when work-

ing on your vehicle to prevent accidental

injury. Here are a few precautions that

you should be especially careful to ob-

serve:

CAUTION

DWhen the engine is running, keep

hands, clothing, and tools away

from the moving fan and engine

drive belts. (Removing rings,

watches, and ties is advisable.)

DRight after driving, the engine

compartment—the engine, radiator,

exhaust manifold and spark plug

boots, etc.—will be hot. So be care-

ful not to touch them. Oil, fluids

and spark plugs may also be hot.

DIf the engine is hot, do not remove

the coolant reservoir cap or loosen

the drain plugs to prevent burning

yourself.

DDo not leave anything that may

burn easily, such as paper or rags,

in the engine compartment.

DDo not smoke, cause sparks or al-

low open flames around fuel or the

battery. Their fumes are flammable.

DDo not get under your vehicle with

just the body jack supporting it. Al-

ways use automotive jack stands or

other solid supports.

DBe sure that the engine is off if you

work near the electric cooling fans

or radiator grille. With the engine

on, the electric cooling fans will

automatically start to run if the en-

gine coolant temperature is high

and/or the air conditioning is on.

DUse eye protection whenever you

work on or under your vehicle

where you may be exposed to flying

or falling material, fluid spray, etc.

DUsed engine oil contains potentially

harmful contaminants which may

cause skin disorders such as in-

flammation or skin cancer, so care

should be taken to avoid prolonged

and repeated contact with it. To re-

move used engine oil from your

skin, wash thoroughly with soap

and water.

DDo not leave used oil within the

reach of children.

DDispose of used oil and filter only

in a safe and acceptable manner.

Do not dispose of used oil and fil-

ter in household trash, in sewers or

onto the ground. Call your dealer or

a service station for information

concerning recycling or disposal.

Do−it−yourself service

precautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

400

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DBe extremely cautious when work-

ing on the battery. It contains poi-

sonous and corrosive sulfuric acid.

NOTICE

zRemember that battery and ignition

cable carry high currents or volt-

ages. Be careful of accidentally

causing a short circuit.

zAdd only “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” or similar high quality eth-

ylene glycol based non−silicate,

non−amine, non−nitrite, and non−bo-

rate coolant with long−life hybrid

organic acid technology to fill the

radiator. “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% cool-

ant and 50% deionized water (for

the U.S.A.) or 55% coolant and 45%

deionized water (for Canada).

zIf you spill some of the coolant, be

sure to wash it off with water to

prevent it from damaging the parts

or paint.

zDo not allow dirt or anything else

to fall through the spark plug holes.

zUse only spark plugs of the speci-

fied type. Using other types will

cause engine damage, loss of per-

formance or radio noise.

zDo not reuse iridium−tipped spark

plugs by cleaning or regapping.

zDo not overfill automatic transmis-

sion fluid, or the transmission

could be damaged.

zDo not drive with the air cleaner

filter removed, or excessive engine

wear could result. Also backfiring

could cause a fire in the engine

compartment.

zBe careful not to scratch the glass

surface with the wiper frame.

zWhen closing the engine hood,

check to see that you have not for-

gotten any tools, rags, etc.

Here is a list of parts and tools you will

need to perform do−it−yourself mainte-

nance. Remember all Toyota parts are de-

signed in metric sizes, so your tools must

be metric.

CHECKING THE ENGINE OIL LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

D“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equiva-

lent

See page 404 in Section 7−2 for de-

tails about engine oil selection.

Tools:

DRag or paper towel

DFunnel (only for adding oil)

CHECKING THE ENGINE COOLANT

LEVEL

Parts (if level is low):

D“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” or

similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−ni-

trite, and non−borate coolant with long−

life hybrid organic acid technology.

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is a

mixture of 50% coolant and 50% deion-

ized water (for the U.S.A.) or 55%

coolant and 45% deionized water (for

Canada).

Parts and tools

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

401

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Tools:

DFunnel (only for adding coolant)

CHECKING BRAKE FLUID

Parts (if level is low):

DSAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

brake fluid

Tools:

DRag or paper towel

DFunnel (only for adding fluid)

CHECKING BATTERY CONDITION

Tools:

DWarm water

DBaking soda

DGrease

DConventional wrench (for terminal

clamp bolts)

CHECKING AND REPLACING FUSES

Parts (if replacement is necessary):

DFuse with same amperage rating as

original

ADDING WASHER FLUID

Parts:

DWater

DWasher fluid containing antifreeze

(for winter use)

Tools:

DFunnel

REPLACING LIGHT BULBS

Parts:

DBulb with same number and wattage

rating as original (See charts in

“Replacing light bulbs” on page 422 in

Section 7−3.)

Tools:

DScrewdriver

Front

Rear

Positioning a floor jack

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

402

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

When jacking up your vehicle with the

floor jack, position the jack correctly as

shown in the illustrations.

CAUTION

When jacking, be sure to observe the

following to reduce the possibility of

death or serious injury:

DFollow jacking instructions.

DDo not put any part of your body

under the vehicle supported by the

floor jack. Personal injury may oc-

cur.

DDo not start or run the engine while

your vehicle is supported by the

floor jack.

DStop the vehicle on a level firm

ground, firmly set the parking brake

and put the transmission in “P”.

Block the wheels on the opposite

side of the floor jack up point if

necessary.

DMake sure to set the floor jack

properly in the jack point. Raising

the vehicle with floor jack improper-

ly positioned will damage the ve-

hicle or may allow the vehicle to

fall off the floor jack and cause

personal injury.

DNever get under the vehicle when

the vehicle is supported by the

floor jack alone; use vehicle sup-

port stands.

DDo not raise the vehicle with some-

one in the vehicle.

DWhen raising the vehicle, do not

place any objects on top of or un-

derneath the floor jack.

NOTICE

Make sure to place the floor jack cor-

rectly, or your vehicle may be dam-

aged.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

403

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Engine and Chassis

Checking the engine oil level 404. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the engine coolant level 406. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking the radiator and condenser 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking brake fluid 407. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking tire inflation pressure 408. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing tires 410. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rotating tires 412. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Installing snow tires and chains 413. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing wheels 415. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Aluminum wheel precautions 416. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 2

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

404

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Low level Full level

Add oil O.K. Too full

With the engine at operating tempera-

ture and turned off, check the oil level

on the dipstick.

1. To get a correct reading, the vehicle

should be on level ground. After turning

off the engine, wait a few minutes for

the oil to drain back into the bottom of

the engine.

2. Pull the dipstick out, hold a rag under

the end and wipe it clean.

3. Reinsert the dipstick—push it in as far

as it will go, or the reading will not be

correct.

4. Pull the dipstick out and look at the oil

level while holding a rag under the

end.

CAUTION

Be careful not to touch the hot ex-

haust manifold.

NOTICE

Be careful not to drop engine oil on

the vehicle components.

If the oil level is below or only slightly

above the low level, add engine oil of

the same type as already in the engine.

Remove the oil filler cap and add engine

oil in small quantities at a time, checking

the dipstick. We recommend that you use

a funnel when adding oil.

The approximate quantity of oil needed to

raise the level between low and full on the

dipstick is indicated as follows:

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

1.1L(1.2qt.,1.0lmp.qt.)

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

1.5L(1.6qt.,1.3lmp.qt.)

For the engine oil capacity, see “Service

specifications” on page 429 in Section 8.

When the level reaches within the correct

range, install the filler cap hand−tight.

NOTICE

zBe careful not to spill engine oil on

the vehicle components.

zAvoid overfilling, or the engine

could be damaged.

zCheck the oil level on the dipstick

once again after adding the oil.

Checking the engine oil level

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

405

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

ENGINE OIL SELECTION

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in

your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

to satisfy the following grade and

viscosity.

Oil grade:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended viscosity:

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20 engine oil may be

used. However, SAE 0W−20 is the best

choice for good fuel economy and good

starting in cold weather.

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

SAE 5W−30 is the best choice for good

fuel economy, and good starting in cold

weather.

If SAE 5W−30 oil is not available, SAE

10W−30 oil may be used. However, it

should be replaced with SAE 5W−30 at

the next oil change.

Oil identification mark

The ILSAC (International Lubricant Stan-

dardization and Approval Committee) Certi-

fication Mark is added to some oil con-

tainers to help you select the oil you

should use.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

406

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

To ensure excellent lubrication perfor-

mance for your engine, “Toyota Genuine

Motor Oil” is available, which has been

specifically tested and approved for all

Toyota engines.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details about “Toyota Genuine Motor

Oil”.

Look at the see−through coolant reser-

voir when the engine is cold. The cool-

ant level is satisfactory if it is between

the “FULL” and “LOW” lines on the

reservoir. If the level is low, add the

coolant. (For the coolant type, see

“Coolant type selection” described be-

low.)

The coolant level in the reservoir will vary

with engine temperature. However, if the

level is below the “LOW” line, add cool-

ant. Bring the level between the “FULL”

and “LOW” lines.

If the coolant level drops within a short

time after replenishing, there may be a

leak in the system. Visually check the

radiator, hoses, coolant reservoir cap and

drain cock and water pump.

If you can find no leak, have your Toyota

dealer test the cap pressure and check

for leaks in the cooling system.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, do not

remove the coolant reservoir cap

when the engine is hot.

Coolant type selection

Use of improper coolants may damage

your engine cooling system.

Only use “Toyota Super Long Life Coolant”

or similar high quality ethylene glycol

based non−silicate, non−amine, non−nitrite,

and non−borate coolant with long−life

hybrid organic acid technology. (Coolant

with long−life hybrid organic acid

technology consists of the combination of

low phosphates and organic acids.)

For the U.S.A.—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 50% coolant and

50% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −35_C

(−31_F).

For Canada—“Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” is a mixture of 55% coolant and

45% deionized water. This coolant pro-

vides protection down to about −42_C

(−44_F).

NOTICE

Do not use plain water alone.

Checking the engine coolant

level

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

407

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Toyota recommends “Toyota Super Long

Life Coolant”, which has been tested to

ensure that it will not cause corrosion nor

result in malfunction of your engine

coolant system with proper usage. “Toyota

Super Long Life Coolant” is formulated

with long−life hybrid organic acid

technology and has been specifically

designed to avoid engine cooling system

malfunction on Toyota vehicles.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for

further details.

If any of the above parts are extremely

dirty or you are not sure of their condi-

tion, take your vehicle to a Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

To prevent burning yourself, be care-

ful not to touch the radiator or con-

denser when the engine is hot.

NOTICE

To prevent damage to the radiator

and condenser, do not perform the

work by yourself. To check the fluid level, simply look at

the see−through reservoir. The level

should be between the “MAX” and

“MIN” lines on the reservoir.

It is normal for the brake fluid level to go

down slightly as the brake pads wear. So

be sure to keep the reservoir filled.

If the reservoir needs frequent refilling, it

may indicate a serious mechanical prob-

lem.

If the level is low, add SAE J1703 or

FMVSS No.116 DOT 3 brake fluid to the

brake reservoir.

Checking the radiator and

condenser Checking brake fluid

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

408

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Remove and replace the reservoir cap by

hand. Fill the brake fluid to the dotted

line. This brings the fluid to the correct

level when you put the cap back on.

Use only newly opened brake fluid. Once

opened, brake fluid absorbs moisture from

the air, and excess moisture can cause a

dangerous loss of braking.

CAUTION

Take care when filling the reservoir

because brake fluid can harm your

hands or eyes. If fluid gets on your

hands or in your eyes, flush the af-

fected area with clean water immedi-

ately. If you still feel uncomfortable

with your hands or eyes, go to the

doctor.

NOTICE

If you spill some of the fluid, be sure

to wipe it off to prevent it from dam-

aging the parts or paintwork.

Keep your tire inflation pressures

at the proper level.

The recommended cold tire inflation

pressures, tire sizes and the com-

bined weight of occupants and cargo

(vehicle capacity weight) are de-

scribed on page 428 and 433. They

are also on the tire and loading infor-

mation label.

You should check the tire inflation

pressure every two weeks, or at least

once a month. And do not forget the

spare!

Checking tire inflation

pressure

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

409

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The following instructions for

checking tire inflation pressure

should be observed:

DThe pressure should be

checked only when the tires are

cold. If your vehicle has been

parked for at least 3 hours and has

not been driven for more than 1.5

km or 1 mile since, you will get

an accurate cold tire inflation pres-

sure reading.

DAlways use a tire pressure

gauge. The appearance of a tire

can be misleading. Besides, tire

inflation pressures that are even

just a few pounds off can degrade

ride and handling.

DDo not bleed or reduce tire

inflation pressure after driving.

It is normal for the tire inflation

pressure to be higher after driving.

DNever exceed the vehicle capac-

ity weight. Passenger and lug-

gage weight should be located so

that the vehicle is balanced.

Tire pressure gauge

INSPECTION AND ADJUSTMENT

PROCEDURE

1. Remove the tire valve cap.

2. Press the tip of the tire pressure

gauge to the tire valve.

3. Read the pressure using the grad-

uations of the gauge.

4. In case the tire inflation pressure

is not within the prescribed range,

insert the compressed air from the

valve. In case of applying too

much air, press the center of the

valve and release the air to adjust.

5. After completing the tire inflation

pressure measurement and ad-

justment, apply soapy water to the

valve and check for leakage.

6. Install the tire valve cap.

If a gauge and air pump are not avail-

able, have your vehicle checked by

your Toyota dealer.

CAUTION

Be sure to reinstall the tire valve

caps. Without the valve caps, dirt

or moisture could get into the

valve core and cause air leakage.

If the caps have been lost, have

new ones put on as soon as pos-

sible.

Incorrect tire inflation pressure may

waste fuel, reduce the comfort of driv-

ing, reduce tire life and make your ve-

hicle less safe to drive.

If a tire frequently needs refilling,

have it checked by your Toyota deal-

er.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

410

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

Keep your tires properly inflated.

Otherwise, the following condi-

tions may occur and cause an ac-

cident resulting in death or seri-

ous injuries.

Low tire pressure (underinfla-

tion)—

DExcessive wear

DUneven wear

DPoor handling

DPossibility of blowouts from an

overheated tire

DPoor sealing of the tire bead

DWheel deformation and/or tire

separation

DA greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

High tire pressure (overinfla-

tion)—

DPoor handling

DExcessive wear

DUneven wear

DA greater possibility of tire

damage from road hazards

Treadwear indicator

CHECKING YOUR TIRES

Check the tire’s tread for treadwear

indicators. If the indicators show,

replace the tires. The location of

treadwear indicators is shown by

the “TWI” or “Δ” marks, etc.,

molded on the sidewall of each

tire.

Checking and replacing tires

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

411

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

The tires on your Toyota have built−in

treadwear indicators to help you know

when the tires need replacement.

When the tread depth wears to 1.6

mm (0.06 in.) or less, the indicators

will appear. If you can see the indica-

tors in two or more adjacent grooves,

the tire should be replaced. The lower

the tread, the higher the risk of skid-

ding.

The effectiveness of snow tires is

lost if the tread wears down below

4 mm (0.16 in.).

If you have tire damage such as

cuts, splits, cracks deep enough to

expose the fabric, or bulges indi-

cating internal damage, the tire

should be replaced.

If a tire often goes flat or cannot be

properly repaired due to the size or

location of a cut or other damage, it

should be replaced. If you are not

sure, consult with your Toyota dealer.

If air loss occurs while driving, do not

continue driving. Driving even a short

distance can damage a tire beyond

repair.

Any tires which are over 6 years

old must be checked by a qualified

technician even if damage is not

obvious.

Tires deteriorate with age even if they

have never or seldom been used.

This applies also to the spare tire and

tires stored for future use.

REPLACING YOUR TIRES

When replacing a tire, use a tire of

the same size and construction,

and the same or greater maximum

load as the originally installed

tires. Also, on four−wheel drive

models, all the tires must be the

same brand and have the same

tread patterns.

Using any other size or type of tire

may seriously affect handling, ride,

speedometer/odometer calibration,

ground clearance, and clearance be-

tween the body and tires or snow

chains.

Check that the maximum load of the

replaced tire is greater than 1/2 of the

Gross Axle Weight Ratings (GAWR)

of either the front axle or the rear

axle, whichever is greater. As for the

maximum load of the tire, see the load

limit at maximum cold tire inflation

pressure mentioned on the sidewall

of the tire, and as for the Gross Axle

Weight Ratings (GAWR), see the Cer-

tification Label.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

412

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

For details about the side wall of the

tire and the Certification Label, see

pages 321 and 324.

CAUTION

Observe the following instruc-

tions. Otherwise, an accident

may occur resulting in death or

serious injuries.

DDo not mix radial, bias belted,

or bias−ply tires on your ve-

hicle, as this may cause dan-

gerous handling characteris-

tics resulting in loss of control.

DDo not use tires other than the

manufacturer’s recommended

size, as this may cause danger-

ous handling characteristics

resulting in loss of control.

DFour−wheel drive models:

Do not use tires of different

brands, sizes, construction or

tread patterns, as this may

cause dangerous handling

characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

Toyota recommends all four tires,

or at least both of the front or rear

tires be replaced at a time as a set.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page

361 in Section 4 for tire change proce-

dure.

When a tire is replaced, the wheel

should always be balanced.

An unbalanced wheel may affect ve-

hicle handling and tire life. Wheels

can get out of balance with regular

use and should therefore be balanced

occasionally.

When replacing a tubeless tire, the

air valve should also be replaced

with a new one.

With a spare tire of the same

wheel type as the installed tires

Rotating tires

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

413

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

With a spare tire of different

wheel type from the installed

tires

To equalize tire wear and help ex-

tend tire life, Toyota recommends

that you rotate your tires accord-

ing to the maintenance schedule.

(For scheduled maintenance infor-

mation, please refer to the “Sched-

uled Maintenance Guide” or “Own-

er’s Manual Supplement”.)

However, the most appropriate tim-

ing for tire rotation may vary ac-

cording to your driving habits and

road surface conditions.

See “If you have a flat tire” on page

361 in Section 4 for tire change proce-

dure.

When rotating tires, check for uneven

wear and damage. Abnormal wear is

usually caused by incorrect tire pres-

sure, improper wheel alignment, out−

of−balance wheels, or severe braking.

WHEN TO USE SNOW TIRES OR

CHAINS

Snow tires or chains are recommended

when driving on snow or ice.

On wet or dry roads, conventional tires

provide better traction than snow tires.

SNOW TIRE SELECTION

If you need snow tires, select tires of

the same size, construction and load

capacity as the originally installed tires.

Also, on four−wheel drive models, all

the tires must be the same brand and

have the same tread patterns.

Do not use tires other than those men-

tioned above. Do not install studded tires

without first checking local regulations for

possible restrictions.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.

Otherwise, an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

DDo not use snow tires other than

the manufacturer’s recommended si-

ze, as this may cause dangerous

handling characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

Installing snow tires and

chains

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

414

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DFour−wheel drive models:

Do not use snow tires of different

brands, sizes, construction or tread

patterns, as this may cause danger-

ous handling characteristics result-

ing in loss of control.

SNOW TIRE INSTALLATION

Snow tires should be installed on all

wheels.

Installing snow tires on the front wheels

only can lead to an excessive difference

in road grip capability between the front

and rear tires, which could cause loss of

vehicle control.

When storing removed tires, you should

store them in a cool dry place.

Mark the direction of rotation and be sure

to install them in the same direction when

replacing.

CAUTION

DDo not drive with the snow tires

incorrectly inflated.

DNever drive over 120 km/h (75 mph)

with any type of snow tires.

Side chain

Cross chain

TIRE CHAIN SELECTION

Use the tire chains of correct size.

For 215/70R16, 225/65R17 and 235/55R18

tires, use the following type chains.

mm (in.)

A Diameter of side chain 3 (0.12)

B Width of side chain 10 (0.39)

C Length of side chain 30 (1.18)

D Diameter of cross chain 4 (0.16)

E Width of cross chain 14 (0.55)

F Length of cross chain 25 (0.98)

Regulations regarding the use of tire

chains vary according to location or

type of road, so always check local reg-

ulations before installing chains.

NOTICE

If the wrong combination of tire and

chain is used, the chains could dam-

age the vehicle body.

CHAIN INSTALLATION

Install the chains on the front tires as

tightly as possible. Do not use tire

chains on the rear tires. Retighten

chains after driving 0.5—1.0 km

(1/4—1/2 mile).

When installing chains on your tires, care-

fully follow the instructions of the chain

manufacturer.

If wheel covers are used, they will be

scratched by the chain band, so remove

the covers before putting on the chains.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

415

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

DDo not exceed 50 km/h (30 mph) or

the chain manufacturer’s recom-

mended speed limit, whichever is

lower.

DDrive carefully avoiding bumps,

holes, and sharp turns, which may

cause the vehicle to bounce.

DAvoid sharp turns or locked−wheel

braking, as use of chains may ad-

versely affect vehicle handling.

DWhen driving with chains installed,

be sure to drive carefully. Slow

down before entering curves to

avoid losing control of the vehicle.

Otherwise an accident may occur.

As you might have difficulty in identify-

ing a flat or deflated tire, a tire pres-

sure warning system is provided on

this vehicle.

When replacing the wheels, be sure to

install tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters on the wheels. Consult your

Toyota dealer about how to set up the tire

pressure warning valves and transmitters.

CAUTION

DHave the tires, wheels or tire pres-

sure warning valves and transmit-

ters replaced and ID codes regis-

tered by Toyota dealer. If you need

tire pressure warning valves and

transmitters, purchase from Toyota

dealer.

DThe tire pressure warning valve and

transmitter nuts should always be

tightened to a torque of 4 N·m (0.4

kgf·m, 2.9 ft·lbf).

DThe use of non−genuine wheels may

result in the system failure or air−

leak.

WHEN TO REPLACE YOUR WHEELS

If you have wheel damage such as

bending, cracks or heavy corrosion, the

wheel should be replaced.

If you fail to replace a damaged wheel,

the tire may slip off the wheel or cause

loss of handling control.

WHEEL SELECTION

When replacing wheels, care should be

taken to ensure that the wheels are re-

placed by ones with the same load ca-

pacity, diameter, rim width, and offset.

Correct replacement wheels are available

at your Toyota dealer.

A wheel of a different size or type may

adversely affect handling, wheel and bear-

ing life, brake cooling, speedometer/odom-

eter calibration, stopping ability, headlight

aim, bumper height, vehicle ground clear-

ance, and tire or snow chain clearance to

the body and chassis.

Replacing wheels

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

416

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Replacement with used wheels is not rec-

ommended as they may have been sub-

jected to rough treatment or high mileage

and could fail without warning. Also, bent

wheels which have been straightened may

have structural damage and therefore

should not be used. Never use an inner

tube in a leaking wheel which is designed

for a tubeless tire.

CAUTION

Observe the following instructions.

Otherwise, an accident may occur re-

sulting in death or serious injuries.

DDo not use wheels other than the

manufacturer’s recommended size,

as this may cause dangerous han-

dling characteristics resulting in

loss of control.

DFour−wheel drive models:

Do not use wheels of different

brands, sizes and types, as this

may cause dangerous handling

characteristics resulting in loss of

control.

DWhen installing aluminum wheels,

check that the wheel nuts are tight

after driving your vehicle the first 1600

km (1000 miles).

DIf you have rotated, repaired, or

changed your tires, check that the

wheel nuts are still tight after driving

1600 km (1000 miles).

DWhen using tire chains, be careful not

to damage the aluminum wheels.

DUse only Toyota wheel nuts and

wrench designed for your aluminum

wheels.

DWhen balancing your wheels, use only

Toyota balance weights or equivalent

and a plastic or rubber hammer.

DAs with any wheel, periodically check

your aluminum wheels for damage. If

damaged, replace immediately.

Aluminum wheel precautions

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

417

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DO−IT−YOURSELF MAINTENANCE

Electrical components

Checking battery condition 418. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Battery recharging precautions 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Checking and replacing fuses 420. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Adding washer fluid 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Replacing light bulbs 422. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 7− 3

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

418

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

CAUTION

BATTERY PRECAUTIONS

The battery produces flammable and

explosive hydrogen gas.

DDo not cause a spark from the bat-

tery with tools.

DDo not smoke or light a match near

the battery.

The electrolyte contains poisonous

and corrosive sulfuric acid.

DAvoid contact with eyes, skin or

clothes.

DNever ingest electrolyte.

DWear protective safety glasses when

working near the battery.

DKeep children away from the bat-

tery.

EMERGENCY MEASURES

DIf electrolyte gets in your eyes,

flush your eyes with clean water

immediately and get immediate

medical attention. If possible, con-

tinue to apply water with a sponge

or cloth while en route to the medi-

cal office.

DIf electrolyte gets on your skin,

thoroughly wash the contact area. If

you feel pain or burning, get medi-

cal attention immediately.

DIf electrolyte gets on your clothes,

there is a possibility of its soaking

through to your skin, so immediate-

ly take off the exposed clothing and

follow the procedure above, if nec-

essary.

DIf you accidentally swallow electro-

lyte, drink a large quantity of water

or milk. Follow with milk of magne-

sia, beaten raw egg or vegetable

oil. Then go immediately for emer-

gency help.

Terminals Ground cable

Hold−down clamp

Check the battery for corroded or loose

terminal connections, cracks, or loose

hold−down clamp.

a. If the battery is corroded, wash it off

with a solution of warm water and bak-

ing soda. Coat the outside of the termi-

nals with grease to prevent further cor-

rosion.

b. If the terminal connections are loose,

tighten their clamp nuts—but do not

overtighten.

c. Tighten the hold−down clamp only

enough to keep the battery firmly in

place. Overtightening may damage the

battery case.

Checking battery condition—

—Precautions —Checking battery exterior

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

419

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Before replacing the battery, remove the

cover as shown.

Removing clip

Installing clip

NOTICE

zBe sure the engine and all accesso-

ries are off before performing main-

tenance.

zWhen checking the battery, remove

the ground cable from the negative

terminal (“−” mark) first and rein-

stall it last.

zBe careful not to cause a short cir-

cuit with tools.

zTake care no solution gets into the

battery when washing it.

If the battery is disconnected or run

down, You should normalize the power

window and moon roof may not operate

correctly after you reconnect, replace or

recharge the battery. In any of these

cases, you should normalize each system.

To normalize them, see “Power windows”

on page 24 and “Electric moon roof” on

page 30 in Section 1−2.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

420

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Type A

Green Dark

Clear or

light yellow

Type B

Blue White Red

CHECKING BY INDICATOR

Check the battery condition by the indi-

cator color.

Indicator color Condition

Type A Type B

Green Blue Good

Dark White

Charging necessary.

Have battery

checked by your

Toyota dealer.

Clear or

light

yellow

Red

Have battery

checked by your

Toyota dealer.

During recharging, the battery is pro-

ducing hydrogen gas.

Therefore, before recharging:

1. If recharging with the battery installed

on the vehicle, be sure to disconnect

the ground cable.

2. Be sure the power switch on the re-

charger is off when connecting the

charger cables to the battery and when

disconnecting them.

CAUTION

DAlways charge the battery in an un-

confined area. Do not charge the

battery in a garage or closed room

where there is not sufficient ventila-

tion.

DOnly do a slow charge (5 A or

less). Charging at a quicker rate is

dangerous. The battery may ex-

plode, causing personal injuries.

NOTICE

Never recharge the battery while the

engine is running. Also, be sure all

accessories are turned off.

Good Blown

Type A

Good Blown

Type B

—Checking battery condition Battery recharging precautions Checking and replacing fuses

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

421

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Good Blown

Type C If the headlights or other electrical

components do not work, check the

fuses. If any of the fuses are blown,

they must be replaced.

See “Fuse locations” on page 398 in Sec-

tion 7−1 for locations of the fuses.

Turn the engine switch and inoperative

component off. Pull the suspected fuse

straight out and check it.

Determine which fuse may be causing the

problem. The lid of the fuse box shows

the name of the circuit for each fuse. See

page 434 in Section 8 for the functions

controlled by each circuit.

Type A fuses can be pulled out by using

the pull−out tool. The location of the pull−

out tool is shown in the illustration.

If you are not sure whether the fuse has

blown, try replacing the suspected fuse

with one that you know is good.

If the fuse has blown, push a new fuse

into the clip.

Only install a fuse with the amperage rat-

ing designated on the fuse box lid.

If you do not have a spare fuse, in an

emergency you can pull out the “RAD

NO.1” or “CIG” fuse, which may be dis-

pensable for normal driving, and use it if

its amperage rating is the same.

If you cannot use one of the same amper-

age, use one that is lower, but as close

to the rating as possible. If the amperage

is lower than that specified, the fuse

might blow out again but this does not

indicate anything wrong. Be sure to get

the correct fuse as soon as possible and

return the substitute to its original clip.

It is a good idea to purchase a set of

spare fuses and keep them in your ve-

hicle for emergencies.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

422

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If the new fuse immediately blows out,

there is a problem with the electrical sys-

tem. Have your Toyota dealer correct it as

soon as possible.

You should normalize the power window

and moon roof may not operate correctly

after replacing blown fuses. To normalize

the power window and moon roof, see

“Power windows” on page 24 and “Electric

moon roof” on page 30 in Section 1−2.

CAUTION

Never use a fuse with a higher am-

perage rating, or any other object, in

place of a fuse. This may cause ex-

tensive damage and possibly a fire.

If any washer does not work or wind-

shield washer fluid level warning light

comes on, the washer tank may be

empty. Add washer fluid.

You may use plain water as washer fluid.

However, in cold areas where tempera-

tures range below the freezing point, use

washer fluid containing antifreeze. This

product is available at your Toyota dealer

and most auto parts stores. Follow the

manufacturer’s directions for how much to

mix with water.

NOTICE

Do not use engine antifreeze or any

other substitute because it may dam-

age your vehicle’s paint.

The following illustrations show how to

gain access to the bulbs. When replacing

a bulb, make sure the engine switch and

light switch are off. Use bulbs with the

wattage ratings given in the table.

The stop/tail lights and high mounted stop-

light consist of a number of LEDs. If any

of the LEDs burn out, take your vehicle

to your Toyota dealer to have the light

replaced.

If two or more LEDs in a stop/tail light

burn out, your vehicle may not conform to

local laws (SAE).

CAUTION

DTo prevent burning yourself, do not

replace the light bulbs while they

are hot.

DHalogen bulbs have pressurized gas

inside and require special handling.

They can burst or shatter if

scratched or dropped. Hold a bulb

only by its plastic or metal case.

Do not touch the glass part of a

bulb with bare hands.

Adding washer fluid Replacing light bulbs—

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

423

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

NOTICE

Only use a bulb of the listed type.

The inside of the lens of exterior lights

such as headlights may temporarily fog up

when the lens becomes wet in the rain or

in a car wash. This is not a problem

because the fogging is caused by the

temperature difference between the outside

and inside of the lens, just like the

windshield fogs up in the rain. However, if

there is a large drop of water on the

inside of the lens, or if there is water

pooled inside the light, contact your

Toyota dealer.

Light bulbs Bulb

No. WType

Headlights (high) 9005 60 A

Headlights (low) 9006 51 B

Front turn signal,

parking and front

side marker lights

7443 21/5 C

Front fog lights —55 D

Rear turn signal

lights 7440 21 E

Back−up lights 921 16 C

Rear side marker

lights — 5 C

License plate light 168 5 C

Interior light — 8 F

Front personal

lights — 8 C

Vanity lights — 8 C

Luggage

compartment light — 5 E

A: HB3 halogen bulbs

B: HB4 halogen bulbs

C: Wedge base bulbs (clear)

D: H11 halogen bulbs

E: Wedge base bulbs (amber)

F: Double end bulbs

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

424

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Low beam

(outside)

High beam (inside)

1. Open the hood. Turn the bulb base

counterclockwise to the front of the

vehicle as shown.

The above illustration shows the left−hand

headlight.

2. Unplug the connector while depress-

ing the lock release.

If the connector is tight, wiggle it.

3. Plug in a new bulb into the connec-

tor and install it into the mounting

hole.

Aiming is not necessary after replacing

the bulb. When aiming adjustment is nec-

essary, contact your Toyota dealer.

—Headlights

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

425

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If either the left or right front fog light

burns out, contact your Toyota dealer.

NOTICE

Do not try to replace the front fog

light bulbs by yourself. You may dam-

age the vehicle.

—Front turn signal, parking

and front side marker lights —Front fog lights

—Rear turn signal, rear side

marker and back−up lights

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

426

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

a: Rear side marker light

b: Rear turn signal light

c: Back−up light

Use a flathead screwdriver.

—License plate light

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

427

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

SPECIFICATIONS

Specifications

Dimensions and weights 428. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Engine 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuel 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Service specifications 429. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Tires 433. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Fuses 434. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 8

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

428

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

∗1: 215/70R16 tires

∗2: 225/65R17 tires

∗3: 235/55R18 tires

∗4: With spare tire cover

∗5: With over fender

∗6: Unladen vehicle

∗7: With third seat

∗8: With roof rails

∗9: 2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

∗10: 3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

∗11: Without towing package

∗12: With towing package

Dimensions and weights

Overall length mm (in.)

Overall width mm (in.)

Overall height∗6mm (in.)

Wheelbase mm (in.)

Front tread mm (in.)

Rear tread mm (in.)

Vehicle capacity weight

(occupants + luggage) kg (lb.)

1685 (66.3)

1690 (66.5)∗7

1745 (68.7)∗8

1755 (69.1)∗7, 8

4570 (179.9)∗1

4575 (180.1)∗2

4580 (180.3)∗3

4600 (181.1)∗4

1815 (71.5)

1855 (73.0)∗5

2660 (104.7)

1560 (61.4)

375 (825)

525 (1155)∗7

Towing capacity

(trailer weight + cargo weight) kg (lb.)

680 (1500)∗9

907 (2000)∗10, 11

1588 (3500)∗10, 12

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

429

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Model:

2AZ−FE and 2GR−FE

Type:

2AZ−FE engine

4 cylinder in line, 4 cycle, gasoline

2GR−FE engine

6 cylinder V type, 4 cycle, gasoline

Bore and stroke, mm (in.):

2AZ−FE engine

88.5 96.0 (3.48 3.78)

2GR−FE engine

94.0 83.0 (3.70 3.27)

Displacement, cm3 (cu. in.):

2AZ−FE engine 2362 (144.1)

2GR−FE engine 3456 (210.9)

Fuel type:

Unleaded gasoline, Octane Rating 87

(Research Octane Number 91) or higher

Fuel tank capacity, L (gal., Imp. gal.):

60 (15.9, 13.2)

ENGINE

Valve clearance (engine cold), mm (in.):

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine only

Intake 0.19—0.29 (0.007—0.011)

Exhaust 0.38—0.48 (0.015—0.019)

Spark plug type:

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

DENSO SK20R11

NGK IFR6A11

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

DENSO FK20HR11

Spark plug gap, mm (in.):

1.1 (0.043)

NOTICE

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine—Use only

above spark plugs. Do not adjust

gaps for engine performance or

smooth driveability.

Engine Fuel Service specifications

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

430

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

ENGINE LUBRICATION

Oil capacity (drain and refill),

L (qt., Imp. qt.):

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

With filter 4.3 (4.5, 3.8)

Without filter 4.1 (4.3, 3.6)

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

With filter 6.1 (6.4, 5.4)

Without filter 5.7 (6.0, 5.0)

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” is used in

your Toyota vehicle. Use Toyota approved

“Toyota Genuine Motor Oil” or equivalent

to satisfy the following grade and

viscosity.

Oil grade:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil

Recommended oil viscosity:

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

SAE 5W−20 or 0W−20

Outside temperature

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

SAE 5W−30

Outside temperature

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

431

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

COOLING SYSTEM

Total capacity, L(qt., lmp. qt.):

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

6.8 (7.2, 6.0)

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine

Without towing package

8.9 (9.4, 7.8)

With towing package

9.3 (9.8, 8.2)

Coolant type:

“Toyota Super Long Life Coolant” is

used in your Toyota vehicle at factory

fill. In order to avoid technical problems,

only use “Toyota Super Long Life

Coolant” or similar high quality ethylene

glycol based non−silicate, non−amine,

non−nitrite, and non−borate coolant with

long−life hybrid organic acid technology.

(Coolant with long−life hybrid organic

acid technology consists of the combina-

tion of low phosphates and organic

acids.)

Do not use plain water alone.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for

further details.

BATTERY

Open voltage∗ at 20_C (68_F):

12.6—12.8 V Fully charged

12.2—12.4 V Half charged

11.8—12.0 V Discharged

∗: Voltage that is checked 20 minutes af-

ter the key is removed with all the lights

turned off

Charging rates:

5 A max.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

Fluid capacity (drain and refill), L (qt.,

Imp. qt.):

Up to 3.5 (3.7, 3.1)

Fluid type:

Toyota Genuine ATF WS

Change automatic transmission fluid only

as necessary.

Generally, it is necessary to change

automatic transmission fluid only if your

vehicle is driven under one of the Special

Operating Conditions listed in your

“Scheduled Maintenance Guide” or

“Owner’s Manual Supplement”. When

changing the automatic transmission fluid,

use only “Toyota Genuine ATF WS” (ATF

JWS3324 or NWS9638) to aid in assuring

optimum transaxle performance.

Notice: Using automatic transmission

fluid other than “Toyota Genuine ATF

WS” may cause deterioration in shift

quality, locking up of your transmission

accompanied by vibration, and ultimate-

ly damage the automatic transmission

of your vehicle.

Please contact your Toyota dealer for fur-

ther details.

TRANSFER

(four−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

0.45 (0.48 0.40)

Oil type:

Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:

Above −18_C (0_F)

SAE 85W−90

Below −18_C (0_F)

SAE 80W−90

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

432

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

REAR DIFFERENTIAL

(four−wheel drive models)

Oil capacity, L (qt., Imp. qt.):

0.5 (0.5, 0.4)

Oil type:

Hypoid gear oil API GL−5

Recommended oil viscosity:

Above −18_C (0_F)

SAE 90

Below −18_C (0_F)

SAE 80W or 80W−90

BRAKES

Minimum pedal clearance when depressed

with a force of 490 N (50 kgf, 110 lbf)

with the engine running, mm (in.):

2.4 L 4−cylinder (2AZ−FE) engine

Without third seat 95 (3.7)

With third seat 120 (4.7)

3.5 L V6 (2GR−FE) engine 120 (4.7)

Pedal free play, mm (in.):

1—6 (0.04—0.24)

Pad wear limit, mm (in.):

1.0 (0.04)

Parking brake adjustment when pulled with

the force of 200 N (21 kgf, 45 lbf):

6—8 clicks

Fluid type:

SAE J1703 or FMVSS No.116 DOT 3

STEERING

Wheel free play:

Less than 30 mm (1.2 in.)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

433

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Tire size, cold tire inflation pressure and wheel size:

Tire size

Cold tire inflation pressure

kPa (kgf/cm2 or bar, psi) Wheel size

Front Rear Spare

215/70R16 99H 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 16 61/2J

225/65R17 101H 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 17 61/2J

∗1

17 7J∗2

235/55R18 99H 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 220 (2.2, 32) 18 71/2J

∗1: Steel wheels

∗2: Aluminum wheels

Wheel nut torque, N·m (kgf·m, ft·lbf):

103 (10.5, 76)

NOTE: For a complete information on tires (e.g. replacing tires or replacing wheels), see “Checking tire inflation pres-

sure” through “Aluminum wheel precautions”, pages 408 through 416 in Section 7−2.

Tires

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

434

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT (No.1)

1. SPARE 30 A: Spare fuse

2. SPARE 20 A: Spare fuse

3. SPARE 10 A: Spare fuse

4. ECU−B2 7.5 A: Air conditioning sys-

tem, power windows

5. RSE 7.5 A: Rear seat entertainment

system

6. STR LOCK 20 A: No circuit

7. RAD NO.1 20 A: Audio system

8. ECU−B 10 A: Wireless remote control

system, electric power steering system,

main body ECU, power door lock, front

passenger occupant classification sys-

tem, clock, audio system, meters and

gauges

9. DOME 10 A: Engine switch light, interi-

or light, vanity lights, luggage compart-

ment light, front personal lights, foot

lights

10. HEAD LH 10 A: Left−hand headlight

(high beam)

11. HEAD RH 10 A: Right−hand headlight

(high beam)

12. HEAD LL 10 A: Left−hand headlight

(low beam)

13. HEAD RL 10 A: Right−hand headlight

(low beam)

14. AC INV 15 A: AC inverter

15. TOWING 30 A: No circuit

16. STV HTR 25 A: No circuit

17. DEICER 20 A: Windshield wiper de−

icer

18. HTR 50 A: Air conditioning system

19. PTC2 50 A: No circuit

20. PTC1 50 A: No circuit

21. HEAD MAIN 50 A: “HEAD LL”, “HEAD

RL”, “HEAD LH”, “HEAD RH” fuses

22. RDI 30 A (without towing package)

or FAN2 50 A (with towing package):

Electric cooling fan

23. CDS 30 A (without towing package)

or FAN1 50 A (with towing package):

Electric cooling fan

24. H−LP CLN 30 A: No circuit

Fuses

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

435

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

ENGINE COMPARTMENT (No.2)

1. AMP 30 A: Audio system

2. AM2 30 A: Starting system

3. IG2 15 A: Starting system, multiport

fuel injection system/sequential multi-

port fuel injection system

4. HAZ 10 A: Emergency flashers

5. ETCS 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

6. AM2−2 7.5 A: No circuit

7. EFI NO.1 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

8. EFI NO.2 10 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system

9. EFI MAIN 20 A: Multiport fuel injection

system/sequential multiport fuel injec-

tion system, “EFI NO.1”, “EFI NO.2”

fuses

10. HORN 10 A: Horn

11. A/F 20 A (3.5 L V6 [2GR−FE] engine

only): A/F sensor

12. P/I 50 A: “EFI MAIN”, “HORN”, “A/F”

fuses

13. ABS2 30 A: Anti−lock brake system,

traction control system, enhanced ve-

hicle stability control system, “AUTO

LSD” system, downhill assist control

system, hill−start assist control system

14. ABS1 50 A: Anti−lock brake system,

traction control system, enhanced ve-

hicle stability control system, “AUTO

LSD” system, downhill assist control

system, hill−start assist control system

15. EMPS 60 A: Electric power steering

system

16. MAIN 80 A: “HEAD MAIN”, “ECU−B2”,

“RSE” fuses

17. ALT 120 A (without towing package)

or 140 A (with towing package):

“ABS 1”, “ABS 2”, “RDI”, “CDS”,

“FAN1”, “FAN2”, “AC INV”, “TOWING”,

“HTR”, “DEICER” fuses

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

436

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

INSTRUMENT PANEL

1. S−HTR 15 A: Seat heaters

2. WIP 25 A: Windshield wipers

3. RR WIP 15 A: Rear window wiper

4. WSH 15 A: Windshield washer, rear

window washer

5. ECU−IG1 10 A: Electric cooling fan,

anti−lock brake system, traction control

system, enhanced vehicle stability con-

trol system, “AUTO LSD” system,

downhill assist control system, hill−start

assist control system, active torque

control 4WD system, tire pressure

monitor system, automatic transmission

shift lock system, air conditioning sys-

tem, main body ECU, electric moon

roof, stop/tail lights, windshield wiper

de−icer, electric power steering system,

clock, AC inverter

6. ECU−IG2 10 A: Air conditioning sys-

tem, rear window defogger

7. OBD 7.5 A: On−board diagnosis sys-

tem

8. STOP 10 A: Stop/tail lights, high

mounted stoplight, automatic transmis-

sion shift lock system, multiport fuel

injection system/sequential multiport

fuel injection system, anti−lock brake

system, traction control system, en-

hanced vehicle stability control system,

“AUTO LSD” system, downhill assist

control system, hill−start assist control

system

9. DOOR 25 A: Main body ECU, power

door lock system

10. ACC−B 25 A: “ACC”, “CIG” fuses

11. 4WD 7.5 A: Active torque control 4WD

system

12. FR FOG 15 A: Front fog lights

13. AM1 7.5 A: Starting system

14. TAIL 10 A: Tail lights, parking lights,

license plate light, front fog lights, rear

side marker lights

15. PANEL 7.5 A: Clock, instrument panel

lights, audio system

16. GAUGE1 10 A: Buck−up lights, charg-

ing system

17. D FR DOOR 20 A: Power window

(front doors)

18. RL DOOR 20 A: Power window (rear

left door)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

437

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

19. RR DOOR 20 A: Power window (rear

right door)

20. S/ROOF 25 A: Electric moon roof

21. CIG 15 A: No circuit

22. ACC 7.5 A: Audio system, power out-

lets, power rear view mirror control,

automatic transmission shift lock sys-

tem, main body ECU, clock, rear seat

entertainment system

23. MIR HTR 10 A: Outside rear view mir-

ror heaters

24. PWR OUTLET 15 A: Power outlets

25. RR FOG 10 A: No circuit

26. IGN 7.5 A: SRS airbag system, multi-

port fuel injection system/sequential

multiport fuel injection system, front

passenger occupant classification sys-

tem, starting system

27. GAUGE2 7.5 A: Meters and gauges

28. DEF 30 A: Rear window defogger,

“MIR HTR” fuse

29. P/SEAT 30 A: Power seat

30. POWER 30 A: Power windows

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

438

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

439

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

FOR OWNERS

For owners

Reporting safety defects for U.S. owners 440. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Seat belt instructions for Canadian owners (in French) 440. . . . . . . . . .

SECTION 9

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

440

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

If you believe that your vehicle

has a defect which could cause a

crash or could cause injury or

death, you should immediately in-

form the National Highway Traffic

Safety Administration (NHTSA) in

addition to notifying Toyota Motor

Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

(Toll−free: 1−800−331−4331).

If NHTSA receives similar com-

plaints, it may open an investiga-

tion, and if it finds that a safety

defect exists in a group of ve-

hicles, it may order a recall and

remedy campaign. However,

NHTSA cannot become involved

in individual problems between

you, your dealer, or Toyota Motor

Sales, U.S.A., Inc.

To contact NHTSA, you may call

the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll−free

at 1−888−327−4236 (TTY:

1−800−424−9153); go to

http://www.safercar.gov; or write

to: Administrator, NHTSA, 1200

New Jersey Ave, S.E.,

Washington, DC 20590. You can

also obtain other information about

motor vehicle safety from

http://www.safercar.gov.

The following is a French explanation

of seat belt instructions extracted from

the seat belt section in this manual.

See the seat belt section for more de-

tailed seat belt instructions in English.

Reporting safety defects for

U.S. owners

Seat belt instructions for

Canadian owners (in

French)—

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

441

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

442

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

2008

Quick Reference Guide

!A word about safe vehicle operations

This Quick Reference Guide is a summary of

basic vehicle operations. It contains brief

descriptions of fundamental operations so you

can locate and use the vehicle’s main

equipment quickly and easily.

The Quick Reference Guide is not intended as

a substitute for the Owner’s Manual located

in the vehicle’s glove box. We strongly

encourage you to review the Owner’s Manual

and supplementary manuals so you will have

a better understanding of the vehicle’s

capabilities and limitations.

Your dealership and the entire staff of Toyota

Motor Sales, U.S.A., Inc. wish you many years

of satisfied driving in your new RAV4.

This Quick Reference Guide is not a full

description of RAV4 operations. Every

RAV4 owner should review the Owner’s

Manual that accompanies this vehicle.

Pay special attention to the boxed

“ ” information highlighted

throughout the Owner’s Manual. Each box

contains safe operating instructions to

help you avoid injury or equipment

malfunction.

All information in this Quick Reference

Guide is current at the time of printing.

Toyota reserves the right to make changes

at any time without notice.

2008

RAV4

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

INDEX

Item Page no.

OVERVIEW

Engine maintenance

Fuel tank door release and cap 6

Hood release 7

Indicator symbols 4-5

Instrument cluster 4

Instrument panel 2-3

Keyless entry* 6-7

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Active torque control 4WD 10

Air Conditioning/Heating 16-17

Audio 18-19

Auto LSD (Limited Slip Differential) 21

Automatic Transmission 9

Bottle holders 17

Clock 17

Cruise control 23

Cup holders 23

Door locks

Light control-Instrument panel

Lights & turn signals 14

Moonroof 20

Parking brake 15

Power outlets 22

Rear seat entertainment system 20

Seat adjustments-Front 10

Seat adjustments-Second row seats 11

Seat heaters

Seats-Head restraints 11

Seats-Folding down second row seats 12

Seats-Stowing third row seats 13

Te l e p h o n e controls (Bluetooth®) 21

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel 15

Windows 15

Windshield wipers & washers

SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Doors-Child safety locks 24

Seat belts 24

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor 24

Spare tire & tools 25

Tire Pressure Warning System 24

* Visit your Toyota dealer for information on

customizing this feature.

OVERVIEW

Instrument panel

Steering wheel audio controls

Telephone controls*

Speech command button*

Cruise control

Instrument panel light control

Headlight, turn signal and front fog light* control

Wiper and washer controls

Four-wheel drive lock switch (4WD models) or

“AUTO LSD” switch (2WD models)

Audio system

Emergency flasher switch

Front passenger occupant classification indicator

Air Conditioning controls

Rear window and outside rearview mirror

defogger switch*

Steering wheel

controls

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Clock and Air Conditioning display

12V DC Power outlet

Seat heater switch*

Downhill Assist Control switch

Front passenger seat belt reminder light

Engine immobilizer indicator*

Engine switch

Tilt and telescopic steering release

115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch*

* If equipped

With manual Air

Conditioning system

With automatic Air

Conditioning system

Open door warning1

•Vehicle Stability Control warning1

•“AUTO LSD” warning1

•Traction Control warning1

•Downhill Assist Control warning1

•Hill-start Assist Control warning1

OVERVIEW

1For details, refer to “Service reminder indicators and warning

buzzers,” Section 1-6, 2008 Owner’s Manual.

2For details, refer to “Active torque control 4WD system,”

Section 1-7, 2008 Owner’s Manual.

Tachometer

Service indicator and reminder

Speedometer

Engine coolant temperature

Fuel gauge

Odometer, two trip meters and outside

temperature display

Trip meter reset knob

Instrument cluster

Charging system warning1

Low engine oil pressure warning1

Brake system warning1

Malfunction/Check Engine indicator1

Engine oil replacement reminder1

Indicator symbols

Driver/Front passenger seat belt

reminder1 (alarm will sound if speed

is over 12 mph)

Low fuel level warning1

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

3If this light flashes, refer to “Cruise control,” Section 1-7, 2008

Owner’s Manual.

Automatic Transmission indicator (4-speed)1

Front passenger occupant classification indicator

Turn signal indicator

Front fog light indicator

Low windshield washer fluid level warning1

Airbag SRS warning1

Headlight high beam indicator

Automatic Transmission fluid temperature

warning1

Low Tire Pressure Warning1

“4WD” warning2

Electric power steering system warning1

Four-wheel drive lock indicator2

Slip indicator

Downhill Assist Control indicator

“AUTO LSD” indicator

Cruise control indicator3

Anti-lock Brake System warning1

Automatic Transmission indicator (5-speed)1

OVERVIEW

NOTE: Tighten until one click is heard. If the cap is

not tightened enough, Check Engine “ ” indicator

may illuminate.

Fuel tank door release and cap

Pull up

Tu r n

Store

NOTE: After unlocking, if a door is not opened within

30 seconds, all doors will relock for safety.

Keyless entry

Locking operation Unlocking operation

Push Push ONCE: Driver door

TWICE: All doors

Driver seat

Beep sound can be switched “ON” or “OFF.” Refer to

the Owner’s Manual for more details.

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Hood release

Pull

Pull up latch

and raise hood

Panic button

Push and hold

OVERVIEW

Engine coolant reservoir

Engine oil filler cap

Engine oil level dipstick

Windshield and back window washer fluid tank

Note: Regularly scheduled maintenance, including

oil changes, will help extend the life of

your vehicle and maintain performance.

Please refer to the “Owner’s Warranty

Information Booklet,” “Scheduled

Maintenance Guide” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement.”

6 cylinder (2GR-FE) engine

Engine maintenance

4 cylinder (2AZ-FE) engine

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Automatic Transmission

* The engine switch must be ON, and the brake

pedal depressed to shift from “Park.”

Downshifting increases power going uphill, or

provides engine braking downhill. For best fuel

economy during normal driving conditions, always

drive with the shift lever in the “D” position.

Park*

Reverse

Neutral

Drive

Third gear

Second gear

First gear

4-speed models

5-speed models

Park*

Reverse

Neutral

Drive

Third gear

Second gear

First gear

Fourth gear

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Position

Height crank (driver side only)

Seatback angle

Driver seat: position, cushion angle and height

Passenger seat: position only

Seatback angle

Lumbar support

Seat adjustments-Front

Manual seat Power seat

Auto lock functionsActive torque control 4WD (4WD models)

Four-wheel drive lock switch

Push the switch to ensure that the engine torque is

applied to the four wheels.

NOTE: Should ONLY be used when wheel spinning

occurs on loose or unpaved surfaces.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Seats-Head restraints

Front seats Second row seats

Third row seats

Lock release button

Seat adjustments-Second row seats

Position

Seatback angle

Seatback lock release

Vehicles with

third row seats

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

(2) Lower

(3) Pull down

Seats-Folding down second row seats

Right side

remote seat release

Left side

remote seat release

Vehicles with third row seats

Vehicles without third row seats

(1) Push

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Windshield wipers & washers

Rear

Front

Pull to wash and wipe

Adjust interval

Interval wipe

Slow

Fast

Wash and wipe

Wipe

Interval wipe

Wash and wipe

Seats-Stowing third row seats (if equipped)

(2) Lower

(1) Push

(5) Pull up

(7) Push

down

(8) Push to lock in

(4) Fold down

(3) Pull

(9) Push to lock in

(6) Lift up

Single wipe

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Lights & turn signals

Turn signals

Headlights

High beam flasher

Low beam

Front fog lights (if equipped)

Headlights

-Daytime Running Light system (if equipped)

Automatically turns on the headlights at a reduced

intensity.

-Automatic light cut off system Will automatically

turn lights off after a delay of 30 seconds, or the

lock switch on remote may be pushed.

Front fog lights come on only when the headlights

are on low beam.

Parking lights

Right turn

Tu r n

Lane change

Left turn

High beam

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Tilt and telescopic steering wheel

Hold wheel, push lever down, set angle and length,

and return lever.

NOTE: Do not attempt to adjust while the vehicle

is in motion.

Lock

release

lever

Length

Angle

Windows

Driver side

Automatic operation (driver side only) Push the

switch completely down or pull it completely up and

release to fully open or close. To stop window

midway, lightly push the switch in the opposite

direction.

Window lock switch Deactivates all passenger

windows. Driver’s window remains operable.

Down

Windows

lock

button

Down

NOTE: If the battery is disconnected, the window

needs to be reinitialized. Refer to the Owner’s

Manual for more details.

Parking brake

Pull

(2) Push

(1) Pull slightly

(3) Lower

Set Release

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Seat heaters (if equipped)

Left front seat

Right front seat

Air Conditioning/Heating

Temperature (driver side)

Fresh or recirculated cabin air

Airflow vent

Air Conditioning ON/OFF

“DUAL” button

Indicator ON: Separate temperature settings

for driver and passenger.

Indicator OFF: Synchronize temperature

settings for driver and passenger.

Temperature (front passenger side)

Micro dust and pollen filter ON/OFF

Rear defogger

Fan speed

Climate control OFF

Automatic climate control ON

Adjust the temperature setting, and airflow

vents and fan will adjust automatically.

Automatic Air Conditioning

In “ ” or “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ”

indicator “OFF”) to reduce window fogging.

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Bottle holders

Front doors Rear doors

Clock

Manual

Air Conditioning system

H- Hour set

M- Minute set

:00- Round off minutes

Automatic

Air Conditioning system

Manual Air Conditioning

Airflow vent selector

Fan speed

Temperature

Air Conditioning ON/OFF

Use for quick cooling. MAX A/C changes air

intake to recirculate. It is not possible to

change intake to fresh, or to turn A/C OFF in

this mode.

Rear defogger

Fresh or recirculated cabin air

In “ ” or “ ” mode, use fresh air (“ ”

indicator “OFF”) to reduce window fogging.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

CD PLAYER

To scan tracks on a disc Push “SCAN.” Push again to

hold selection.

CD Changer (Type 2)

-To load one disc Push “LOAD” and insert one disc.

-To load multiple discs Push and hold “LOAD” until

you hear a beep. Insert one disc. Wait until the

green indicator illuminates and shutter opens to

insert next disc.

To select a file (MP3/WMA only) Turn “TUNE.FILE.”

To select a folder (MP3/WMA only) Push either side

of “FOLDER” or “TYPE/FOLDER.”

Audio

View CD text

Eject CD

Push to turn

ON/OFF

Push to

adjust

tone &

balance

Push to

skip

up/down

folder

Seek

station/

CD track

select

Station/CD

track scan

Mode

Load CD(s)

Preset buttons - functions in other

modes indicated above number.

Type 1

Type 2 additional functions

Type 2 (with JBL speakers)

AM/Satellite

radio

View genre/Push to

skip up/down folder

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

“ ”

Volume control

“MODE”

Push to turn audio ON and select an audio mode.

Push and hold to turn the audio OFF.

“ ”

-In radio mode Push to select a preset station;

push and hold to seek the next strong station.

-In CD mode Push to skip up or down to next/

previous track.

By inserting a mini plug into the AUX audio jack, you

can listen to music from a portable audio device

through the vehicle’s speaker system.

Steering wheel controls (if equipped)

AUX audio jack

RADIO

To preset stations Tune in the desired station and

hold down a preset button (1-6) until you hear a

beep. Push desired preset button (1-6) to select.

To scan stations Push “SCAN.” Push and hold to scan

preset stations. Push again to hold selection.

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

Moonroof (if equipped)

Tilting operation

Sliding operation

NOTE: If battery is disconnected, the moonroof

needs to be reinitialized. Refer to the Owner’s

Manual for more details.

Open

Tilt

Recommended

driving position

to minimize

wind noise

Front audio system

DVD player

DVD screen

Remote control

A/V input adapter

115V AC Power outlet

115V AC Power outlet ON/OFF switch

Rear seat entertainment system

(if equipped)

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Door locks

Unlock

Lock

Auto LSD (Limited Slip Differential)

(2WD models)

Push the “AUTO LSD” switch when the vehicle is

stopped. To deactivate, push the switch again.

NOTE: Will ONLY work for 2-wheel drive models.

Should ONLY be used when wheel spinning

occurs on slippery or unpaved surfaces.

Refer to the Owner‘s Manual for more details on

this system before attempting to use it.

Bluetooth®technology allows dialing or receipt of

calls without taking hands from the steering wheel

or using a cable to connect the telephone and the

system.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Telephone controls (Bluetooth®)*

(if equipped)

FEATURES/OPERATIONS

115V AC (if equipped)

ON/OFF switch

Rear console

Push

NOTE: Engine switch must be in the “ON” position

to be used.

Light control-Instrument panel

Brightness

control

Power outlets

12V DC

Luggage Compartment

Instrument panel Inside center console

NOTE: Designed for car accessories. Engine switch

must be in the “ACC” or “ON” position to be used.

With the dial turned fully up, instrument panel lights

will not dim when the headlights are turned ON.

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

Cup holders

Front Rear

Second row

Third row side trim

(if equipped)

Cruise control

Turning system ON/OFF

Functions

System ON/OFF

Resume2/Increase speed

Set/Decrease speed

Cancel1

1 The set speed may also be cancelled by depressing

the brake pedal.

2 The set speed may be resumed once vehicle speed

exceeds 25 mph.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

SAFETY AND

EMERGENCY FEATURES

Moving the lever to “LOCK” will allow the door to

be opened only from the outside.

Doors-Child safety locks

If belt is fully extended, then retracted even

slightly, it cannot be re-extended beyond that point,

unless fully retracted again. This feature is used to

help hold child restraint systems securely.

To find more information about seat belts, and how

to install a child restraint system, refer to the

Owner’s Manual.

Keep as low on

hips as possible

Take up

slack

Too high

Seat belts

Tire Pressure Warning System

The system is designed to provide a warning when

tire pressure of any one of the tires (including the

spare) is critically low.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for more details.

Seat belts-Shoulder belt anchor

Push up or

squeeze lock

release to lower

Rear door

Spare tire & tools

Tool location

Removing the spare tire

OVERVIEW FEATURES/OPERATIONS SAFETY AND EMERGENCY FEATURES

(1) To remove the spare tire cover,* open the back

door. Unhook the latch on the bottom of the

cover. After closing the back door, remove the

cover.

(2) To remove the spare tire, turn the wheel nuts

counterclockwise with the wheel nut wrench

and remove.

Refer to the Owner’s Manual for tire changing and

jack positioning procedures.

* If equipped

Luggage compartment

Inside left side box

Luggage compartment

Inside right side box

Jack

Tool bag

(1)

(2)

MN 00505-QRG08-RAV4

Printed in the USA 8/07

Customer Experience Center

1-800-331-4331

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Foreword

Welcome to the growing group of value−conscious people who drive Toyotas. We are proud of the advanced engineering and

quality construction of each vehicle we build.

This Owner’s Manual explains the operation of your new Toyota. Please read it thoroughly and have all the occupants

follow the instructions carefully. Doing so will help you enjoy many years of safe and trouble−free motoring. For

important information about this manual and your Toyota, read the following pages carefully.

When it comes to service, remember that your Toyota dealer knows your vehicle very well and is interested in your complete

satisfaction. Your Toyota dealer will provide quality maintenance and any other assistance you may require.

If there is not a Toyota dealer near you, please call the following number:

U.S. OWNERS: DWhen traveling in the U.S. mainland or Canada:

Toyota Customer Experience Center Toll −free:1−800−331−4331

DHawaii:

Servco Automotive Customer Services Toll −free:1−888−272−5515

CANADIAN OWNERS: DWhen traveling in Canada or the U.S. mainland:

Toyota Canada Customer Interaction Centre Tol l−free:1−888−TOYOTA−8 or 1−888−869−6828

Please leave this Owner’s Manual in this vehicle at the time of resale. The next owner will need this information also.

All information and specifications in this manual are current at the time of printing. However, because of Toyota’s policy of

continual product improvement, we reserve the right to make changes at any time without notice.

Please note that this manual applies to all models and explains all equipment, including options. Therefore, you may

find some explanations for equipment not installed on your vehicle.

Please access our websites for further information.

DThe U.S. mainland www.toyota.com

DHawaii www.toyotahawaii.com

DCanada www.toyota.ca

Motor Corporation.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Publication No. OM42726U

Part No. 01999-42726

Printed in Japan 01−0802−00 I

( U)

Quick index

DIf a service reminder indicator or warning buzzer comes on 129. . . . . . . .

DIf your vehicle will not start 356. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf your engine stalls while driving 359. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf your vehicle overheats 360. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf you have a flat tire 361. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DIf your vehicle needs to be towed 373. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DTips for driving during break−in period 309. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DHow to start the engine 342. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DGeneral maintenance 391. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

DComplete index NO TAG. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Gas station information

Fuel type:

UNLEADED gasoline, Octane Rating 87 (Research Octane Number 91) or

higher

See page 309 for detailed information.

Fuel tank capacity:

60 L (15.9 gal., 13.2 Imp. gal.)

Engine oil:

ILSAC multigrade engine oil is recommended.

See page 405 for detailed information.

Tire information: See pages 408 through 416.

Tire inflation pressure: See page 433.

U−1

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Important information about this manual

Safety and vehicle damage warnings

Throughout this manual, you will see safety and vehicle dam-

age warnings. You must follow these warnings carefully to

avoid possible injury or damage.

The types of warnings, what they look like, and how they are

used in this manual are explained as follows:

CAUTION

This is a warning against anything which may cause

injury to people if the warning is ignored. You are

informed about what you must or must not do in

order to reduce the risk of injury to yourself and

others.

NOTICE

This is a warning against anything which may cause

damage to the vehicle or its equipment if the warning

is ignored. You are informed about what you must or

must not do in order to avoid or reduce the risk of

damage to your vehicle and its equipment.

Safety symbol

When you see the safety symbol

shown above, it means: “Do not...”;

“Do not do this”; or “Do not let this

happen”.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

iii

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Important information about your Toyota

Occupant restraint systems

Toyota encourages you and your family to take the time to

read Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual carefully. In

terms of helping you understand how you can receive the

maximum benefit of the occupant restraint systems this

vehicle provides, Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual is

the most important Section for you and your family to

read.

Section 1−3 describes the function and operation concern-

ing seats, seat belts, SRS airbags and child restraint sys-

tems of this vehicle and some potential hazards you

should be aware of. These systems work together along

with the overall structure of this vehicle in order to provide

occupant restraint in the event of a crash. The effect of

each system is enhanced when it is used properly and

together with other systems. No single occupant restraint

system can, by itself, provide you or your family with the

equal level of restraint which these systems can provide

when used together. That is why it is important for you and

your family to understand the purpose and proper use of

each of these systems and how they relate to each other.

The purpose of all occupant restraint systems is to help

reduce the possibility of death or serious injury in the

event of a collision. None of these systems, either individ-

ually or together, can ensure that there is no injury in the

event of collision. However, the more you know about

these systems and how to use them properly, the greater

your chances become of surviving an accident without

death or serious injury.

Seat belts provide the primary restraint to all occupants of

the vehicle, and every occupant of the vehicle should wear

seat belts properly at all times. Children should always be

secured in child restraint systems that are appropriate for

their age and size. SRS (Supplemental Restraint System)

airbags are, as their names imply, designed to work with,

and be supplemental to, seat belts and are not substitutes

for them. SRS airbags can be very effective in reducing

the risk of head and chest injuries by preventing contact of

the head and chest with interior portions of the vehicle.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

In order to be effective, the SRS airbags must deploy with

tremendous speed. The rapid deployment of the SRS air-

bags makes the SRS airbags themselves potential sources

of death or serious injury if an occupant is too close to an

airbag, or if an object or some part of his or her body has

been placed between the occupant and the airbag at the

time of deployment. This is just one example of how the

instructions in Section 1−3 of this Owner’s Manual will help

ensure proper use of the occupant restraint systems, and

increase the safety they can provide to you and your fami-

ly in the event of an accident.

Toyota recommends you to read the provisions in Section

1−3 carefully and refer to them as needed during your time

of ownership of this vehicle.

Event data recorder

Your vehicle has computers that monitor and control cer-

tain aspects of your vehicle. These computers assist in

driving and maintaining optimal vehicle performance. Be-

sides storing data useful for troubleshooting, there is a

system to record data in a crash or a near car crash

event. This is called an Event Data Recorder (EDR).

The SRS airbag sensor assembly contains the EDR. In a

crash or a near car crash event, this device may record

some or all of the following information:

DEngine speed

DWhether the brake pedal was applied or not

DVehicle speed

DTo what extent the accelerator pedal was depressed

DPosition of the transmission selector lever

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

DWhether the driver and front passenger wore the seat

belts or not

DDriver’s seat position

DFront passenger’s occupant classification

DSRS airbag deployment data

DSRS airbag system diagnostic data

The information above is intended to be used for the

purpose of improving vehicle safety performance. Unlike

general data recorders, the EDR does not record sound

data such as conversation between passengers.

Toyota will not disclose the data recorded in an EDR to a

third party except when:

DAn agreement from the vehicle’s owner (or the leas-

ing company for a leased vehicle) is obtained

DOfficially requested by the police or other authorities

DUsed as a defense for Toyota in a law suit

DOrdered by the court

However, if necessary Toyota will:

DUse the data for research on Toyota vehicle safety

performance

DDisclose the data to a third party for research pur-

poses without disclosing details of the vehicle owner,

and only when it is deemed necessary

DDisclose summarized data cleared of vehicle identifi-

cation information to a non−Toyota organization for

research purposes

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

New vehicle warranty

Your new vehicle is covered by the following Toyota limited

warranties:

DNew vehicle warranty

DEmission control systems warranty

DOthers

For further information, please refer to the “Owner’s

Warranty Information Booklet” or “Owner’s Manual

Supplement”.

Your responsibility for

maintenance

It is the owner’s responsibility to make sure that the speci-

fied maintenance is performed. Section 6 gives details of

these maintenance requirements. Also included in Section

6 is general maintenance. For scheduled maintenance in-

formation, please refer to the “Scheduled Maintenance

Guide” or “Owner’s Manual Supplement”.

Important health and safety

information about your Toyota

CAUTION

DWARNING: Engine exhaust, some of its constitu-

ents, and a wide variety of automobile compo-

nents contain or emit chemicals known to the

State of California to cause cancer and birth de-

fects and other reproductive harm. In addition,

oils, fuels and fluids contained in vehicles as

well as waste produced by component wear con-

tain or emit chemicals known to the State of

California to cause cancer and birth defects or

other reproductive harm.

DBattery posts, terminals and related accessories

contain lead and lead compounds. Wash your

hands after handling. Used engine oil contains

chemicals that have caused cancer in laboratory

animals. Always protect your skin by washing

thoroughly with soap and water.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

vii

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Accessories, spare parts and

modification of your Toyota

A wide variety of non−genuine spare parts and accessories

for Toyota vehicles are currently available in the market.

You should know that Toyota does not warrant these prod-

ucts and is not responsible for their performance, repair, or

replacement, or for any damage they may cause to, or

adverse effect they may have on, your Toyota vehicle.

This vehicle should not be modified with non−genuine

Toyota products. Modification with non−genuine Toyota

products could affect its performance, safety or durability,

and may even violate governmental regulations. In addi-

tion, damage or performance problems resulting from the

modification may not be covered under warranty.

Spark ignition system of your

Toyota

The spark ignition system in your Toyota meets all require-

ments of the Canadian Interference−Causing Equipment

Standard.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

viii

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Installation of a mobile

two−way radio system

As the installation of a mobile two−way radio system in

your vehicle could affect electronic systems such as fol-

lows, be sure to check with your Toyota dealer for precau-

tionary measures or special instructions regarding installa-

tion.

DMultiport fuel injection system/sequential multiport fuel

injection system

DSRS airbag system

DSeat belt pretensioner system

DActive torque control 4WD system

DTraction control system

D“AUTO LSD” system

DEnhanced vehicle stability control system

DDownhill assist control system

DHill−start assist control system

DTire pressure warning system

DCruise control system

DAnti−lock brake system

DElectronic throttle control system

Tires and loading on your

Toyota

Underinflated or overinflated tire pressure and the

excess load may result in the deterioration of

steering ability and braking ability, leading to an

accident. Check the tire inflation pressure periodi-

cally and be sure to keep the load limits given in

this Owner’s Manual. For details about tire inflation

pressure and load limits, see pages 335 and 408.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Scrapping of your Toyota

The SRS airbag and seat belt pretensioner devices in your

Toyota contain explosive chemicals. If the vehicle is

scrapped with the airbags and pretensioners left as they

are, this may cause an accident such as fire. Be sure to

have the systems of the SRS airbag and seat belt preten-

sioner removed and disposed of by the qualified service

shop or by your Toyota dealer before you dispose of your

vehicle.

Leak detection pump

This pump performs fuel evaporation leakage check. This

check is done approximately five hours after the engine is

turned off. So you may hear sound coming from under the

floor around the driver’s seat for several minutes. It does

not indicate a malfunction.

On−pavement and off−road

driving tips

This vehicle belongs to the utility vehicle class. Utility

vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other

types of vehicles. This vehicle will handle and maneuver

differently from an ordinary passenger car because it is

designed for off−road use also. In addition, this vehicle

has a higher ground clearance and center of gravity than

that of an ordinary passenger car. This vehicle design

feature causes this type of vehicle to be more likely to

rollover. Failure to operate this vehicle correctly may result

in loss of control, accidents or vehicle rollover causing

death or serious injury. Be sure to read “Utility vehicle

precautions” on page 308 in Section 2 and “Off−road

driving precautions” on page 345 in Section 3.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Perchlorate Material

Special handling may apply,

See www.dtsc.ca.gov/hazardouswaste/perchlorate.

Your vehicle has components that may contain perchlorate.

These components may include airbag, seat belt preten-

sioners, and wireless remote control batteries.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

You should know as much about the quality and

importance of proper maintenance of your new

vehicle as the people who built it.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual

tells you how to maintain your vehicle and

enables you to correctly perform your own

maintenance.

The best way to keep your new vehicle in top

running order is to maintain it properly from

the moment you drive it off the showroom

floor.

The Toyota authorized Repair Manual is

packed with literally everything you need to

know to perform your own maintenance in

virtually every area of your new vehicle.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

Where to obtain the

Repair Manual

The repair manual for RAV4 may be purchased

from any Toyota dealer or the Material Distribu-

tion Center. To purchase the repair manual, please

contact your Toyota dealer or call the Material

Distribution Center toll−free at 1−800−622−2033.

Maintenance procedures for the engine,

chassis, body, electrical system, and more,

are clearly explained and illustrated.

Periodic maintenance and tune−up

Periodic maintenance and tune−up helps to prevent

small problems from growing into larger ones later on.

The repair manual outlines exactly what maintenance

is required and clearly explains how to do the work

yourself step−by−step.

Areas covered include such things as spark plug re-

placement, valve clearance adjustment and engine oil

and filter replacement.

’08 Rav4_U (L/O 0802)

2008 RAV4 from Feb. ’08 Prod. (OM42726U)

WE REALLY CARE ABOUT YOU  PLEASE BUCKLE UP

Toyota has made a special effort to encourage use of seat belts.

Toyota belts are:

DComfortable

DEasy to use

DConvenient

We encourage you to use your belts every time you drive.

Toyota 2008 Rav4 Owners Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation